J9400 kyocera ошибка

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Вернуться в Принтеры, МФУ, копиры формата A3

Кто сейчас на форуме

Сейчас этот форум просматривают: нет зарегистрированных пользователей и гости: 12

ECOSYS M2135dn ECOSYS M2635dn ECOSYS M2635dw ECOSYS M2735dw ECOSYS M2040dn ECOSYS M2540dn ECOSYS M2540dw ECOSYS M2640idw PF-1100 SERVICE MANUAL Published in October 2017 2S0SM064 Rev.4

CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES. Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.

Notation of products in the manual For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.

Product name

Manual classification

ECOSYS M2135dn ECOSYS M2635dn ECOSYS M2635dw

35 ppm Wi-Fi

ECOSYS M2735dw ECOSYS M2040dn ECOSYS M2540dn ECOSYS M2540dw ECOSYS M2640idw

LCD

—

FAX

—

TSI LCD

40 ppm Wi-Fi

ADF

FAX TSI

DADF HyPAS

KDJ

KDA

KDE

KDAU

×

○

○

×

×

×

○

○

×

○

×

×

×

×

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

○

Revision history Revision

Date

1

2 November 2016

2

3

Pages CONTENTS

Chenge: Page number

1-4, 1-5

Added: FAX functions

2-4

Added: Name of parts number 7

2-9

Correction: Description of «IMPORTANT»

3-2

Correction: Item name of 3-2/3-2(1) Added: 4. Fuser pressure release motor

3-11

Correction: Description of the thermopile

4-3, 4-4 6-9, 6-10

Correction: Maintenance kits

4-36 to 38

Correction: Correction: Procedure of detaching and rettaching the laser scanner unit

4-75

Deleted: Procedure of detaching the front cover

4-95 to 99

Added: Procedure of detaching the Wi-Fi PWB

6-68

Deleted: Destination code (22)

7-2

Correction: rear cover → cover Deleted: (1-1)Step2 to 4

7-9, 7-10

Added: J4002 to J4018

7-15 to 83

Added: 7-2 Self diagnostic, 7-3 Image formation failure 7-4 Electric failure, 7-5 Mechanical failure

28 December 2016 1-5

30 January 2017

Revised contents

Added: (Dual Scan / Simplex ADF)

3-11

Correction: Description of 7 (right → front)

4-101 6-37

Deleted: 5.(1) *:When using the SSFC card, … Added: U222 Description of SSFC

6-10

Correction: Description of Toner Log

6-40

Correction: Initial setting : DBL(Folio)

4-101 6-53, 6-54 6-63 9-12

Correction: Chart no.(7505000106→302NM94330)

4-100 6-53 to 55 6-58, 6-62 9-12

Correction: Chart no.(7505000107→302NM94340)

6-105

Added: U964 Contents (Description of transfer files)

Revision

Date

4

16 October 2017

Pages

Revised contents

CONTENTS

Chenged: Chapter 7

1-2

Correction: Memory size (512→256MB)

4-115

Added: Caution statement

7-1 to 211

Changed: Chapter 7 All

8-1

Chenged: PWB photograph

8-5

Correction: Pin Assignment of YC 19

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols The triangle (

) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is

shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Always ground the copier.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

1. Installation Precautions WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. ……………………………………………………………………………………….. • Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. ………

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. …………….. • Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may cause fire. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. • Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. …………

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. …………………………………………. • Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. …………………………………………………….. • Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. • Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

2. Precautions for Maintenance WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ……………. • Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… • Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. …………………………………………………………………. • Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. …………………………………………………………

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. …………… • Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ……………………………………………………….. • Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. • Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. …………………………………………………………………………………………………

CAUTION • Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. …………………………………………………………….

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ……….

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ……………………………. • Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. …………………. • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. • Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ……………………………………………………………………………………

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ……….

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ……………………………………………………………

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ……………………………….. • After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. …………………………………………………………………………………………. • Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. …………………………………

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ……………………………….. · Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely. · Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents. · Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on. · Always wash hands afterwards. • Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… • Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3. Miscellaneous WARNING • Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ……………………………………………………………………………. • Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

This page is intentionally left blank.

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

CONTENTS 1

Specifications 1-1 Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-1 (1) Common function …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-1 (2) Copy Functions…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-3 (3) Printer Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-3 (4) Scanner Functions………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-4 (5) FAX Functions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-4 (6) Document Processor (Dual Scan / Simplex ADF) ……………………………………………………. 1-5 (7) Paper Feeder (PF-1100)(Option) ……………………………………………………………………………. 1-6 1-2 Part Names………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-7 (1) Machine Exterior…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-7 (2) Connectors/Interior ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-8 (3) With Optional Equipments Attached………………………………………………………………………… 1-9 (4) Operation Panel (TSI)………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-10 (5) Operation Panel Keys (LCD) ………………………………………………………………………………… 1-11 1-3 Overview of Optional Equipment ……………………………………………………………………………….. 1-13 (1) Expansion Memory……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-14 (2) PF-1100 «Paper Feeder» ……………………………………………………………………………………… 1-15 (3) Card Authentication Kit(B) «Card Authentication Kit»………………………………………………… 1-15 (4) UG-33 «ThinPrint Option» …………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-15 (5) SD/SDHC Memory Card………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-15

2

Installation 2-1 Environment …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-1 2-2 Installing the main unit ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-2 (1) Unpacking and checking bundled items …………………………………………………………………… 2-3 (1-1) Main unit……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-3 (1-2) Paper Feeder (Option) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-4 (2) Installing the optional equipment …………………………………………………………………………….. 2-5 (3) Connecting to other device…………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-5 (4) Connecting to the cable…………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-6 (4-1) LAN Cable …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-6 (4-2) USB cable …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-6 (5) Loading Paper ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-7 (6) Power-up …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-9 (7) Default (TSI model) …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-10 (7-1) Setting Date and Time…………………………………………………………………………………. 2-10 (7-2) Network Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-11 (7-3) Altitude Adjustment Setting ………………………………………………………………………….. 2-12 (7) Default (LCD model)……………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-13 (7-1) Setting Date and Time…………………………………………………………………………………. 2-13 (7-2) Network Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-14 (7-3) Altitude Adjustment Setting ………………………………………………………………………….. 2-16 (8) Installing Software ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-17 (9) Output Maintenance Report (Executing Maintenance mode U000) (For Service) ………… 2-18 (10) Clearing the counts (Executing Maintenance Mode U927) (For service) …………………….. 2-18 (11) Terminating the maintenance mode (For service)……………………………………………………. 2-18 (12) Installing the main unit is complete………………………………………………………………………… 2-18

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

3

Machine Design 3-1 Cross-section view ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1 (1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)…………………………………………… 3-1 3-2 The configuration of the electrical components ……………………………………………………………… 3-2 (1) Electric parts………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-2 (1-1) Machine left side ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-2 (1-2) Machine right side ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-3 (1-3) Document processor …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-4 (1-4) Paper feeder (option) ……………………………………………………………………………………. 3-4 (2) Descriptions about the major PWBs………………………………………………………………………… 3-5 (2-1) Main/Engine PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-5 (2-2) High-voltage PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-5 (2-3) Power source PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-5 (2-4) Operation panel PWB (TSI)……………………………………………………………………………. 3-6 (2-5) Operation panel PWB (LCD) ………………………………………………………………………….. 3-6 (3) Electric parts layout ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-7 (3-1) PWBs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-7 (3-2) Sensors and Switches…………………………………………………………………………………. 3-10 (3-3) Motors ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-13 (3-4) Others……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-15 3-3 Drive system …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-17 (1) Drive system for the paper conveying ……………………………………………………………………. 3-17 (2) Each section drive ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-18 (2-1) Primary paper feed drive ……………………………………………………………………………… 3-18 (2-2) Drum drive…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-18 (2-3) Developer drive ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-19 (2-4) Fuser unit drive…………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-19 3-4 Mechanical construction …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-20 (1) Paper feed section………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-20 (1-1) Cassette paper feed section…………………………………………………………………………. 3-20 (1-2) MP tray paper feed section ………………………………………………………………………….. 3-22 (2) Optical section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-24 (2-1) Image scanner unit……………………………………………………………………………………… 3-24 (2-2) Laser scanner unit………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-26 (3) Developer section……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-28 (3-1) Developer unit ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-28 (4) Drum section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-30 (4-1) Main charger unit………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-30 (4-2) Cleaning ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-30 (5) Conveying/Transfer and Separation section …………………………………………………………… 3-32 (6) Fuser section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-34 (7) Eject and feedshift section……………………………………………………………………………………. 3-36 (8) Duplex conveying section…………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-38 (9) Document processor …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-40 (10) Paper feeder (option)…………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-42

4

Maintenance 4-1 Precautions for the maintenance …………………………………………………………………………………. 4-1 (1) Precautions………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-1 (2) Storage and handling of the drum …………………………………………………………………………… 4-1 (3) Storage of the toner container ………………………………………………………………………………… 4-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 (4) Screening of the toner container …………………………………………………………………………….. 4-2 4-2 Maintenance parts …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-3 (1) Maintenance kits…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-3 (2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ………………………. 4-3 (3) Maintenance parts list……………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-3 (4) Periodic maintenance Procedures…………………………………………………………………………… 4-4 4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures …………………………………………………………………. 4-5 (1) Cassette paper feed section…………………………………………………………………………………… 4-5 (1-1) Detaching and reattaching the Paper feed roller……………………………………………….. 4-5 (1-2) Detaching and reattaching the retard roller ………………………………………………………. 4-6 (1-3) Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed pulley ………………………………………… 4-8 (2) Developer section……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-10 (2-1) Detaching and reattaching the developer unit…………………………………………………. 4-10 (3) Drum section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-11 (3-1) Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ……………………………………………………….. 4-11 (3-2) Detaching and reattaching the main charger unit…………………………………………….. 4-13 (4) Transfer section………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-14 (4-1) Detaching and reattaching the transfer roller unit ……………………………………………. 4-14 (5) Fuser section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-17 (5-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit………………………………………………………… 4-17 4-4 Disassembly and Reassembly ………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-21 (1) Outer covers ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-21 (1-1) Detaching and reattaching the left rear cover …………………………………………………. 4-21 (1-2) Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover ………………………………………………… 4-21 (1-3) Detaching and reattaching the ISU left cover………………………………………………….. 4-22 (1-4) Detaching and reattaching the ISU right cover………………………………………………… 4-22 (1-5) Detaching and reattaching the left cover………………………………………………………… 4-23 (1-6) Detaching and reattaching the right cover………………………………………………………. 4-24 (1-7) Detaching and reattaching the front cover ……………………………………………………… 4-26 (1-8) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover ………………………………………………………. 4-27 (2) Optical section ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-28 (2-1) Detaching and reattaching the laser scanner unit (LSU)…………………………………… 4-28 (2-2) Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU)………………………………….. 4-39 (2-3) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel (TSI model)……………………………… 4-45 (2-4) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel (LCD model) ……………………………. 4-47 (2-5) Detaching and reattaching the ISU top frame …………………………………………………. 4-48 (2-6) Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage assembly ………………………………. 4-48 (3) Drive section………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-49 (3-1) Detaching and reattaching the main motor …………………………………………………….. 4-49 (3-2) Detaching and reattaching the fuser pressure release drive unit ……………………….. 4-54 (3-3) Detaching and reattaching the MP solenoid (front side) …………………………………… 4-60 (3-4) Detaching reattaching the clutch. ………………………………………………………………….. 4-64 (3-5) Detaching and reattaching the eject solenoid …………………………………………………. 4-70 (4) Others……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-83 (4-1) Detaching and reattaching the speaker………………………………………………………….. 4-83 (4-2) Detaching and reattaching the eraser ……………………………………………………………. 4-89 (4-3) Replacing the language sheet (TSI model) …………………………………………………….. 4-91 (4-4) Replacing the language sheet (LCD model) …………………………………………………… 4-92 (4-5) Fan motor attachment direction…………………………………………………………………….. 4-93 (5) PWBs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-94 (5-1) Detaching and reattaching the main/engine PWB……………………………………………. 4-94

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 (5-2) Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB………………………………………….. 4-102 (5-3) Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power source PWB……………………….. 4-110 (5-4) Detaching and reattaching the FAX PWB …………………………………………………….. 4-116 (5-5) Detaching and reattaching the Wi-Fi PWB……………………………………………………. 4-124 (5-6) Detaching and reattaching the USB PWB…………………………………………………….. 4-126 (5-7) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB (TSI model)……………………. 4-138 (5-8) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB (LCD model) ………………….. 4-141 (6) Detaching and reattaching the document processor ………………………………………………. 4-143 (6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pick up pulley, DP paper feed roller and DP separation pad ………………………………………………… 4-143 (6-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP front cover ………………………………………………. 4-145 (6-3) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ……………………………………………….. 4-146 (6-4) Detaching and reattaching the DP main motor ……………………………………………… 4-146 4-5 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ………………………………………………….. 4-148 (1) Paper feeder…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4-148 (1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB……………………………………………….. 4-148 (1-2) Detaching and reattaching PF conveying motor. …………………………………………… 4-149 (1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF clutch. …………………………………………………….. 4-152

5

Firmware 5-1 Firmware update (TSI model) ……………………………………………………………………………………… 5-1 5-2 Firmware update (LCD model) ……………………………………………………………………………………. 5-6

6

Maintenance mode 6-1 Maintenance mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-1 (1) Executing the maintenance mode …………………………………………………………………………… 6-1 (2) Maintenance modes list ………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-2 (2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ………………………………………………………………….. 6-5 6-2 Service modes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-107 (1) TSI model ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-107 (1-1) Executing the service mode ……………………………………………………………………….. 6-107 (1-2) Descriptions of service modes ……………………………………………………………………. 6-109 (2) LCD model……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-113 (2-1) Executing the service mode ……………………………………………………………………….. 6-113 (2-2) Descriptions of service modes ……………………………………………………………………. 6-115

7

Troubleshooting 7-1 Image formation failure ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-1 (1) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through the DP) ………………………………… 7-2 (1-1) Abnormal image …………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-4 (1-2) Background is colored…………………………………………………………………………………… 7-5 (1-3) Black dots / color dots …………………………………………………………………………………… 7-5 (1-4) Horizontal black streaks ………………………………………………………………………………… 7-6 (1-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) …………………………………………………………….. 7-7 (1-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) …………………………………………………………………….. 7-7 (1-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent………………………………………. 7-8 (1-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output……………… 7-8 (1-9) Moire ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-9 (1-10) Entire blank image (white/black) …………………………………………………………………….. 7-9 (1-11) Part of the image is not copied……………………………………………………………………… 7-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 (1-12) A part of the image is dark or light…………………………………………………………………. 7-10 (1-13) The entire image is light ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-11 (1-14) Blurred image …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-12 (1-15) Blurred characters ………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-12 (1-16) Color shift ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-13 (1-17) Skewed image……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-13 (2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through the DP)………………………………. 7-14 (2-1) Abnormal image …………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-16 (2-2) Background is colored…………………………………………………………………………………. 7-17 (2-3) Black dots / color dots …………………………………………………………………………………. 7-17 (2-4) Horizontal black streaks ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-18 (2-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) …………………………………………………………… 7-18 (2-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) …………………………………………………………………… 7-19 (2-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent…………………………………….. 7-19 (2-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output……………. 7-19 (2-9) Moire ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-20 (2-10) Entire blank image (white/black) …………………………………………………………………… 7-20 (2-11) Part of the image is not copied……………………………………………………………………… 7-20 (2-12) A part of the image is dark or light…………………………………………………………………. 7-21 (2-13) The entire image is light ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-21 (2-14) Blurred image …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-22 (2-15) Blurred characters ………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-23 (2-16) Color shift ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-23 (2-17) Skewed image……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-23 (3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)……………………………………………. 7-24 (3-1) Abnormal image …………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-26 (3-2) Background is colored…………………………………………………………………………………. 7-27 (3-3) Black dots / color dots …………………………………………………………………………………. 7-28 (3-4) Horizontal black streaks ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-28 (3-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) …………………………………………………………… 7-29 (3-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) …………………………………………………………………… 7-29 (3-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent…………………………………….. 7-30 (3-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output……………. 7-30 (3-9) Moire ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-31 (3-10) Entire blank image (white/black) …………………………………………………………………… 7-31 (3-11) Part of the image is not copied……………………………………………………………………… 7-32 (3-12) A part of the image is dark or light…………………………………………………………………. 7-33 (3-13) The entire image is light ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-34 (3-14) Blurred image …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-35 (3-15) Blurred characters / Color Shift …………………………………………………………………….. 7-35 (3-16) Skewed image……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-35 (4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)…………………. 7-36 (4-1) spots…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-39 (4-2) Horizontal streaks or bands………………………………………………………………………….. 7-39 (4-3) Vertical streaks or bands (white) …………………………………………………………………… 7-39 (4-4) Vertical streaks or bands……………………………………………………………………………… 7-40 (4-5) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent…………………………………….. 7-40 (4-6) Irregular error in the leading edge between original and output image (variation in the paper leading edge timing) ………………………….. 7-40 (4-7) Blank image……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-41

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 (4-8) The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots) ……………………………………… 7-41 (4-9) The entire image is light ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-41 (4-10) Blurred image …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-42 (4-11) Blurred characters ………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-42 (4-12) Color shift in the main scanning direction……………………………………………………….. 7-42 (4-13) Color shift in the sub scanning direction…………………………………………………………. 7-42 (4-14) Toner smudge at the paper edge ………………………………………………………………….. 7-43 (4-15) Dirty reverse side ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-43 (4-16) Offset image ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-43 (4-17) Color reproduction is poor ……………………………………………………………………………. 7-44 (4-18) Fusing failure……………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-44 (4-19) Paper skew………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-45 (4-20) Uneven transfer………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-45 (4-21) Paper creases ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-46 (5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause) ………………………………………………………………….. 7-47 (5-1) Background is colored…………………………………………………………………………………. 7-49 (5-2) Black dots………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-50 (5-3) Horizontal streaks or bands (white/black) ………………………………………………………. 7-51 (5-4) Irregular horizontal streaks and bands (black) ………………………………………………… 7-52 (5-5) Vertical streaks or bands (white) …………………………………………………………………… 7-52 (5-6) Vertical streaks and bands (black) ………………………………………………………………… 7-53 (5-7) Blank image……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-53 (5-8) Entire blank image (black)……………………………………………………………………………. 7-54 (5-9) Part of the image is not copied……………………………………………………………………… 7-54 (5-10) The entire image is light ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-55 (5-11) Blurred image …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-56 (5-12) Offset image ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-56 (5-13) Horizontal uneven density ……………………………………………………………………………. 7-57 (5-14) Vertical uneven density ……………………………………………………………………………….. 7-57 7-2 Conveying failures …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-58 (1) Prior standard check items …………………………………………………………………………………… 7-58 (1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ……………………………………………………. 7-58 (1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper ………….. 7-59 (1-3) Paper jam due to dog-ear, skew, crease. fusing failure, curl, etc……………………….. 7-59 (1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor …………………………………………………………………. 7-59 (1-5) Paper jam due to paper loading failure at the paper source ……………………………… 7-60 (1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper……………………………………………………………….. 7-60 (1-7) Paper jam caused by conveying rollers and pulleys ………………………………………… 7-61 (1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor ………………………………………………………………………… 7-61 (1-9) Paper jam due to setting failure or detection failure …………………………………………. 7-62 (1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity…………………………………………………………….. 7-62 (1-11) Paper jam due to paper storage environment (high humidity) …………………………… 7-62 (2) Paper jam indication ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-63 (3) Paper jam detection condition ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-64 (4) Jam Codes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-66 7-3 Self diagnostic ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-113 (1) Self diagnostic function………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-113 (2) Self diagnostic codes…………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-113 (2-1) Error codes list …………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-113 (2-2) Content of Self Diagnostic………………………………………………………………………….. 7-115

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA (3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ……………………………………………………………………………… 7-140 (3-1) System Error code list ……………………………………………………………………………….. 7-140 (3-2) Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline………………………………………………………. 7-140 (4) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ……………………………………………………………………………… 7-143 7-4 FAX Related Errors ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-148 (1) FAX Related Errors ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-148 (1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error…………………………………………………………………… 7-148 (1-2) C0070: FAX PWB compatibility error …………………………………………………………… 7-148 (1-3) C0830: FAX flash program area checksum error…………………………………………… 7-149 (1-4) C0870: FAX PWB large capacity data transfer error………………………………………. 7-149 (1-5) C0920: FAX file system error ……………………………………………………………………… 7-150 (1-6) FAX cannot be sent…………………………………………………………………………………… 7-150 (2) Error codes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-152 7-5 Send Related Errors ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-177 (1) Send Related Errors ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-177 (1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings…………………………….. 7-177 (1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear. ………………………………………………………. 7-177 (1-3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent……………………………… 7-177 (2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)……………………………………………………………………………… 7-178 (2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes………………………………………………………………………… 7-178 (2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes …………………………………………………………………………… 7-182 (2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes ………………………………………………………………………….. 7-187 7-6 Print Errors …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-190 (1) The paper loading message appears …………………………………………………………………… 7-191 (2) The paper direction is incorrect …………………………………………………………………………… 7-192 (3) Paper is fed from the MP tray……………………………………………………………………………… 7-192 (4) Garbled characters ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-193 (5) Data is output in monochrome…………………………………………………………………………….. 7-193 (6) Paper is not fed from the MP tray………………………………………………………………………… 7-194 (7) The same data is printed out endlessly ………………………………………………………………… 7-194 (8) [Print Job Error] or [Printing Queue] is displayed on the PC screen and [Printer Unavailable] on the printer properties. ………………………………………………… 7-194 (9) Printer Pending message is displayed but [Processing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel…………………………………………………. 7-195 (10) Output is unavailable in sleep mode due to the main unit startup failure …………………… 7-195 (11) [Processing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel. …………………………….. 7-195 (12) Print stops and operation lock after printing several pages. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold. ………………………………………….. 7-195 (13) Print out is not available from the network factor (1) ………………………………………………. 7-196 (14) Print out is not available from the network factor (2) ………………………………………………. 7-196 (15) Print out is not available from the network factor (3) ………………………………………………. 7-197 (16) Print out is not available from the network factor (4) ………………………………………………. 7-197 (17) Print out is not available from the network factor (5) ………………………………………………. 7-198 (18) Print out is not available from the network factor (6) ………………………………………………. 7-198 (19) Print out is not available from the network factor (7) ………………………………………………. 7-199 (20) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1) ……………………………… 7-200 (21) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (2) ……………………………… 7-200 (22) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (3) ……………………………… 7-200 (23) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (4) ……………………………… 7-201 (24) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (5) ……………………………… 7-201 (25) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (6) ……………………………… 7-201

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA (26) A part of the image is missing …………………………………………………………………………….. 7-202 (27) «Paper Mismatch Error» appears …………………………………………………………………………. 7-202 7-7 Error Messages …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-203 (1) The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray……………. 7-203 7-8 Abnormal Noise …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-204 (1) Abnormal sound (basic treatment) ………………………………………………………………………. 7-204 (2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section………………………………………………. 7-205 (3) Abnormal sound from the developer section …………………………………………………………. 7-205 (4) Abnormal sound from the document processor……………………………………………………… 7-205 (5) Abnormal sound from the exit section ………………………………………………………………….. 7-205 (6) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section…………………………………………….. 7-206 (7) Abnormal sound from the machine front side………………………………………………………… 7-206 (8) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section ………………………………. 7-207 (9) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section …………………………………. 7-207 (10) Abnormal sound from the fuser section………………………………………………………………… 7-207 (11) Abnormal sound from inside the machine …………………………………………………………….. 7-207 (12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine …………………………………………………………….. 7-208 (13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine …………………………………………………………….. 7-208 (14) The driving sound is noisy during printing …………………………………………………………….. 7-209 (15) The rotation sound of the fan is noisy…………………………………………………………………… 7-209 7-9 Malfunction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7-210 (1) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on ………………. 7-210 (2) Toner drops over the paper conveying section. …………………………………………………….. 7-210 (3) The login fails with other than the ID card …………………………………………………………….. 7-211

8

PWBs 8-1 Description for PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8-1 (1) Main/Engine PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8-1 (2) High voltage PWB ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8-10 (3) Low voltage power supply PWB ……………………………………………………………………………. 8-12 (4) Operation panel PWB (TSI)………………………………………………………………………………….. 8-14 (5) Operation panel PWB (LCD) ………………………………………………………………………………… 8-19 (6) PF main PWB (option)…………………………………………………………………………………………. 8-21

9

Appendixes 9-1 Appendixes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9-1 (1) Repetitive defects gauge ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 9-1 (2) Firmware environment commands ………………………………………………………………………….. 9-2 (3) Chart of image adjustment procedures ………………………………………………………………….. 9-10 (4) Wiring diagram …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9-13 (4-1) Standard……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9-13 (4-2) PF-1100 (Options)………………………………………………………………………………………. 9-17

Installation Guide PF-1100(250 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

1 Specifications

1-1 Specifications (1) Common function Item

Description 40 ppm model

M2640idw

M2540dw

M2540dn

M2040dn

35 ppm model

M2735dw

M2635dw

M2635dn

M2135dn

Type

Desktop

Printing Method

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight

Paper Type

Paper Size

Cassette

60 to 163 g/m2

Multi Purpose Tray

60 to 220 g/m², 209g/m² (Hagaki)

Cassette

Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multi Purpose Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Cassette

A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)

Multi Purpose Tray

A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement-R,Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), youkei 4, youkei 2, Custom (70 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)

Printable Area

Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4.2 mm.

Warm-up Time (23°C/ 73.4°F, 60%)

Power on

20 seconds or 17 seconds or less less

Sleep

10 seconds or less

Paper Capacity

Cassette

300 Sheets (64 g/m2)*1

Output Tray Capacity

250 Sheets (80 g/m2) *1 Multi Purpose Tray

120 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (64 g/m2) 100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)

Inner tray

150 sheets (80 g/m²)

Image Write System

Semiconductor laser and electrophotography (twin beams)

Scanning light source

3-color LED light source

Scanning method

Flat-face scanning method with the CIS contact image sensor

Photoconductor

OPC drum (diameter 30 mm)

Charging system

Positive charge scorotron system

1-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Item

Description 40 ppm model

M2640idw

M2540dw

M2540dn

M2040dn

35 ppm model

M2735dw

M2635dw

M2635dn

M2135dn

Developer system

Magnetic mono-component developing system Toner: magnetic toner Toner feed system: leveled toner feed

Transfer system

Transfer roller method

Separation system

Curvature separation + discharger needle (grounded) : except 100 V model Curvature separation + discharger needle (DC voltage impressed) : 100 V model only

Cleaning system

Counter blade

Charge erasing system

Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)

Fusing system

Sliding belt + foam press roller system Heat source: halogen heater Abnormal temperature preventing device: 2 thermocat

Operation Panel

4.3inch TSI

Memory

256 MB

Interface

USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

5-line LCD

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) USB Port: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Operating Environment

Fax

Fax: 1

Fax: 1

Fax: 1

—

Wireless LAN

Wireless LAN support Only

Wireless LAN support Only

—

—

Temperature

10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity

10 to 80%

Altitude

3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness

1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H)

16.42″ × 16.23″ × 17.21″417 × 412 × 437 mm (Metric Model) 18.71″ × 16.23″ × 17.21″475 × 412 × 437 mm (Inch Model)

Weight

(without toner container) Approx. 41.9 lb/Approx. 19 kg

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multi purpose tray) 14.77″ × 28.47″375 × 723 mm (Metric Model) (Using multi purpose tray) 14.77″ × 28.47″375 × 723 mm (Inch Model)

Power Source

AC100 V, 50/60 Hz, 9.7 A AC120 V, 60 Hz, 8.7A AC220 to 240V, 50 Hz, 4.4 A

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

1-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Copy Functions Item

Description 40 ppm model

35 ppm model

Copy Speed

A4/A5 Letter Legal B5 A5-R A6 16K

First Copy Time (A4, place on the platen, feed from Cassette)

6.4 seconds or less

Zoom Level

Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Auto mode:Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying

1 to 999 sheets

Resolution

600 × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types

Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/Folio)

Original Feed System

Fixed

40 sheets/min 42 sheets/min 34 sheets/min 27 sheets/min 19 sheets/min 19 sheets/min 22 sheets/min

A4/A5 Letter Legal B5 A5-R A6 16K

35 sheets/min 37 sheets/min 30 sheets/min 24 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 20 sheets/min

6.9 seconds or less

(3) Printer Functions Item

Description 40 ppm model

35 ppm model

Printing Speed

Same as Copying Speed.

First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette)

6.4 seconds or less

Resolution

300 dpi × 300 dpi, 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 1200 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi equivalent, 1800 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi

Operating System

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS X v10.5 or later

Interface

USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) Wireless LAN support Only

Page Description Language

PRESCRIBE

Emulations

PCL6(PCL-XL, PCL5c) KPDL3, (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, OpenXPS

1-3

6.8 seconds or less

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

(4) Scanner Functions Item

Description

Resolution

300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi*1, 400 × 400 dpi*1, 200 × 400 dpi*1

File Format

TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), High compressive PDF, XPS, OPEN XPS, Encrypted PDF, PDF/A-1

Scanning Speed*2

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi × 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original) 1-sided B/W: 40 images/min, Color: 23 images/min 2-sided B/W: 32 images/min, Color: 16 images/min*3

Interface

Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB

Transmission System

SMBv3, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*4, WIA*5, WSD

*1 *2 *3 *4

One-sided scanning When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning) Simultaneous duplex scan: 40ppm model only Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2 *5 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/ Windows 8/ Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows 10

(5) FAX Functions FAX Function Item

Description

Compatibility

G3

Communication Line

Subscriber telephone line

Transmission Time

Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)

Transmission Speed

33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/ 12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps

Coding Scheme

JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

Error Correction

ECM

Original Size

Max. width: 8 1/2″/216 mm, Max. length: 14 1/32″/356 mm

Automatic Document Feed

Max. 50 sheets (with document processor)

Resolution

Scan: 200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm) 200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm) 200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm) 400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm) Print: 600 dpi

Gradations

256 shades (Error diffusion)

One Touch Key

100 keys *1, 22 keys *2

Multi-Station Transmission

Max. 100 destinations

1-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-2 Item

Description

Substitute Memory Reception

256 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)

Image Memory Capacity

3.5 MB (standard)(For fax transmission and reception)

Report Output

Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page

*1 TSI model *2 LCD model Network FAX Function Item

Description

Hardware

IBM PC-AT compatible computer

Interface

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, Wireless LAN support*1

Operating system

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2,Windows Server 2012/R2 Transmission Resolution

200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm) 200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm) 400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)

Document Size

Letter, Legal, Statement, A4, A5, Folio, B5(JIS)

FAX Delayed Transmit

Based on settings in the Network FAX Driver (setting is possible to any 1 minute increment within the subsequent 24 hour period)

Transmit and Print

Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available

Broadcast Transmission

Max. 100 destinations

Job Accounting

Requires the input of a Login User Name and Password in the Network FAX Driver when User Login, is turn ON in the fax machine. Requires the input of an Account ID in the Network FAX Driver when Job Accounting, is turned ON in the fax machine.

Cover Page

A format can be selected using the Network FAX Driver or a template can be created.

*1 Wi-Fi model only

(6) Document Processor (Dual Scan / Simplex ADF) Item

Description

Supported Original Types

Sheet originals

Paper Size

Maximum: Folio/Legal Minimum: Statement/A6

Paper Weight

50 to 160 g/m2

Loading Capacity

50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1 Thick (120 g/m²) : 25 sheets

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor

1-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7) Paper Feeder (PF-1100)(Option) Item

Description

Paper Supply Method

Friction roller feeder (No. Sheets: 250, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)

Paper Size

A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)

Supported Paper

Paper weight: 60 to 163 g/m² Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H)

14.77″ × 15.48″ × 3.94″ 375 × 393 × 100 mm

Weight

Approx. 6.4 lb/Approx. 2.9 kg

1-6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

1-2 Part Names (1) Machine Exterior

14 10

9 11 8

1 13 2 7 3

12

6

4 5

15

1 Document Processor

9 Original Tray

2 Inner Tray

10 Original Width Guides

3 Eject Stopper

11 Slit Glass

4 Cassette 1

12 Operation Panel

5 Power Switch

13 Contact glass

6 Front Cover Open Button

14 Original Size Indicator Plates

7 Original Eject Table

15 Rear cover

8 Original Stopper

1-7

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Connectors/Interior

1

2

3 4 12

5

11

6 8

9 10

7

1. TEL Connector 2. LINE Connector 3. USB Interface Connector 4. Network Interface Connector 5. Feed Cover 6. Paper Length Guide

7. Paper Width Guides 8. USB Memory Slot 9. Multi Purpose Tray 10. Sub Tray 11. Paper Guides 12. Fuser Cover

1-8

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14 13

13. Toner Container Release Button 14. Toner Container

(3) With Optional Equipments Attached

1 2

1. Cassette 2 2. Cassette 3

1-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Operation Panel (TSI)

1

17

Select the function. Home

3

15

7

8

14

13

10:10 Admin

Copy

Send

Job Box

Removable Memory

Status

2

16

FAX

Sub Address Box Task Screen

4

5

6

9

10

11 12

1. [Home] key: Displays the Home screen. 2. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen. 3. [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen. 4. Touch panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings. 5. [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving. 6. [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory. 7. [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped. 8. [Enter] key: Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes details during setting of functions. Operates linked with the onscreen [OK]. 9. [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations. 10. [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress. 11. [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. 12. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out). 13. [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode. 14. [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states. 15. [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters. 16. [Quick No. Search] key: Specifies registered information such as address numbers and user IDs by number. 17. Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols.

1-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) Operation Panel Keys (LCD)

1

2

17

3

4

5

16

15

14

13

6

12

7

11

8

9

10

1. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen. 2. [Document Box/USB] key: Displays the Document Box/USB screen. 3. [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen. 4. [FAX] key: Displays the FAX screen. 5. [Send] key: Displays the screen for sending. You can change it to display the Address Book screen. 6. One Touch keys: Recalls the destination registered for One Touch Keys. 7. [Wi-Fi] indicator : Blinks during Wi-Fi connection. 8. Select keys: Selects the menu displayed at the bottom of the message display. 9. [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving. 10. [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory. 11. Message display: Displays the setting menu, machine status, and error messages. 12. [Wi-Fi Direct] key: Set Wi-Fi Direct, and show information necessary for connection and the connection status. 13. [On Hook] key: Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX. 14. [Confirm/Add Destination] key: Confirms the destination or adds a destination. 15. [Address Recall/Pause] key: Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX number. 16. [Address Book] key: Displays the Address Book screen. 17. [Copy] key: Displays the Copy screen.

1-11

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

18

19

20

21, 22

31

23

24

30

25

28

29

26

27

18. [Function Menu] key: Displays the function menu screen. 19. [Back] key: Returns to the previous display. 20. [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped. 21. Arrow keys: Increments or decrements numbers, or selects menu in the message display. In addition, moves the cursor when entering the characters. 22. [OK] key: Finalizes a function or menu, and numbers that have been entered. 23. Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols. 24. [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress. 25. [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations. 26. [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. 27. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out). 28. [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode. 29. Program keys: Used to register or recall programs. 30. [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states. 31. [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters.

1-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

1-3 Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

(1) Expansion Memory

(2) PF-1100

Software option

(3) Card Authentication Kit (B)

(4) UG-33

(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card (6) USB Keyboad

1-13

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1) Expansion Memory The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the machine’s memory up to 1,536 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules. Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules

To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by wearing an antistatic wrist strap, if possible, when you install the memory modules. If you do not have a wristband, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the memory. Installing the Memory Modules 1. Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable. 2. Remove the cover.

3. Remove the memory module from its package. 4. With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.

5. Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine. 6. Replace the covers.

1-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) PF-1100 «Paper Feeder» Maximum two 250-sheet paper feeder can be installed.

(3) Card Authentication Kit(B) «Card Authentication Kit» User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on the previously registered local user list.

(4) UG-33 «ThinPrint Option» This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card SD/SDHC memory card is a micro chip card that can save optional fonts, macros, forms. The machine is equipped with a slot for an SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB. Installing the Memory Modules 1. Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable. 2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.

4. Replace the covers.

1-15

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

2 Installation 2-1 Environment Installation environment 1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F (32.5°C).) 2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.) 3. Power AC100V 50/60Hz 9.7A or more AC120V 60Hz 8.7A or more AC220 to 240V 50HzA 4.4A or more 4. Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2% Installation location The operative environmental conditions are as follows: Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows: Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C). Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters. During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated. Installation space

400mm or more

300mm or more

300mm or more

300mm or more

500mm or more

Figure 2-1

2-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

2-2 Installing the main unit Installation procedures

START

Unpacking and checking bundled items

Optional unit installation

Connecting the Other Dvices

Connecting the Interface Cable

Default Setting

Loading Paper

Installing Software

Turn the power on

Output a report (Maintenance mode U000) Maintenance report User status report

Clearing the counts (maintenance mode U927)

Exiting from the Maintenance mode

Output a Status report

Completion of installing the main unit

IMPORTANT Default setting will take about 10 minutes for the toner installation. Do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting drive.

2-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items (1-1) Main unit Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case. Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.

3 1

2 5 8

4

6 7

9 12

11

13 14

10

Figure 2-2 8. Documents 9. Left bottom pad 10. Front bottom pad 11. Lower right pad 12. Lower left pad 13. inner frame 14. Outer box

1. Right upper pad 2. Left upper pad 3. AC power cord 4. Product storage bag 5. Main unit 6. Front upper pad 7. Accessories box

Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.

2-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

(1-2) Paper Feeder (Option) Take the paper feeder out of the packing case. Remove the packing tape from the paper feeder.

7

1 4 3

5

2

6

Figure 2-3 5. Main unit storage bag 6. Outer box 7. Cassette spacer

1. Left pad 2. Right pad 3. Main unit protective sheet 4. Paper Feeder

2-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Installing the optional equipment Install the necessary optional equipment in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.

(3) Connecting to other device Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use. When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC on the Network Network

Network

NOTE When using wireless LAN, it is not necessary to connect the network cable. It is necessary to change the initial setting of the machine unit from System Menu to use the wireless LAN. Cables that Can Be Used Connection environment

Function

Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network FAX

LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the machine.

Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA)

USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max. 5.0m or less. with shield)

IMPORTANT When not using the USB2.0 compatible cable, it causes a failure.

2-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Connecting to the cable (4-1) LAN Cable 1. Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC. 3. Power on the machine and set the network.

(4-2)USB cable 1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC. 3. Turn the power switch of the main unit on.

2-6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) Loading Paper 1. Pull the cassette out of the main unit.

NOTE When the bottom plate is lifted, push it until locked.

2. Adjust the paper length guide of the cassette.

2-7

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA NOTE In case of using Folio, Oficio ?or Legal

3. Adjust the paper width guides of the cassette

4. Load paper.

5. Insert the cassette slowly into the main unit as far as it goes. 6. Set the paper size and the paper type from the system menu. IMPORTANT Load it with the printing side facing down Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams. Load paper below the maximum paper level. If the paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and the paper width guides, it causes the skew paper feeding and the paper jam.

2-8

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

Precaution for Loading Paper Separate the paper taken out of the package in the following procedures before loading it in the cassette.

Separate paper and align the edge of the paper in a flat place. In addition, note the following. In case of paper fold or curl, stretch it in a straight line. Such paper may cause a jam. If paper is left in the high humidity environment after taking the paper out of the package, it causes a trouble with moisture. Keep paper remaining paper in the cassette into the sealed paper storage bag. Also, keep paper left on the MP tray into the sealed paper storage bag. If the machine is not used for a prolonged period, keep paper out of the cassette in the sealed storage bag in order to protect it from humidity.

(6) Power-up 1. Turn the power switch on.

IMPORTANT Initial Setup will take up to 10min to complete toner installation. Do not execute maintenance mode during this period.

2-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7) Default (TSI model) Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed. The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed. Also, configure the following settings if necessary. NOTE The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Refer to the operation guide of the main unit about the items which can set from the system menu.

(7-1) Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used. NOTE The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server. See page Command Center RX User Guide. 1. Displays the screen. [System menu / counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver] 2. Configure the settings. Select [Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format] in this order for settings. Item

Descriptions

Time Zone

Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Date/Time

Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header. Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format

Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

2-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7-2)Network Settings Wired network setting The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms. Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings. If the user administration is effective, this can be changed by logging in with administrator privileges. If the user login administration is not effective, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and select [Login]. The default login user name and login password at the factory shipment is set as below. Login User Name: 4000 or 3500 Login Password: 4000 or 3500 TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings 1. Displays the screen. [System menu / counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4] [Wired setting] > [TCP/IP setting] > [IPv4 setting] 2. Configure the settings. When using DHCP server [DHCP]: Set to [On] When setting the static IP address [DHCP]: Set to [Off]. [IP Address]: Enter the address. [Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255). [Default Gateway]: Enter the address. In case of using Auto-IP Set 0.0.0.0. in the IP address. IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the machine OFF and then ON. NOTE Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting. In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX. In case of using the host name with «DHCP» set to [Off] When using the DNS server other than the DNS server, IP address of which is assigned by the DHCP automatically, Regarding to setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to Command Center RX User Guide.

2-11

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Wireless network setting When the wireless network function is available on the machine and the connection settings are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods are as follows: Configuration Method

Descriptions

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-style screen, without setting individually in System menu.

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can configure the connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard.

Configuring Connections on the Web Page

It can be set from the Command Center RX.

Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure the network in details from System menu.

NOTE On a model with a Wi-Fi function, change the settings in «Primary Network (Client)» appropriately if you switch to other than a wired network interface.

(7-3)Altitude Adjustment Setting Execute [Altitude Adjustment] from the System Menu when setting up at a high altitude place. When the usage environment is at altitudes of sea level 1,000m or more and the printing quality is declined, set the altitude adjustment mode and you can recover the print quality.

1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting] > [Altitude Adjustment] 2. Select the either of [Standard], [1,001 to 2,000m], [2,001 to 3,000m], [3,001 to 3,500m], and press the [OK] key. *: Standard: Use at altitude 0 to 1,000m

2-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7) Default (LCD model) Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed. NOTE The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Refer to the operation guide of the main unit about the items which can set from the system menu.

(7-1) Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used. If the user administration is effective, this can be changed by logging in with administrator privileges. If the user login administration is not effective, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and select [Login]. The default login user name and login password at the factory shipment is set as below. Login User Name: 4000 or 3500 Login Password: 4000 or 3500 Before setting date/time, make sure to set the time difference. The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server. 1. Displays the screen. [System menu / counter] key > [▲][▼] key > [Common Setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Day and Time setting] > [OK] key 2. Configure the settings. [▲][▼] key > [Time difference] > [OK] key > Select the time difference > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Date/Time] > [OK] key > Set day and time > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Date format] > [OK] key > Select the date format > [OK] key

Item

Descriptions

Time Zone

Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Date/Time

Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header. Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format

Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

NOTE Select [▲] or [▼] key, and enter the numerical values. If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is displayed.

2-13

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7-2)Network Settings Configuring the Wired Network The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms. Set up the network connection via TCP/IP (IPv4). Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings. For other network settings, refer to the following: NOTE If the user administration is effective, this can be changed by logging in with administrator privileges. If the user login administration is not effective, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and select [Login]. The default login user name and login password at the factory shipment is set as below. Login User Name: 4000 or 3500 Login Password: 4000 or 3500 TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings 1. Displays the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [▲][▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Network setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Wired network setting] > [▲][▼] key > [TCP/IP setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [IPv4 setting] > [OK] key 2. Set When setting the static IP address 1.[▲][▼] key > [DHCP] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Not set] > [OK] key 2.[▲][▼] key > [IP address] > [OK] key 3.Enter the IP address. NOTE The IP address which can be entered is as follows. IP Address: 000 to 255. Use the numeric keypad, or select [▲] or [▼] key and enter the numerical values. If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is displayed. 4.Select [OK] key. 5.[▲][▼] key > [Subnet Mask] > [OK] key 6.Enter Subnet Mask NOTE The subnet mask which can be entered is as follows. Subnet Mask: 000 to 255 Use the numeric keypad, or select [▲] or [▼] key and enter the numerical values. If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is displayed. 7.Select [OK] key. 8.[▲][▼] key > [Default gateway] > [OK] key 9.Enter Default Gateway.

NOTE The default gateway which can be entered is as follows. Default Gateway: 000 to 255 Use the numeric keypad, or select [▲] or [▼] key and enter the numerical values. If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is displayed. 10.Select [OK] key. 11.[▲][▼] key > [Auto-IP] > [OK] key 12.[Off] > [OK] key IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the machine OFF and then ON. 2-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

NOTE Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting. In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server by using Command Center RX. When using the host name with the «DHCP» set to [Off] When using the DNS server other than the DNS server, IP address of which is assigned by the DHCP automatically, With regard to the IP address setting of the DNS server, refer to Command Center RX operating procedures.

Wireless network setting When setting up the connection of the model equipped with the Wi-Fi function, printing and sending are available in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuration Method

Descriptions

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

When setting the connection from the system menu, use Wi-Fi settings or Wireless Network.

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can configure the connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard.

Configuring Connections on the Web Page

It can be set from the Command Center RX.

NOTE If you switch other network interface than wired, change to the appropriate setting value in [Primary Network].

2-15

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7-3)Altitude Adjustment Setting Execute [Altitude Adjustment] from the System Menu when setting up at a high altitude place. When the usage environment is at altitudes of sea level 1,000m or more and the printing quality is declined, set the altitude adjustment mode and you can recover the print quality. 1. Press the [System Menu/Counter] key 2. Press [▲] or [▼] key, select [Adjustment/ Maintenance] and press the [OK] key. 3. Press [▲] or [▼] key, select [Service setting] and Press the [OK] key. 4. Press [▲] or [▼] key, select [High Altitude Adjustment] and press the [OK] key. 5. Press [▲] or [▼] key, select the either of [Standard], [1,001 to 2,000m], [2,001 to 3,000m], [3,001 to 3,500m], and press the [OK] key. *: Standard: Use at altitude 0 to 1,000m

2-16

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(8) Installing Software In case of using the printer function, TWAIN / WIA connection and Network FAX function in the machine, install necessary software from the DVD (Product Library) Software on DVD (Windows) You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install] is the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], use [Custom Install]. Software

Description

Express Install

KX DRIVER

This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine. Use this driver to create PDF files.

○

KX XPS DRIVER

This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format developed by Microsoft Corporation.

—

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-driver This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used with this driver.

—

FAX Driver

This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software application as a fax via the machine.

—

Kyocera TWAIN Driver

This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAINcompliant software application.

○

Kyocera WIA Driver

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.

—

KYOCERA Net Viewer

This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network.

—

Status Monitor

This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

○

File Management Utility

This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a specified network folder.

—

KYOCERA Net Direct Print

This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/Reader.

—

FONTS

These are display fonts that enable the machine’s built-in fonts to be used in a software application.

○

NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. WIA Driver and cannot be installed on Windows XP.

2-17

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(9) Output Maintenance Report (Executing Maintenance mode U000) (For Service) 1. Input «10871087» using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode. 2. Enter «000» by using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key. 3. Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the status report. 4. Select ?User Status?and press the [Start] key to output the user status page. 5. Press the [Stop] key.

(10)Clearing the counts (Executing Maintenance Mode U927) (For service) 1. Input «927» using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key. 2. Select [Execute]. 3. Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value. 4. Press the [Stop] key.

(11)Terminating the maintenance mode (For service) 1. Input «001» using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key. *: The maintenance mode is exited.

(12)Installing the main unit is complete. 1. Turn the power switch off.

*: When the «Processing» indicator or «Memory» indicator is lit up or blinking, the main unit is operating. If you turn the power switch off while the main unit is operating, it may cause malfunctions. NOTE The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed when [Show Power Off Message] is set to [On]. It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off. IMPORTANT Note that turning the machine off at the power switch disables fax transmission and reception. Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-18

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3 Machine Design 3-1

Cross-section view

(1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)

11

3

6 4

9

5

8 2 10 7 1

12

Original path

/

Paper path

Optical path

/

Paper path (Option) Figure 3-1 7. Conveying/Transfer section 8. Fuser section 9. Feedshift and eject section 10. Duplex conveying section 11. Document processor 12. Paper feeder (option)

1. Cassette paper feed 2. MP paper feed section 3. Image scanner unit 4. Laser scanner unit 5. Developer unit 6. Drum unit

3-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

3-2

The configuration of the electrical components

(1) Electric parts (1-1) Machine left side

2

1 4 3

Figure 3-2 1. Left side fan motor 2. Scanner motor 3. Temp/Humid sensor 4. Fuser pressure release motor

3-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-2) Machine right side

C

A

5 6 7 3

4

B

2 1

Figure 3-3 A. Main/Engine PWB B. Power source PWB C. Wi-Fi PWB

1. Paper feed motor 2. Paper feed clutch 3. Registration clutch 4. Developer clutch 5. Right side fan motor 6. MP solenoid 7. Power switch

3-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-3) Document processor

2

1

Figure 3-4

1. PF main PWB 2. PF paper feed clutch

3. PF conveying clutch

(1-4) Paper feeder (option)

3

2 1

Figure 3-5

1. PF paper feed motor 2. PF paper feed clutch

3. PF feed clutch

??

3-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs (2-1) Main/Engine PWB It controls the software for interface, image data processing, etc. and hardware for the image scanner, operation unit, high voltage/ bias output, paper conveying mechanism, etc.

Figure 3-6

(2-2) High-voltage PWB Output the main charger high-voltage, the developer bias, the transfer bias, separation bias and the transfer cleaning bias.

Figure 3-7

(2-3) Power source PWB The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed and output to DC such as DC24V. It also controls the fuser heater.

Figure 3-8

3-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-4) Operation panel PWB (TSI) It consists of the relay wiring circuit for the main/engine PWB, the operation key PWB(L/R) and the touch panel.

Figure 3-9

(2-5) Operation panel PWB (LCD) It consists of the LCD, LED indicators, the key switches.

Figure 3-10

3-6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Electric parts layout (3-1) PWBs

Laser scanner unit

12 13

Fuser unit

10 9 1

8

2

Main body

11 Drum unit

3

4

7

Developer unit

6

5

Paper feeder

14

Machine left side /

Machine inside / Figure 3-11

3-7

Machine right side

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA 1. FAX PWB *1 ………………………………….. Modulate/demodulate of image data, compress/decompress, change resolution and smoothing 2. Main/Engine PWB ………………………….. It controls the software for the interface and image data processing, and controls the hardware such as the image scanner unit, operation section, high voltage/bias output, paper conveying mechanism, etc. 3. Wi-Fi PWB *2 ………………………………… It communicates wireless data. 4. Lower voltage power source PWB ……. The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed and output to DC such as DC24V. It also controls the fuser heater. 5. Eraser PWB ………………………………….. Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum. 6. USB PWB …………………………………….. Distribution of USB connector 7. High voltage PWB ………………………….. Output the main charger high-voltage and the developer bias, the transfer bias, separation bias and the transfer cleaning bias. 8. Left key PWB (L) *3 ……………………….. It consists of the LED indicator and the key switches. 9. Operation panel PWB *3 …………………. It consists of main/engine PWB, left and right key and the LCD relay wiring circuit. 10. Operation key PWB (R) *3 ………………. It consists of the LED indicator and the key switches. 11. Grid PWB ……………………………………… Controlling the grid currency 12. APC PWB …………………………………….. Emitting and controlling the laser beam. 13. Operation panel PWB *4 …………………. It consists of LCD, LED indicators and key switches. 14. PF main PWB ……………………………….. Controlling the drive of each electric parts in the PF. *1: FAX model only, *2: WiFi model only, *3: TSI model only, *4: LCD model only

3-8

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Part name table No.

Name used in service manual

1

Name used in parts list

Part. No.

FAX PWB*1

PARTS FAX UNIT E SP PARTS FAX UNIT U SP PARTS FAX UNIT J SP

303PA94011 302R794340 302R794330

Main/Engine PWB

PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ENGINE ASSY EU SP

302S094060 302S094070 302S194020 302S194030 302S294020 302SG94010 302SG94020 302S394020 302S394030 302SH94010 302S494010 302S594020 302S594030

Wi-Fi PWB *2

PARTS WIFI UNIT SP

302R794010

Power source PWB

PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100V SP PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 230V SP

302S094090 302S094100

5

Eraser PWB

PARTS PWB ERASER ASSY SP

302RV94110

6

USB PWB

PARTS PWB FRONT PWB ASSY SP

302RV94120

High-voltage PWB

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE SP PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE J SP

302RV94190 302RV94200

Left key PWB *3

PARTS PWB KEY LEFT ASSY SP (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP)

302R794250 (302S594010)

Operation panel PWB *3

PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP)

302S594040 (302S594010)

Right key PWB *3

PARTS PWB KEY RIGHT ASSY SP (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP)

302R794220 (302S594010)

11

Grid PWB

(DK-1150)

(302RV93010)

12

APC PWB

(LK-1150)

(302RV93070)

Operation panel PWB *4

PARTS PWB M PANEL ASSY SP (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP) (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP) (PARTS OPERATION ASSY SP)

302S094080 (302S294010) (302S194010) (302S094040)

PF main PWB

PARTS PWB PF CONT ASSY SP

303RA94010

2

3 4

7 8 9 10

13

14

*1: FAX model only, *2: WiFi model only, *3: TSI model only, *4: LCD model only

3-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-2) Sensors and Switches

18

20

21 22

Document processer

Laser scanner unit

16

17

Fuser unit 15

19 12 13

11 Main body

14 10 9

Drum unit

8 7

6 Developer unit

5 4

32 1

Paper feeder

24 23

Machine left side /

Machine inside /

3-10

Machine right side

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-2 1. Power switch …………………………………. Switching on and off the main/engine PWB and the operation panel PWB, etc. 2. Paper sensor …………………………………. Detecting the presence of paper on the cassette. 3. Registration sensor ………………………… Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding. 4. Toner sensor ………………………………… Detecting the toner amount inside the developer unit. 5. MP paper sensor ……………………………. Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray. 6. Temp/Humid sensor ……………………….. Detecting the external temperature and humidity 7. Interlock switch ……………………………… Shutting off the 24V power line when the front cover is opened. 8. Thermopile ……………………………………. Detecting a surface temperature of the fuser belt. 9. In-machine temperature sensor ……….. Detecting in-machine temperature. 10. Waste toner sensor ………………………… Detecting the toner amount inside the waste toner box. 11. Home position sensor …………………….. Detecting the position of the image scanner unit. 12. CIS ………………………………………………. Scanning the frontside original data. 13. Eject sensor ………………………………….. Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section. 14. Press-release sensor ……………………… Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure. 15. Fuser edge thermistor …………………….. Detecting the heat roller temperature (Edge). 16. Rotation detecting sensor ……………….. Detecting the fuser rotation position 17. DPCIS *1 ………………………………………. Scanning the backside original data. 18. DP front side timing sensor ……………… Detecting the conveying timing of original front side. 19. DP back side timing sensor *1 …………. Detecting the conveying timing of original back side. 20. DP paper feed sensor …………………….. Detecting the original paper feed timing. 21. DP open/close sensor …………………….. Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor. 22. DP original sensor ………………………….. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor. 23. Paper sensor …………………………………. Detecting the presence of paper on the PF cassette. 24. PF feed sensor ………………………………. Detecting the conveying timing of PF paper *1: 40 ppm model only

3-11

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Conveying cover switchPart name table No.

Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

Part. No.

1

Power switch

PARTS PWB SWITCH ASSY SP

302RV94130

2

Paper sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

Registration sensor

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE SP PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE J SP

302RV94190 302RV94200

Toner sensor

PARTS PWB ASSY EMPTY SENSOR SP

302RV94170

5

MP paper sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

6

Temp/Humid sensor

P.W.BOARD ASSY THERMISTOR

3V2M201100

7

Interlock switch

SW.MICRO

7SM010104+++H01

8

Thermopile

PARTS THERMOPILE ASSY SP

302RH94110

9

In-machine temperature sensor

PARTS PWB THERMISTOR ASSY SP

302RV94150

10

Waste toner sensor

PARTS PWB ASSY FULL SENSOR SP 302RV94140

Home position sensor

SENSOR OPT.

7NXSG2A241+++H0 1

12

CIS

PARTS SENSOR A4 CIS SP

302R794320

13

Eject sensor

14

Fuser pressure release sensor

15

Fuser edge thermistor

(FK-1150) (FK-1152) (FK-1151)

(302RV93050) (302RV93060) (302RY93020)

16

Rotation detecting sensor

17

DPCIS *1

PARTS SENSOR A4 CIS SP

302R794320

18

DP front side timing sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

19

DP backside timing sensor *1

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

20

DP paper feed sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

21

DP open/close sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

22

DP original sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

23

PF paper sensor

PARTS PWB PF CONT ASSY SP

303RA94010

24

PF feed sensor

PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP

302P794010

3 4

11

*1: 40 ppm model only

3-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-3) Motors

7 Document processer

Laser scanner unit

6

Fuser unit

3 Main body

Drum unit

2

4

5 Developer unit

1 Paper feeder

8

Machine left side /

Machine inside /

3-13

Machine right side

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA 1. Main motor ……………………………………. The paper feed and conveying mechanism drive 2. Fuser pressure release motor ………….. Fuser pressure release drive 3. Scanner motor ………………………………. Driving the optical section. 4. Rght side fan …………………………………. Cooling inside the machine (right side) 5. Left side fan motor …………………………. Cooling inside the machine (left side) 6. Polygon motor ……………………………….. Drive for polygon mirror. 7. DP feed motor ……………………………….. Drive for the DP paper conveying mechanism 8. PF paper feed motor ………………………. The paper feed drive of PF paper

Part name table No. 1

Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

Part. No.

Main motor

PARTS MOTOR-BL W40 SP

302LC94283

Fuser pressure release sensor

PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY SP (PARTS DRIVE PRESS RELEASE ASSY SP)

302RV94180 (302RV94030)

Scanner motor

PARTS MOTOR ISU SP

302R794380

Right side fan motor

PARTS,FAN COOLING CONVEYING SP

302FZ94420

5

Left side fan motor

PARTS FAN MOTOR SP

302NG94220

6

Polygon motor

(LK-1150)

(302RV93070)

7

DP feed motor

PARTS MOTOR-PM DP SP

302S094010

8

PF paper feed motor

PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP

302LC94292

2

3 4

3-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-4) Others

10 Document processer

Laser scanner unit

Fuser unit

6

7 8 Main body

5 9

Drum unit

4 3 Developer unit

2 Paper feeder

12

Machine left side /

Machine inside /

3-15

11

Machine right side

1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA 1. Developer clutch ……………………………. Controlling the drive to developer unit. 2. Registration clutch …………………………. Registration roller drive control 3. Paper feed clutch …………………………… Controlling the drive of cassette paper feed 4. MP solenoid ………………………………….. Controlling the drive of MP lift guide 5. Eject solenoid ………………………………… Switching the reverse guide 6. Fuser heater ………………………………….. Heating the fuser belt 7. Thermal cut (center) ……………………….. Shutting off the fuser heater power supply when the heat roller is abnormally high (edge). 8. Thermal cut (edge) …………………………. Shutting off the fuser heater power supply when the heat roller is abnormally high (edge). 9. Speaker ………………………………………… Generating the operation panel touch sound and error sound 10. DP paper feed clutch ……………………… Controlling the conveying drive of document processor 11. PF paper feed clutch ………………………. Controlling the drive of PF cassette paper feed 12. PF feed clutch ……………………………….. Controlling the conveying drive of PF paper

Part name table No.

Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

Part. No.

1

Developer clutch

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

2

Registration clutch

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

3

Paper feed clutch

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

4

MP solenoid

SOLENOID MPF

302HN44160

5

Eject solenoid

SOLENOID FD ASSY SP

302HN94140

6

Fuser heater

7

Thermal cut (center)

8

Thermal cut (edge)

(FK-1150) (FK-1152) (FK-1151)

(302RV93050) (302RV93060) (302RY93020)

9

SPEKER

PARTS SPEAKER SP

302ND94790

10

DP feed clutch

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

11

PF paper feed clutch

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

12

PF feed roller

PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP

302NR94010

3-16

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3-3

Drive system

(1) Drive system for the paper conveying

D

8

C B 6 7

2 4 3

5

A

1 9

11

10

Figure 3-12 A. Primary paper feed 1. Paper feed roller B. Developer unit 2. Developer roller 3. Screw roller a 4. Screw roller b

8. Eject roller 9. Main motor 10. PF paper feed roller 11. PF conveying motor

C. Drum unit 5. Drum D. Fuser unit 6. Press roller 7. Belt roller

3-17

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Each section drive (2-1) Primary paper feed drive

Main motor

Middle roller Paper feed clutch Paper feed roller

Figure 3-13

(2-2) Drum drive

Cleaning roller

Main motor

Drum

Figure 3-14

3-18

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-3) Developer drive Developer screw A

Developer roller

Developer screw B

Developer clutch

Main motor Figure 3-15

(2-4) Fuser unit drive Fuser belt

Main motor

Figure 3-16

3-19

Lower eject roller

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3-4

Mechanical construction

(1) Paper feed section The paper feed section consists of the cassette feed section which feeds from the paper cassette and the MP tray feed section which feeds from the MP tray.

(1-1) Cassette paper feed section The cassette can 300 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 250 sheets paper (80g/m2). As for the paper feed from the cassette, paper is pulled out by the pickup roller rotation and conveyed to the paper conveying section by the feed roller rotation. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller. The fed paper is conveyed by the middle roller to the position where it turns the registration sensor on. Components parts 1. Pickup roller 2. Paper feed roller 3. Retard roller 4. Cassette bottom plate 5. Friction pad 6. Paper width guides 7. Paper length guide 8. Middle roller 9. Middle pulley 10. Actuator (Paper sensor ) 11. Cassette base 12. Extension tray button 13. Extension tray

2 1 9 8

5 4

3

7

6

10

11

Figure 3-17

13 7

6

12 11

4 9

1

8

10

6

2

Figure 3-18

3-20

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

Paper sensor

CASPAPSE MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Paper feed clutch

Figure 3-19

3-21

FEEDCLURE

YC6-3 YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

YC10-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-2) MP tray paper feed section The MP tray can load 60 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 50 sheets (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP paper feed roller while lifting up the MP bottom plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the MP separation pad. The fed paper is conveyed by the MP feed roller to the position where it turns the registration sensor on. Components parts 1. MP paper feed roller 2. MP separation pad 3. MP friction plate 4. MP bottom plate 5. MP paper width guides 6. MP tray 7. MP tray sub 8. MP actuator (MP paper sensor )

6

7

5

4

8

1

3

2

Figure 3-20

8

5 4

3 1

2 7

6 5

Figure 3-21

3-22

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

MP paper sensor

MP solenoid

MPFPAPSE

MPFSOLRE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-22

3-23

YC6-6

YC21-4

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner section to write the image.

(2-1) Image scanner unit The original image is exposed by the exposure lamp (LED) and the reflection light is scanned by the CIS image sensor and converted to the electric signal. When using the document processor, the image scanner unit stops at the original scanning position (slit glass) and scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.

Components parts 1. CIS 2. Scanner carriage 3. Slit glass 4. Contact glass 5. ISU top flame 6. Scanner drive gear 7. Scanner drive belt 8. ISU bottom flame

5

3

1

2

4

7

8

6

Figure 3-23

6 5

2 3

1

7 3

8 4

Figure 3-24

3-24

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

Home position sensor

ISUHPSE

ISUMOTA1 ISUMOTA2

Scanner motor

ISUMOTB2 ISUMOTB1

SAAVO0 SAAVO1 SAAVO2 SAASP

CIS

SAACLK SAALEDA SAALEDB SAALEDG SAALEDR

Figure 3-25

3-25

YC31-3

YC31-4 YC31-5 YC31-6 YC31-7 YC506-1 YC506-3 YC506-5 YC506-8 YC506-10 YC506-11 YC506-12 YC506-13 YC506-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-2) Laser scanner unit The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects to the polygon mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The laser scanner unit has some lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to the drum surface.

3

Components parts 1. Polygon motor 2. fθ lens 3. Mirror 4. Laser scanner frame 5. Collimate lens 6. Cylindrical lens 7. Laser bracket 8. Drum

2

1

4

8 Figure 3-26

2

8

1

3

Figure 3-27

3-26

4

6

5

7

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

PMOTREM

Polygon motor

PMOTRDYN PMOTCLKN

VDATA2N VDATA2P VDATA1N VDATA1P

APC PWB

SAMPLE2 SAMPLE1 LSUENAN VCONT PDN

Figure 3-28

3-27

YC3-3 YC3-4 YC3-5

YC505-1 YC505-2 YC505-3 YC505-4 YC505-5 YC505-6 YC505-7 YC505-9 YC505-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Developer section (3-1) Developer unit The developer section consists of the developer roller forming the magnetic brush, the developer blade forming the thin layer by moving the toner, and the developer screw mixing up the toner. The toner density is adjusted by impressing the bias to the developer roller. The toner amount inside the developer unit is also detected by the toner sensor. Components parts 1. Developer roller 2. Developer blade 3. Blade magnet 4. Developer screw A 5. Developer screw B 6. Developer case 7. Toner container release button 8. Toner sensor 9. Developer shutter 10. Drum 11. Toner container

11

8

6

5

4

Figure 3-29

5 4 3 2 1 10

6 8 9 7 Figure 3-30

3-28

1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

REGPAPSE MHVCNT

Gr M D T S

Developer

High voltage PWB

HVCLK RTHVREM GHVCNT DHVCNT THVCNT SHVCNT

YC16-4 YC16-5 YC16-6 YC16-7 YC16-8 YC16-9 YC16-10 YC16-12

Main/ Engine PWB

Developer clutch

DLPCLURE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Toner sensor

Figure 3-31

3-29

ITOEMPSE

YC10-6

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4 YC14-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Drum section The drum section consists of the drum, the main charger roller unit, and the cleaning blade, etc. The drum surface is evenly charged to prepare forming the electrostatic latent image by emitting the laser beams.

(4-1) Main charger unit The drum surface is evenly charged by the shield grid attached to the bottom of the unit.

(4-2) Cleaning Remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected to the toner container by the collecting roller. The eraser PWB consists of LED lamp, and it removes the remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.

7

[Components parts] 1. Drum 2. Main charger unit 3. Shield grid 4. Collecting roller 5. Cleaning blade 6. Cleaning roller 7. Eraser PWB 8. Flicker plate 9. Drum unit frame

2 3

5

1

6

4

Figure 3-32

6

4 8 5 2

3

1

Figure 3-33

3-30

9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

REGPAPSE

Grid PWB

MHVCNT

Gr M D T S

High voltage PWB

HVCLK RTHVREM GHVCNT DHVCNT THVCNT SHVCNT

YC16-4 YC16-5 YC16-6 YC16-7 YC16-8 YC16-9 YC16-10 YC16-12

Main/ Engine PWB

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Mai motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-34

3-31

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) Conveying/Transfer and Separation section Conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section after adjusting the paper position at the registration rollers. The transfer and separation section consists of the transfer roller and separation needles attached to the paper conveying unit. The DC bias is impressed to the transfer roller by the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB), and the toner image formed on the drum is transferred to the paper by the potential gap. Then, the paper is separated by the drum curvature separation. and discharged by the grounded separation brush *1 *1: 100V model applies DC voltage. Components parts 1. registration roller 2. Registration pulley 3. Actuator (registration sensor) 4. Transfer front guide 5. Transfer roller 6. Separation brush 7. Conveying guide 8. Drum

1

3

8

2

4

Figure 3-35

8 7

1 2 3

Figure 3-36

3-32

6

5

4

7

5 6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

REGPAPSE MHVCNT

Gr

Transfer Separate

M D T S

High voltage PWB

HVCLK RTHVREM GHVCNT DHVCNT THVCNT SHVCNT

YC16-4 YC16-5 YC16-6 YC16-7 YC16-8 YC16-9 YC16-10 YC16-12

Main/ Engine PWB Registration clutch

REGCLURE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-37

3-33

YC10-2

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(6) Fuser section Paper from the transfer and separation section is pinched between the fuser belt and the press roller. The fuser belt is heated by the fuser heater and pressed by the press roller pressed by the fuser pressure spring. The toner is fused on the paper with heat and pressure. The surface temperature of the heat roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and controlled by the main/ engine PWB. If the fuser section has abnormal high temperature, the power supply line is shut off by switching the fuser thermostat and the fuser heater is turned off forcibly. Components parts 1. Fuser front guide 2. Fuser heater 3. Fuser belt 4. Fuser press roller 5. Thermopile 6. Fuser thermistor 7. Thermal cut-off 8. Actuator (Eject sensor) 9. Lower eject roller 10. Lower eject pulley

7 2

3

8

10 9

1

4

Figure 3-38

6 7

5

8

3

10

9 4 7

1

Figure 3-39

3-34

2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Fuser edge thermistor

FUSTMPSE2

Rotation detect sensor

FUSROTSE

YC19-3

FUSTMPSE10

YC2-5 YC2-8 YC2-9 YC2-10

FUSTMPSE1A

Thermo pile

TPSDA TPSCL

Thermocut

YC102-2 YC102-1

Heater

Low voltage power source PWB

ZCROSS HEAT STANDBYN RELAY

YC19-10

YC20-7 YC20-8 YC20-9 YC20-10

Main/ Engine PWB

Eject sensor

EXIPAPSE PREMOTRE-

Press-release motor Fuser pressure release sensor

PREMOTRE+ PREMOTPOSSE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-40

3-35

YC19-6 YC1-3 YC1-4 YC19-9

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(7) Eject and feedshift section The eject and feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex conveying section. Components parts 1. Upper eject roller 2. Upper eject pulley 3. Eraser brush 4. FD guide 5. Eject lever 6. Lower eject roller 7. Feedshift pulley 8. Rear cover

2 5 1

6 7 Figure 3-41

4 1

2 3 5

5

3 8

6

7 Figure 3-42

3-36

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

Eject solenoid

EXISOLRE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-43

3-37

YC1-2

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(8) Duplex conveying section The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the eject and feedshift section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.

Components parts 1. Lower eject roller 2. Feedshift pulley 3. Actuator (Eject sensor) 4. DU conveying roller A 5. DU conveying pulley A 6. DU conveying roller B 7. DU conveying upper guide 8. DU conveying lower guide 9. DU conveying lever 10. Rear cover

6

1

7

8

4

3

5

Figure 3-44

1

2

3 6

4

10 5 9 8

Figure 3-45

3-38

2

10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

Eject sensor

EXIPAPSE

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN

Main motor

MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN

Figure 3-46

3-39

YC19-6

YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(9) Document processor The original feed section consisting of the parts in the figure, feeds and conveys the original on the original tray to the original conveying section by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed roller. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is scanned *1 when passing the CIS and the 1st side at the optical section (CIS) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass. The original already scanned is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller.

14 12 10 7 5 3 13 11 8 9 2 1 4

16

17 15 18

19 20

6

21

22

23 Figure 3-47

Components parts 1. DP pickup pulley 2. DP feed roller 3. DP feed folder 4. DP friction pad 5. DP separation pad 6. DP actuator (DP original sensor ) 7. DP registration roller 8. DP registration pulley 9. DP actuator (DP front side timing sensor) 10. DP actuator *1 (DP backside timing sensor) 11. DP CIS contact glass 12. DPCIS *1

13. DP conveying roller A 14. DP conveying pulley A 15. DP conveying roller B 16. DP conveying pulley B 17. DP actuator (DP paper feed sensor) 18. DP scanning guide 19. DP eject roller 20. DP eject pulley 21. DP original width guide 22. DP original tray 23. DP eject tray

*1: 40 ppm model only

8 14

13 12 16 15

7

2

5 6 17

11

18

1 3

21

22 4

9 23 19

21 Figure 3-48

3-40

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

DP open/close sensor

DPCOVER DPMOTA1 DPMOTA2

DP paper feed motor

DPMOTB2 DPMOTB1

DP paper feed clutch DP original detect sensor DP paper feed sensor

DPREGCLURE

ORGSETSE DPFEEPAPSE ADFVO0 ADFVO1 ADFVO2 ADFSP

CIS *1

ADFCLK ADFLEDA ADFLEDB ADFLEDG ADFLEDR

DP backside timing sensor *1 DP timing sensor

*1: 40 ppm model only, *2: 35 ppm model only Figure 3-49

3-41

DPREGPAPSE1 DPREGPAPSE

YC34-15 *1 YC34-12 *1 YC33-1 YC33-2 YC33-3 YC33-4

YC33-6 YC34-12 *1 YC34-9 *2 YC34-9 *1 YC34-6 *2 YC509-1 YC509-3 YC509-5 YC509-8 YC509-10 YC509-11 YC509-12 YC509-13 YC509-14 YC34-6 YC34-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(10)Paper feeder (option) The cassette can 300 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 250 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Paper fed from the cassette is picked up by the rotation of the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by the rotation of the paper feed roller and conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.

Components parts 1. PF paper feed roller 2. PF pickup roller 3. PF pickup holder 4. PF retard roller 5. PF conveying roller 6. PF conveying pulley 7. PF cassette bottom plate 8. PF friction pad 9. PF paper width guides 10. PF actuator (PF paper sensor) 11. PF paper length guide 12. PF cassette base 13. PF actuator (PF feed sensor)

13 1 3

6

4 5

10

7

9

12

2 8

Figure 3-50

6 5

1 13 2

9

10 9 8 7

12

Figure 3-51

3-42

11

11

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Block diagram

Main/ Engine PWB

PF feed sensor

PFEED

YC7-3

PF main PWB PF paper sensor

NC-1

TMOTRDYN TMOTCLK

PF conveying motor

PF paper feed clutch PF conveying clutch

Figure 3-52

3-43

TMOTDRVN

FEEDCLN TRNSCLN

YC4-1 YC4-2 YC4-3

YC2-2 YC2-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4 Maintenance 4-1 Precautions for the maintenance (1) Precautions Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly. When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to damage the PWB. If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic. Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook. Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable. Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled. If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.

(2) Storage and handling of the drum Note the following when handling and storing the drum. When detaching the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light. Store in the place of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C and ambient humidity of 85% RH or less. Avoid storing the drum unit in the place where the temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the tolerable range. Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum. Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves. If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

(3) Storage of the toner container Store the toner container in a cool, dark place. Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.

4-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Screening of the toner container Look at the screening film on the brand protection seal affixed to the toner container through the windows of the validation viewer. Look at the screening film through two windows to check the genuineness. A black-colored band when seen through the the anti-counterfeit film portion left side window ( mark). A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the anti-counterfeit film portion right side window (

mark).

When seen as the above, it is genuine. Otherwise (e.g. both seen in gold), it is a counterfeit.

( marking)

( marking) Validation viewer

Validation viewer

Brand protection seal

Brand protection seal

A black-colored band when seen through the left side window

A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window Figure 4-1

The anti-counterfeiting film portion has three slits as the figure below and it can not reused.

Three cut parts at the red circle section

Figure 4-2

4-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

4-2 Maintenance parts (1) Maintenance kits Maintenance part name Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

1702RV0NL0 1702RV0JP0 1702RV0US0 1702RV0AS0

MK-1150/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-1151/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-1152/MAINTENANCE KIT MK-1154/MAINTENANCE KIT DRUM UNIT Developer unit

MK-1150 MK-1151 MK-1152 MK-1154 (100,000 image)

(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the

Part No.

maintenance kit

Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit. Section

No.

Maintenance mode

Replacing settings

U130

Developer powder initial setting *1

Maintenance

U251

Maintenance counter clear

*1 Only when replacing the developer unit with the new one

(3) Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

Part No.

Pick up roller Paper feed roller (Paper feed roller assembly)

PULLEY PICKUP ASSY PULLEY FEED ASSY (PARTS HOLDER FEED ASSY SP)

MP paper feed roller

ROLLER M/P ASSY

302HS0826_

CONTACT GLASS

PARTS ISU TOP SP

—

Slit glass (ISU upper frame(A4)) (ISU upper frame(Legal))

PARTS ISU TOP SP (PARTS FRAME ISU TOP A ASSY SP) (PARTS FRAME ISU TOP L ASSY SP)

4-3

302HN0608_ 302F90623_ (302RV9407_)

302S01713_ (302S09403_) (302S39401_)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

(4) Periodic maintenance Procedures Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901. CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace Parts name

1

IMAGE QUALITY

2

MK-1150 MK-1151 MK-1152 MK-1154

3

INSIDE OF MACHINE

4

Parts No.

—

PM maintenance (x1000 counts) Set UP

User Call

100

CH

CH

CH

AD

AD

AD

1702RV0NL0 1702RV0JP0 1702RV0US0 1702RV0AS0

Remark Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.

RE

Drum unit, Developer unit

—

CL

CL

Vacuum: In particular, remove toner and paper dust around imaging and conveying section.

PULLEY PICKUP ASSY PULLEY FEED ASSY

302HN06080 302F906230

CL

CL

Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.

5

ROLLER M/P ASSY

302HS08260

CL

CL

Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.

6

CONTACT GLASS

—

CL

CL

Dry cloth wiping or Alcohol cleaning.

302S017130

CL

CL

CONTACT-GLASS DP

4-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4-3Maintenance parts replacement procedures When it is necessary to replace parts is needed due to malfunction, etc., replace the service parts in the following procedures.

(1) Cassette paper feed section (1-1)Detaching and reattaching the Paper feed roller Procedures 1. Pull out the cassette (a) from the main unit (b) in the direction of the arrow, and detach it.

b

a Figure 4-1

2. Pull the lever (b) of the paper feed roller assembly (a) toward you and release the lock. 3. Slide the paper feeder roller assembly (a) while settingg it upright and detach it from the paper feeder roller shaft (c). 4. Detach the paper feeder roller assembly (a) toward you.

c

a b Figure 4-2

4-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

5. Check or replace the paper feeder roller assembly (a) (paper feed roller, pick up roller), and then reattach the parts in the original position.

b

a

Attention: When reattaching to the paper feed roller assembly (a), make sure to align the head (c) of the feed shaft (b) to the oval (d) of the paper feed roller assembly.

a

b

d c Figure 4-3

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller Procedures 1. Detach the cassette (a). 2. Release two hooks (b) from the back side of the cassette and detach the retard roller assembly (c).

c

b

b

a

b

Figure 4-4

4-6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3. Detach the retard roller (b) from the retard roller assembly (a).

b

a

Figure 4-5

a

4. Check or replace the retard roller, reattach the detached parts in the original position. Attention: When attaching the retard roller assembly (a), make sure to attach the spring (c) to the protrusion (b) of the retard roller assembly.

b

c

Figure 4-6

4-7

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed pulley Procedures 1. Detach the cassette 2. Open the front cover (a) and detach the strap by using pliers. 3. Remove the stop ring (c).

a

1

c 2

b

Figure 4-7

4. Open the front cover (a) to the bottom and detach the left side of cover fulcrum from the fulcrum shaft (b). 5. Release the right side of fulcrum portion (c) and detach the front cover (a).

b a 1

a

c 2

Figure 4-8

4-8

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6. Remove four screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach MP below frame(b).

a

b Figure 4-9

7. Pull the lock lever and the slide the paper feed roller shaft (b) to the right. 8. Detach the paper feed pulley (c). 9. Check or replace the paper feed pulley (c), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

b

c

Figure 4-10

*: When attaching the paper feed pulley, locate it so that the cross notch lies at the right side viewed from front.

Figure 4-11

4-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Developer section (2-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a). 2. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-12

3. Detach the developer unit (a). 4. Check or replace the developer unit (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position. Execute the following maintenance mode when replacing with the new developer unit. U130 Developer powder initial setting U158 Clear the developer counter

a

Attention: Execute the following maintenance modes when replacing the maintenance kit. U130 Developer powder initial setting U251 Clear the maintenance counter

Figure 4-13

4-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Drum section (3-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a). 2. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-14

3. Detach the developer unit (a).

a

Figure 4-15

4-11

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Detach the drum unit (a). 5. Check or replace the drum unit (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a When replacing with the new drum unit, execute the following maintenance mode. U110 Clear the drum counter U120?Clear the drum drive distance counter

Attention: Execute the following maintenance modes when replacing the maintenance kit. U251 Clear the maintenance counter

Figure 4-16

4-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charger unit Procedures 1. Remove the tape (b) from the drum unit (a). 2. Open the eraser cover (c)

b

a

c

Figure 4-17

3. Slide the edge (a) of the main charger unit. 4. Pull up the edge (a) of the main charger unit and detach it. 5. Check or replace the main charger unit (b), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

b

Figure 4-18

4-13

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Transfer section (4-1)Detaching and reattaching the transfer roller unit Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a). 2. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-19

3. Detach the developer unit (a).

a

Figure 4-20

4-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Detach the drum unit (b).

a

Figure 4-21

5. Slide the transfer front guide (b) while pressing the release lever (a) and release the hook (c). 6. Remove the transfer front guide (b).

b

a

a

b

c

c

c

Figure 4-22

4-15

c

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the shaft (b) of transfer roller (a) from two transfer bushings (c). 8. Remove the gear Z17 (d) from the transfer roller (a). 9. Check or replace the transfer roller (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

b a b

a d

Figure 4-23

4-16

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) Fuser section (5-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b b

e e d d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a a

d d

c c Figure 4-24

5. Open the rear cover (a) to align it to the position of the shaft (b) and detach it from the fulcrum (c) in the direction of the arrow.

c

a

b

Figure 4-25

4-17

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-26

7. Twist the right rear cover(a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-27

4-18

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

8. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8P tight) and detach the fuser wire cover (b).

b

a

Figure 4-28

9. Disconnect the connector(a) from the low voltage power source PWB. 10. Disconnect the connector (b) from the main/ engine PWB.

b

a

Figure 4-29

4-19

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

11. Remove four screws (a) (M3×8S tight).

a

a

Figure 4-30

12. Pull out the fuser unit (a) while holding the both ends of it. 13. Check or replace the fuser unit (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

Attention: When detaching and reattaching, pay attention not to burn by touching the hot section.

Figure 4-31

4-20

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4-4Disassembly and Reassembly (1) Outer covers (1-1)Detaching and reattaching the left rear cover Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-32

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover Procedures 1. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 2. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-33

4-21

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the ISU left cover Procedures 1. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 2. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-34

(1-4)Detaching and reattaching the ISU right cover Procedures 1. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 2. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-35

4-22

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the left cover Procedures 1. Detach the cassette 2. Open the front cover (a). 3. Release four hooks (b) at the front side of the left cover(a).

a

b

b

Figure 4-36

4. Release two hooks (b) at the rear side of the left cover (a). 5. While tilting the left cover (a), detach it in the direction of the arrow.

a b

Figure 4-37

4-23

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the right cover Procedures 1. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-38

2. Twist the right rear cover(a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-39

4-24

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3. Detach two hooks(b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-40

4. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 5. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-41

4-25

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-7)Detaching and reattaching the front cover Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a) and detach the strap by using pliers. 2. Remove the stop ring (c).

a

1

c 2

b

Figure 4-42

3. Open the front cover (a) to the bottom and detach the left side of cover fulcrum from the fulcrum shaft (b). 4. Release the right side of fulcrum portion (c) and detach the front cover (a).

b a 1

a

c 2

Figure 4-43

4-26

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-8)Detaching and reattaching the rear cover Procedures 1. Open the rear cover (a) to align it to the position of the shaft (b) and detach it from the fulcrum (c) in the direction of the arrow.

c

a

b

Figure 4-44

4-27

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Optical section (2-1)Detaching and reattaching the laser scanner unit (LSU). Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-45

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-46

4-28

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-47

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-48

4-29

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it.

1 2

a

Figure 4-49

13. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-50

4-30

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Detach the cassette 15. Open the front cover (a). 16. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-51

17. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 18. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-52

4-31

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal.

b

a

Figure 4-53

20. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

c

a

b

Figure 4-54

4-32

d

e

f

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

21. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B). 22. Remove two screws (b)(M4x12). 23. Align the image scanner unit(c) and document processor (d) in the direction of the arrow to release the hooks and detach them.

a

d c

b Figure 4-55

a

24. Remove two screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU left holder(b).

b

Figure 4-56

4-33

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

25. Disconnect the relay connector (a) of the speaker. 26. Disconnect the connector (c) from the main/engine PWB (b).

a

b

c

Figure 4-57

c

27. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8S tight) and detach the FAX PWB assembly(b). 28. Lift up the hook (d) of FAX PWB lower cover (c) and detach it while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

c

b

a Figure 4-58

4-34

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

a

29. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a), detach the speaker holder(b).

b

Figure 4-59

30. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU right holder(b).

a

b

Figure 4-60

4-35

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

31. Detach the Wi-Fi PWB (a). 32. Remove the wire from the wire guide (b). 33. Slid the wire guide (b), release the hook (c) and remove it.

a 2 1

b c

Figure 4-61

34. Open the top cover (a). 35. Remove the stop ring(b) and detach the upper cover rack (c) from the upper cover (a).

2

a 1

b

c

c

Figure 4-62

4-36

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

a

36. Remove two screws(M3×8TP)(a) and remove the eject tray (b) in the upper direction.

b

Figure 4-63

37. Disconnect the connector (b) and the FFC (c) from the main/engine PWB (a). 38. Detach the wire from the clamp (d).

a

b d

c

Figure 4-64

4-37

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

b

39. Remove four screws (M3×6TP)(b) from the laser scanner unit (a). 40. Check or replace the laser scanner unit (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

Figure 4-65

IMPORTANT When securing the laser scanner unit with screws, execute it in the order of the figure to the right.

Figure 4-66

4-38

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU) Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-67

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-68

4-39

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-69

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-70

4-40

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-71

13. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-72

4-41

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Detach the cassette 15. Open the front cover (a). 16. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-73

17. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 18. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-74

4-42

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal.

b

a

Figure 4-75

20. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

c

a

b

Figure 4-76

4-43

d

e

f

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

21. Open the document processor (a). 22. Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach the hinge (b) from the main unit.

a

b

Figure 4-77

23. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B). 24. Remove two screws (b)(M4x12). 25. Align the image scanner unit (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach it by releasing the hook. 26. Check the image scanner unit(c), and clean or replace it . 27. Reattach the parts in the original position.

a

c

b

Figure 4-78

4-44

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel (TSI model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. While lifting up the leading edge, slide two points of the operation covers (b) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Detach the operation panel cover (b) from the operational section (a).

b

b

a

Figure 4-79

b

4. Detach the clear panel (b) and (c) from the operation panel (a). 5. Next detach the operation panel sheet (d) and (e).

d c

e

a

Figure 4-80

4-45

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

c

6. Remove two screws (c) (M3×8S tight). 7. Release two hooks (b) by using a flathead screwdriver (d). 8. Open the operational cover (a) while lifting up the front side of it.

c

b

a b

d

d Figure 4-81

9. Turn over the operation cover (a). 10. Disconnects two connectors (c), the USB connector (d) and the grounding terminal (e) of operational cover PWB (b). 11. Detach the operating section.

a

b

c e

d

Figure 4-82

4-46

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel (LCD model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. Release two hooks (b) by using a flathead screwdriver (c). 3. Open the operational cover (a) while lifting up the front side of it.

b

a b

c

c Figure 4-83

4. Turn over the operation cover (a). 5. Disconnects the connector (c) of operational cover PWB (b). 6. Detach the operating section.

b a

c

Figure 4-84

4-47

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-5)Detaching and reattaching the ISU top frame Procedures 1. Remove two screws(c). 2. Release five protrusions (d) of the ISU upper frame in the direction of arrow. 3. Release three hooks (f) of the ISU upper frame from the fixed section (e) of the ISU lower frame while lifting up the rear side of ISU upper frame. 4. Detach the ISU upper frame (b) from the ISU lower frame (a).

c d b

d

d

c d

IMPORTANT When detaching the ISU upper frame, pay attention not to touch the contact glass. Also wipe it with a dry cloth when it is dirty.

d

a f e

Figure 4-85

(2-6)Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage assembly Procedures 1. Disconnect FFC (d) from the connector (c) of the ISU carriage. 2. Detach the drive belt (f) from the ISU carriage fixed section (e). 3. Detach the ISU carriage(b) from ISU lower frame (a).

c

d

b

a e

f Figure 4-86

4-48

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Drive section (3-1)Detaching and reattaching the main motor Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-87

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-88

4-49

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

1

2

b

a

Figure 4-89

9. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-90

4-50

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-91

11. Detach the cassette 12. Open the front cover (a). 13. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-92

4-51

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 15. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-93

16. Remove the screw(M3×8Ptight) (b) and three screws(M3×8Stight)(c) securing the low voltage power source PWB cover (a) . 17. Remove the low voltage power source PWB cover (a). Attention: When detaching the low voltage power source PWB, the lower voltage power source PWB protection plate (d) may fall.

d

b a c Figure 4-94

4-52

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

18. Disconnect the connector (a). 19. Remove three screws(M3×8Stight)(b), detach the main motor(c). 20. Check or replace the main motor(c), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

c

b

a Figure 4-95

4-53

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the fuser pressure release drive unit Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-96

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-97

4-54

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

a

Figure 4-98

10. Detach the cassette 11. Open the front cover (a). 12. Release four hooks (b) at the front side of the left cover (a).

a

b

b

Figure 4-99

4-55

c

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

13. Release two hooks (b) at the rear side of the left cover (a). 14. While tilting the left cover (a), detach it in the direction of the arrow.

a b

Figure 4-100

15. Disconnect the connector (a).

a Figure 4-101

4-56

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

16. Open the front cover (a). 17. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-102

18. Detach the developer unit (a).

a

Figure 4-103

4-57

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Detach the drum unit (b).

a

Figure 4-104

20. Stand the main unit so that you can see the bottom side. 21. Remove four screws(M3x8P tight)(a) and remove the front stay(b).

b a

Figure 4-105

4-58

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

22. Tilt the DU assembly (a) and detach two stoppers(b) while pushing them inside. 23. Lift down the DU assembly(a) to the bottom and pull it toward you to detach it.

1

b

1 2

a

b

3

Figure 4-106

24. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8S tight). 25. Release the hook(b) and detach the fuser pressure release drive unit(c). 26. Check the fuser pressure release drive unit(c) and clean, or change it. 27. Reattach the parts in the original position.

b

c

a Figure 4-107

4-59

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the MP solenoid (front side) Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-108

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-109

4-60

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

1

2

b

a

Figure 4-110

9. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-111

4-61

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-112

11. Detach the cassette 12. Open the front cover (a). 13. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-113

4-62

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 15. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-114

16. Disconnect the connector (a), and detach one screw (M3x8S tight)(b). 17. Detach the MP solenoid (c). 18. Check the MP solenoid (c), and clean or replace it. 19. Reattach the parts in the original position.

c a

b

Figure 4-115

4-63

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-4)Detaching reattaching the clutch. Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-116

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-117

4-64

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

1

2

b

a

Figure 4-118

9. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-119

4-65

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-120

11. Detach the cassette 12. Open the front cover (a). 13. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-121

4-66

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 15. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-122

16. Disconnect three connector(a) of each clutch.

a a

Figure 4-123

4-67

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

17. Remove two screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach the clutch cover(b). 18. Detach the developer clutch (c) and registration clutch (d).

d b

c

a

Figure 4-124

19. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a) and deatch the power switch(b).

a

b

Figure 4-125

4-68

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

20. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a) and remove the cover (b). 21. Detach the paper feed clutch (c). 22. Check or replace the clutch, and reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

c

a

b

Figure 4-126

*: Attach the developer clutch (a) and the registration clutch (b) with the notches (c) facing down, and attach the cover.

b

c

Figure 4-127

4-69

a

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3-5)Detaching and reattaching the eject solenoid Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-128

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-129

4-70

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-130

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-131

4-71

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. Detach the cassette 13. Open the front cover (a). 14. Release four hooks (b) at the front side of the left cover (a).

a

b

b

Figure 4-132

15. Release two hooks (b) at the rear side of the left cover (a). 16. While tilting the left cover (a), detach it in the direction of the arrow.

a b

Figure 4-133

4-72

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

17. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-134

18. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-135

4-73

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-136

20. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 21. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-137

4-74

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

22. Open the rear cover (a) to align it to the position of the shaft (b) and detach it from the fulcrum (c) in the direction of the arrow.

c

a

b

Figure 4-138

23. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal.

b

Figure 4-139

4-75

a

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

24. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

d

e

c

a

b

f

Figure 4-140

25. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B). 26. Remove two screws (b)(M4x12). 27. Align the image scanner unit(c) and document processor (d) in the direction of the arrow to release the hooks and detach them.

a

d c

b Figure 4-141

4-76

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

a

28. Remove two screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU left holder(b).

b

Figure 4-142

29. Disconnect the relay connector (a) of the speaker. 30. Disconnect the connector (c) from the main/engine PWB (b).

a

b

c

Figure 4-143

4-77

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

c

31. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8S tight) and detach the FAX PWB assembly(b). 32. Lift up the hook (d) of FAX PWB lower cover (c) and detach it while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

c

b

a Figure 4-144

a

33. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a), detach the speaker holder (b).

b

Figure 4-145

4-78

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

34. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU right holder(b).

a

b

Figure 4-146

35. Open the top cover (a). 36. ?Remove the stop ring (b), ?remove the upper cover rack (c) from the upper cover (a).

2

a 1

b

c

c

Figure 4-147

4-79

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

a

37. Remove two screws(M3×8TP)(a) and remove the eject tray (b) in the upper direction.

b

Figure 4-148

38. Remove four screws(M3x8S tight)(a) and remove the back side of metallic plate (b).

a b

a

Figure 4-149

4-80

a

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

39. Disconnect the connector (a).

a

Figure 4-150

40. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a). 41. Remove the screw(M3×8P tight)(b).

b a

Figure 4-151

4-81

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

42. Detach the eject unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.

a

Figure 4-152

43. Release two hooks(b) and detach the eject unit cover (a). 44. Remove the screw (c) (M3×4P tight). 45. Remove the eject solenoid (d). 46. Check or replace the eject unit(d), and reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

d b

c

a

Figure 4-153

4-82

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Others (4-1)Detaching and reattaching the speaker Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-154

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-155

4-83

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-156

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-157

4-84

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-158

13. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-159

4-85

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Detach the cassette 15. Open the front cover (a). 16. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-160

17. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 18. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-161

4-86

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal.

b

a

Figure 4-162

20. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

c

a

b

Figure 4-163

4-87

d

e

f

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

21. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B). 22. Remove two screws (b)(M4x12). 23. Align the image scanner unit(c) and document processor (d) in the direction of the arrow to release the hooks and detach them.

a

d c

b Figure 4-164

a

24. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a), detach the speaker holder (b). 25. Check the speaker(b), and clean or replace it. 26. Reattach the parts in the original position.

b

Figure 4-165

4-88

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the eraser Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a). 2. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-166

3. Detach the developer unit (a).

a

Figure 4-167

4-89

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Detach the drum unit (b).

a

Figure 4-168

5. While taking care of both side of springs, remove the eraser assembly (a). 6. Check the eraser PWB, and clean or replace it. 7. Reattach the parts in the original position.

a

*: Attach the spring by hooking on the protrusion at the main unit. *: When reattaching the eraser assembly, hook it the protrusion of the main unit.

Figure 4-169

4-90

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4-3)Replacing the language sheet (TSI model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. While lifting up the leading edge, slide two points of the operation covers (b) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Detach the operation panel cover (b) from the operational section (a).

b

b

a

Figure 4-170

b

4. Detach the clear panel (b) and (c) from the operation panel (a). 5. Next detach the operation panel sheet (d) and (e). 6. Replace the operation panel sheet of the applicable language. 7. Reattach the parts in the original position.

d c

e

a

Figure 4-171

4-91

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4-4)Replacing the language sheet (LCD model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. While lifting up the leading edge, slide three points of the operation covers (b) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Detach the operation panel cover (b) from the operational section (a).

b

b

b a

Figure 4-172

4. Detach the clear panel (b) from the operation panel (a). 5. Next detach the operation panel sheet (c). 6. Replace the operation panel sheet of the applicable language. 7. Reattach the parts in the original position.

b

c

a

Figure 4-173

4-92

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4-5)Fan motor attachment direction Detaching and attaching are available by detaching the outer covers. *: When reattaching the fan motor (a), be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).

2

1

Figure 4-174

1. Right side fan motor : Intake (Rating label inside) 2. Left side fan motor : Intake (Rating label inside)

4-93

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) PWBs (5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main/engine PWB Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-175

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-176

4-94

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-177

9. Detach the Wi-Fi PWB (a).

a

Figure 4-178

4-95

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

10. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-179

11. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-180

4-96

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

12. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-181

13. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 14. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-182

4-97

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

15. Remove two screws(M3x8S tight)(a) and detach the USB earth plate (b).

b

a

Figure 4-183

16. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs from the main/engine PWB (a). 17. Release the wire from the wire guide (b) and remove it.

a b

Figure 4-184

4-98

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1

18. Remove seven screws(M3×8S tight)(a). 19. Detach the main/ engine PWB (b).

a

a b a a a Figure 4-185

20. Check or replace the main/engine PWB (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

b

Attention: When replacing the main/engine PWB(a), remove EEPROM (YS1)(b) from it and reattach it to the new main/engine PWB(a).

a

Figure 4-186

4-99

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

Note when replacing the main/engine PWB When replacing the main/engine PWB, remove EEPROM (YS1) on the old PWB and make sure to place it on the new PWB.

a

Figure 4-187

Note when replacing the main/engine PWB *: When replacing the main/engine PWB, in order to take over user information, insert the USB memory before replacing the main/engine PWB, execute U917, and export the data. (See page P.6-101) *: Check the network setting since the MAC address is changed. Example: when the printer name is registered with the IP address, reconfigure the IP address. *: Make sure to attach the Wi-Fi PWB on the old PWB of the Wi-Fi model to the new PWB. After replacing the main/engine PWB, execute the following setting. 1. Machine No. (maintenance mode U004) *:If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs. (1)Input «004» using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key. (2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key. (3)Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. 2. Firmware update (See page P.5-1) *:Check the latest firmware and upgrade it. 3. Adjusting the scanner automatically (maintenance mode U411) Adjusting the table scanning automatically (1)Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table. (2)Enter maintenance item U411. (3)Select [Target]. (4)Press [Left/Right] cursor key or [#], [*] key and select [Auto]. (5)Press the [Up/Down] cursor key and select [Table(ChartA)]. (6)Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment. (7)When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

4-100

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3 DP 1st side scanning auto adjustment (1)Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-up on the DP. (2)Enter maintenance item U411. (3)Select [DP FU(ChartB)]. (4)Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. (5)When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. *: If there is a problem with the 2nd side timing after adjusting the scanner, execute [DP FD(ChartB)]. Also, if there is a problem with the DP 1st side color, execute [DP FU(ChartA)]. 4. Insert the USB memory and execute U917 to import data. 5. Reactivating the license Reactivate the license when equipping the license of the optional product. (1)Card Authentication Kit (B) (2)UG-33 (ThinPrint) (3)Data Security Kit (E) *:Re-entering 4-digit encryption codes entered at setup is necessary. 6. Resetting the initial settings Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting (e.g. the local FAX information) from the System Menu or Command Center. 7. Resetting the maintenance mode Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary. No.

Maintenance mode relating to the main unit

No.

Maintenance mode relating to the main unit

U250

Maintenance counter preset

U603

User data 1

U251

Maintenance counter clear

U604

User data 2

U253

Double/single count switch

U610

System 1

U260

Feed/eject counter switch

U611

System 2

U345

Maintenance timing pre-caution setting

U612

System 3

U402

Print margin adjustment

U625

Communication Setting

U403

Scanning margin adjustment (table)

U695

FAX function customization

U404

Scanning margin adjustment (DP)

U425

Target adjustment

8. Exiting from the maintenance mode Input «001» using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

4-101

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB Procedures 1. Open the front cover (a). 2. Push down the developer release lever (b).

b

a Figure 4-188

3. Detach the developer unit (a).

a

Figure 4-189

4-102

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Detach the drum unit (b).

a

Figure 4-190

5. Slightly pull out the cassette 6. Open the rear cover (a). 7. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-191

4-103

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

9. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 10. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-192

11. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 12. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-193

4-104

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

13. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-194

14. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-195

4-105

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

15. Detach the cassette 16. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-196

17. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 18. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-197

4-106

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Stand the main unit so that you can see the bottom side. 20. Remove four screws(M3x8S tight)(a) and detach the front stay(b).

a b a

Figure 4-198

21. Tilt the DU assembly (a) and detach two stoppers(b) while pushing them inside. 22. Lift down the DU assembly(a) to the bottom and pull it toward you to detach it.

a b

b

Figure 4-199

4-107

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

23. Remove three screws(M4×12P tight)(a). 24. Lift up the lower base cover (b) and detach it. 25. Disconnect the connector (c).

1 2

c

a

b Figure 4-200

e

26. Remove the screw(M3×8Ptight) (b) and three screws(M3×8Stight)(c) securing the low voltage power source PWB cover (a) . 27. Remove the low voltage power source PWB cover (a).

d

Attention: When detaching the low voltage power source PWB, the lower voltage power source PWB protection plate (d) may fall.

c 28. Disconnect the connector (d) from the main/engine PWB and release the wire from the hook (e).

c c a Figure 4-201

4-108

b

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

29. Remove the screw(M4x12P?tight)(a), release the board support. 30. Detach the high voltage PWB (b). 31. Check or replace the high voltage PWB (b), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

c

a

b

Figure 4-202

4-109

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power source PWB Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-203

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-204

4-110

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

1

2

b

a

Figure 4-205

9. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-206

4-111

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-207

11. Detach the cassette 12. Open the front cover (a). 13. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-208

4-112

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 15. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-209

16. Remove the screw(M3×8Ptight) (b) and three screws(M3×8Stight)(c) securing the low voltage power source PWB cover (a) . 17. Remove the low voltage power source PWB cover (a). Attention: When detaching the low voltage power source PWB, the lower voltage power source PWB protection plate (d) may fall.

d

b a c Figure 4-210

4-113

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

18. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach the inlet mounting plate(b).

b

a Figure 4-211

19. Disconnect two connectors (a). 20. Remove the screw(M4×8S tight)(b), remove the ground wire(c).

a

b c Figure 4-212

4-114

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

21. Remove three screws(a)(M3x8S tight), detach the low voltage power source PWB (b). 22. Check or replace the low voltage power source PWB (b), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

*: Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may remain in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to protect you from electric shock.

b

a Figure 4-213

4-115

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the FAX PWB Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b b

e e d d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a a

c c Figure 4-214

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-215

4-116

d d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-216

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-217

4-117

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-218

13. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-219

4-118

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

14. Detach the cassette 15. Open the front cover (a). 16. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-220

17. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 18. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-221

4-119

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal(b).

b

a

Figure 4-222

20. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

c

a

b

Figure 4-223

4-120

d

e

f

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

21. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B)(a). 22. Remove two screws (M4x12)(b). 23. Align the image scanner unit(c) and document processor (d) in the direction of the arrow to release the hooks and detach them.

a

d c

b Figure 4-224

24. Disconnect the relay connector (a) of the speaker. 25. Disconnect the connector (c) from the main/engine PWB (b).

a

b

c

Figure 4-225

4-121

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

26. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8S tight) and detach the FAX PWB assembly(b).

b

a

Figure 4-226

4-122

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

27. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach the cover(b). 28. Check or replace the FAX PWB (c), and then reattach the parts which are removed in the original position.

a

b

a

c

Figure 4-227

4-123

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the Wi-Fi PWB. Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-228

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-229

4-124

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-230

9. Detach the Wi-Fi PWB (a). 10. Check or replace the Wi-Fi PWB (a), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

Figure 4-231

4-125

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-6)Detaching and reattaching the USB PWB. Procedures 1. Slightly pull out the cassette 2. Open the rear cover (a). 3. Open the cassette cover (c) and release the hook (d) of the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Twist the rear left cover (b) to release the hook (e) and detach it.

b

e d

Attention: The direction of hook (d) or (e) is reverse. Pay attention to the damage when detaching.

a

c Figure 4-232

5. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 6. Detach ISU rear cover (a) by holding the lower left portion of it.

a 1

b

2

Figure 4-233

4-126

d

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

7. Remove the screw(M3×10TP)(b). 8. While twisting the ISU left cover (a), release two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow. 9. Release the protrusion (d) of the ISU left cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

d

b

1 2

c

a

Figure 4-234

10. Twist the ISU right cover (a) and release two hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow. 11. Release the protrusion (c) of ISU right cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

c

b

2

1

a

Figure 4-235

4-127

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

12. Detach the cassette 13. Open the front cover (a). 14. Release four hooks (b) at the front side of the left cover (a).

a

b

b

Figure 4-236

15. Release two hooks (b) at the rear side of the left cover (a). 16. While tilting the left cover (a), detach it in the direction of the arrow.

a b

Figure 4-237

4-128

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

17. After twisting the DIMM cover(a), remove it while sliding it

1 2

a

Figure 4-238

18. Twist the right rear cover (a) and detach it while sliding it.

a

2

1

Figure 4-239

4-129

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

19. Detach two hooks (b) at the front side of the right cover (a).

b a Figure 4-240

20. Release three hooks (b) at the rear side of the right cover (a). 21. Tilt the right cover (a) and detach it.

a b

Figure 4-241

4-130

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

22. Open the front cover (a) and detach the strap (b) by using pliers. 23. Remove the stop ring (c).

a

1

c 2

b

Figure 4-242

24. Open the front cover (a) to the bottom and detach the left side of cover fulcrum from the fulcrum shaft (b). 25. Release the right side of fulcrum portion (c) and detach the front cover (a).

b a 1

a

c 2

Figure 4-243

4-131

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

26. Open the rear cover (a) to align it to the position of the shaft (b) and detach it from the fulcrum (c) in the direction of the arrow.

c

a

b

Figure 4-244

27. Remove the screw(M3×8S tight)(a), remove the ground terminal.

b

Figure 4-245

4-132

a

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

28. Disconnect six connectors (b), the connector (c)*1, USB connector (d)*1, FFC (e) and FFC (f)*2 from the main/engine PWB (a). *1: TSI model only *2: 40 ppm model only

d

e

c

a

b

f

Figure 4-246

29. TSI model: remove the screw (M3×8B). 30. Remove two screws (b)(M4x12). 31. Align the image scanner unit(c) and document processor (d) in the direction of the arrow to release the hooks and detach them.

a

d c

b Figure 4-247

4-133

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

a

32. Remove two screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU left holder(b).

b

Figure 4-248

33. Disconnect the relay connector (a) of the speaker. 34. Disconnect the connector (c) from the main/engine PWB (b).

a

b

c

Figure 4-249

4-134

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

c

35. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8S tight) and detach the FAX PWB assembly (b). 36. Lift up the hook (d) of FAX PWB lower cover (c) and detach it while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

c

b

a Figure 4-250

a

37. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a), detach the speaker holder (b).

b

Figure 4-251

4-135

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

38. Remove three screws(M3x8S tight)(a), detach ISU right holder(b).

a

b

Figure 4-252

39. Open the top cover (a). 40. Remove the stop ring(b) and detach the upper cover rack (c) from the upper cover (a).

2

a 1

b

c

c

Figure 4-253

4-136

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

a

41. Remove two screws(M3×8TP)(a) and remove the eject tray (b) in the upper direction.

b

Figure 4-254

42. Remove two screws (M3×8P tight)(b) from the eject tray(a). 43. Detach the USB PWB assembly (c). 44. Check or replace the USB PWB (c), and then reattach the parts which are detached in the original position.

a

b

d

c

Figure 4-255

4-137

b

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-7)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB (TSI model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. While lifting up the leading edge, slide two points of the operation covers (b) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Detach the operation panel cover (b) from the operational section (a).

b

b

a

Figure 4-256

b

4. Detach the clear panel (b) and (c) from the operation panel (a). 5. Next detach the operation panel sheet (d) and (e).

d c

e

a

Figure 4-257

4-138

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6. Remove two screws (c) (M3×8S tight). 7. Lift up the front side of operation cover (a) and release four hooks (b).

c

c

b

a b

Figure 4-258

8. Turn over the operation cover (a). 9. Disconnects two connectors (c), the USB connector (d) and the grounding terminal (e) of operational cover PWB (b).

a

b

c e

d

Figure 4-259

4-139

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Disconnect all the connectors and FFC from the operational panel PWB (a). 11. Remove four screws(M3x8S tight)(c), detach the operational panel PWB (b) from the operational cover (a). 12. Check the status of the operation panel PWB (b) and if necessary clean or replace it. 13. Reattach the parts in the original position.

c b c

c

c

a

Figure 4-260

4-140

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5-8)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB (LCD model) Procedures 1. Open the document processor. 2. Release two hooks (b) by using a flathead screwdriver (c). 3. Open the operational cover (a) while lifting up the front side of it.

b

a b

c

c Figure 4-261

4. Turn over the operation cover (a). 5. Disconnects the connector (c) of operational cover PWB (b).

b a

c

Figure 4-262

4-141

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6. Remove ten screws(M3x8P tight)(c), detach the operational panel PWB(b) from the operational cover(a). 7. Check the status of the operation panel PWB (b) and if necessary clean or replace it. 8. Reattach the parts in the original position.

c

c c c c

c c c

c

b c

a

Figure 4-263

4-142

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(6) Detaching and reattaching the document processor (6-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pick up pulley, DP paper feed roller and DP separation pad Procedures 1. Open the DP upper cover (a). 2. Twist two hooks (c) of the DP front cover to release them and detach the DP front cover (b).

a

c c

b

Figure 4-264

3. Twist two hooks (b) of the DP rear cover to release them and detach the DP rear cover (a).

b b

a

Figure 4-265

4-143

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Detach two guides (b) from the DP paper feed roller shaft (a). 5. Detach the stop ring(c) and the bearing(d) from DP paper feed roller shaft(a).

b

b a

c

d

Figure 4-266

6. Remove two stop rings(d) and the clutch(e) and the bearing(f) from the paper feed roller shaft(c). 7. Slide the DP paper feed roller shaft (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach the DP paper feed roller assembly (a) from the document processor (b).

b

c a

d

f e Figure 4-267

4-144

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

8. Push both side hooks (b) of DP separate pad assembly (a) inside and detach it from the document processor (c). 9. Check the pickup pulley, DP paper feed roller and DP separate pad assembly (a) and clean or replace it. 10. Reattach the parts in the original position.

c

b a b

IMPORTANT When replacing with new DP paper feed roller assembly or DP separation pad assembly, pay attention not to touch the roller surface.

Figure 4-268

(6-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP front cover Procedures 1. Open the DP upper cover (a). 2. Twist two hooks (c) of the DP front cover to release them and detach the DP front cover (b).

a

c c

b

Figure 4-269

4-145

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(6-3)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover Procedures 1. Open the DP upper cover (a). 2. Twist two hooks (c) of the DP rear cover to release them and detach the DP rear cover (b).

a

c c

b

Figure 4-270

(6-4)Detaching and reattaching the DP main motor Procedures 1. Open the DP upper cover (a). 2. Twist two hooks (c) of the DP rear cover to release them and detach the DP rear cover (b).

a

c c

b

Figure 4-271

4-146

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3. Disconnect the connector (c). 4. Remove two screws(M3×8)(b), detach the DP main motor (a). 5. Check the main motor (a) and clean or replace it. 6. Reattach the parts in the original position.

a

c

b b

Figure 4-272

4-147

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4-5Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) (1) Paper feeder (1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB Procedures 1. Remove two screws(M3×8P tight)(a). 2. Release two hooks (b) of the upper cover (c) and detach it.

a b a c

Figure 4-273

b

3. Disconnect all the connectors (a) from the PF main PWB(c). 4. Remove three screws(M3×8P tight)(b). 5. Detach the PF main PWB (c). 6. Check the status of the PF main PWB (c), clean or replace it as needed. 7. Reattach the parts in the original position.

b

c

a

Figure 4-274

4-148

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching PF conveying motor. Procedures 1. Remove two screws(M3×8P tight)(a). 2. Release two hooks (b) of the upper cover (c) and detach it.

a b a c

Figure 4-275

a

3. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a) and detach the frame assembly(b).

b

Figure 4-276

4-149

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Disconnect three connectors (b) from the PF main PWB (a). 5. Remove the sheet(c) and open the wire saddle(d). 6. Remove the fixed screws(M3x8TP)(e) of the earth spring(f).

e

f

a

b d c Figure 4-277

7. Disconnect two clutch connectors (a) and the motor connector (b). 8. Remove six screws(M3x8S tight)(a) and two ground terminals(d). 9. Detach the drawer support part (d).

e

a

c

c

d b c

Figure 4-278

4-150

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Remove two screws (M3x8S tight)(a). 11. Remove three screws (M3x8P tight)(b). 12. Detach the PF conveying motor assembly (c).

b c

a b

Figure 4-279

a

13. Detach the gear (a). 14. Remove three screws (b) (M3x4). 15. Detach the PF conveying motor (c) from the motor mounting plate (d). 16. Check the status of the PF conveying motor, clean or replace it if necessary. 17. Reattach the parts in the original position.

d 1

b

2

c Figure 4-280

4-151

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF clutch. Procedures 1. Remove two screws(M3×8P tight)(a). 2. Release two hooks (b) of the upper cover (c) and detach it.

a b a c

Figure 4-281

a

3. Remove the screw(M3x8P tight)(a) and detach the frame assembly (b).

b

Figure 4-282

4-152

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. Disconnect three connectors (b) from the PF main PWB (a). 5. Remove the sheet(c) and open the wire saddle(d). 6. Remove the fixed screws(M3x8TP)(e) of the earth spring(f).

e

f

a

b d c Figure 4-283

7. Disconnect two clutch connectors (a). 8. Remove six screws(M3x8S tight)(b) and two ground terminals(c). 9. Detach the drawer support part (d).

d

a

b

b

c

b

Figure 4-284

4-153

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

10. Detach the PF paper feed clutch(a). 11. Detach the PF feed clutch(b). 12. Check the status of the clutch, clean or replace it if necessary. 13. Reattach the parts in the original position.

b

a

Figure 4-285

4-154

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

5 Firmware 5-1

Firmware update (TSI model)

Execute the following to update the firmware below. *: The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group. [GROUP1 UPDATE] Update order

Target

Master file name

Message

1

Controller firmware

DL_CTRL.2S5

CTRL

2

Optional language data 1(for controller)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT1

3

Optional language data 2(for controller)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT2

4

Optional language data 3(for controller)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT3

5

Optional language data 4(for controller)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT4

6

Optional language data 5(for controller)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT5

*1: 01 to 99 of a different number for each language is inserted in «xx». [GROUP2 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available. [GROUP3 UPDATE] Update order 1

Target

Master file name

Engine firmware

DL_ENGN.2S0

Message ENGN

[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available. [GROUP5 UPDATE] Update order

Target

Master file name

Message

1

Optional language data 1 (for operation panel)

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT1

2

Optional language data 2

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT2

3

Optional language data 3

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT3

4

Optional language data 4

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT4

5

Optional language data 5

DL_OPT_xx.2S5*1

OPT5

6

Dictionary data

DL_DIC.2ND

DIC

7

Browser data

DL_BRWS.2R4 *2

BRWS

8

Panel firmware

DL_PANL.2S5

PNL

*1: 01 to 99 of a different number for each language is inserted in «xx». *2: TSI 40 ppm model only.

5-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Verify the signature at firmware update Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data. File names of the signature and firmware certificate Target

Signature file name

Firmware certificate file name

Controller data

2S5_CTRL_sign.bin

2R7_CTRL_cert.pem

Panel data

2R5_PANL_sign.bin

2R7_PANL_cert.pem

Dictionary data

2ND_DIC_sign.bin

2ND_DIC_cert.pem

Browser data

2R4_BRWS_sign.bin

2R4_BRWS_cert.pem

Optional language data *1

2S5_OPT_xx_sign.bin

2S5_OPT_xx_cert.pem

Engine PWB

2S0_ENGN_sign.bin

2S0_ENGN_cert.pem

Data for optional language deletion

2S5_OPT_ER_sign.bin

2S5_OPT_ER_cert_pem

*1: 01 to 99 of a different number for each language is inserted in «xx». Preparations Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory. *: If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.

Procedures 1. After turning the power switch (a) on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the power switch (a) off. 2. Insert the USB memory (b) with the firmware into the USB memory slot. 3. Turn the power switch (a) on.

a

c b

Figure 5-1

5-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

4. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indicator are displayed. *: Several kinds of firmware updates are processed simultaneously.

FW-U P D A T E CTRL

100%

ENGN OPT1

100%

OPT2 OPT3

80%

OPT4 OPT5 DIC BRWS PANEL

20%

Figure 5-2 5. When [Completed] is displayed, the firmware update is completed. 6. Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.

FW-U P D A T E CTRL

2S5_2000.001.003

ENGN

No Change

OPT1

2R7_G000.001.001*

OPT2

2R7_G100.001.001*

OPT 3

No Change

OPT 4

No Change

OPT 5

No Change

DIC

No Change

BRWS

No Change

PANL

2S0_1000.001.005

C om pleted

Figure 5-3 *: When there is no corresponding master file, «No Change» is displayed. * is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped. *: ———-is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.

In case of the error completion. In case of occurring an error during the firmware update, the process is immediately interrupted and the error message and error code are displayed.

FW-U P D A T E CTRL

2S5_2000.001.003

ENGN

No Change

OPT1

No Change

OPT2

No Change

OPT 3

No Change

OPT 4

No Change

OPT 5

No Change

DIC

No Change

BRWS

No Change

PANL

Error 0801

E rror

Figure 5-4 Error code Code

Error contents

Code

Error contents

0000

Others

S000

Other signature verification error *1

0100

There is no master file.

S001

Official signature verification file is short.

0200

Master file version discrepancy

N001

Unable to connect the network *2 (There is no target to update.)

N002

Can not connect to the network *3 (There is the target to update.)

03xx*4

There is no download file (No.xx).

04xx*4

File (No.xx) check sum discrepancy

05xx*4

File (No.xx) preparation failure

5-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Code

Error contents

06xx*4

File(No.xx) size excess

08xx*4

File (No.xx) writing failure

Code

Error contents

*1: The expiration of the FM certification is also included. *2: Since the normal start-up is available next time, it is restarted automatically and starts up normally. *3: As there is a possibility that normal start-up is impossible next time, without restarting automatically, and move to USB update mode. *4: The identifier applicable to the code XX is as follows. Update target Controller data

Code

Identifier

01

BOOT

02

KERNEL

03

FDTBIN

04

ROOTFS

05

APPL1

01

BOOT

02

KERNEL

03

INTRD

04

LOGO

05

APPLI

06

T.B.D

07

DIC

08

BRWS

01

M_OPT_ALL

02

P_OPT_MSG

Dictionary data

01

DIC

Browser

01

BRWS

Engine PWB

01

ENGN

Panel data

Optional language data

Each master file code is «00». *: TSI 40 ppm model only, The signature verification result display Official signature verification file

Indicate the result

Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful.

Version number

Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful.

S000

Neither certificate nor signature files exist. Or either of them does not exist.

S001

7. Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory. 8. Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on. 9. Check that the «Home» screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off. Precautions Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.

5-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Safe-Update When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on. Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed. *: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.

5-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

5-2

Firmware update (LCD model)

Execute the following to update the firmware below. *: The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group. [GROUP1 UPDATE] FAX model Update order

Target

Master file name

Message

1

Controller firmware

DL_CTRL.2S1

CTRL

2

Optional language data 1

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT1

3

Optional language data 2

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT2

4

Optional language data 3

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT3

5

Optional language data 4

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT4

6

Optional language data 5

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT5

Without FAX Update order

Target

Master file name

Message

1

Controller firmware

DL_CTRL.2S0

CTRL

2

Optional language data 1

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT1

3

Optional language data 2

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT2

4

Optional language data 3

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT3

5

Optional language data 4

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT4

6

Optional language data 5

DL_OPT_xx.2S0*1

OPT5

*1: 01 to 99 of a different number for each language is inserted in «xx». [GROUP2 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available. [GROUP3 UPDATE] Update order 1

Target

Master file name

Engine firmware

DL_ENGN.2S0

[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available. [GROUP5 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.

5-6

Message ENGN

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Verify the signature at firmware update Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data. File names of the signature and firmware certificate FAX model Target

Signature file name

Firmware certificate file name

Controller data

2S1_CTRL_sign.bin

2S1_CTRL_cert.pem

Optional language data *1

2S0_OPT_xx_sign.bin

2S0_OPT_xx_cert.pem

Engine PWB

2S0_ENGN_sign.bin

2S0_ENGN_cert.pem

Data for optional language deletion

2S0_OPT_ER_sign.bin

2S0_OPT_ER_cert_pem

Without FAX Target

Signature file name

Firmware certificate file name

Controller data

2S0_CTRL_sign.bin

2S0_CTRL_cert.pem

Optional language data *1

2S0_OPT_xx_sign.bin

2S0_OPT_xx_cert.pem

Engine PWB

2S0_ENGN_sign.bin

2S0_ENGN_cert.pem

Data for optional language deletion

2S0_OPT_ER_sign.bin

2S0_OPT_ER_cert_pem

*1: 01 to 99 of a different number for each language is inserted in «xx». Preparations Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory. *: If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.

Procedures 1. After turning the power switch (a) on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the power switch (a) off. 2. Insert the USB memory (b) with the firmware into the USB memory slot. 3. Turn the power switch (a) on. 4. [FW-UPDATE] is displayed and the upgrade is started. *: Several kinds of firmware updates are processed simultaneously.

a

c b

Figure 5-5

5-7

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA 5. The target name is displayed with the progress by the progress bar during the firmware update. (Display example) The first line: «FW-Update» is displayed The second line: The progress bar displaying the update progress.

FW-Update

6. When the firmware update complete normally, the completion message is displayed on the first page and the character string of the update target and updated version are displayed on the second and subsequent pages. (The first page) FW-Update 1/10 The first line: «FW-Update» Completed Page number/total page number and upper and lower key icon are displayed. The second line: «Completed» (Completion message) (The second and subsequent pages) The first line: «CTRL», (the character string applicable to the update target) Page number/total page number and upper and lower key icon are displayed. The second line: (Updated version) *: When there is no applicable master file, «No Change» is displayed.

*: «*» is displayed after the update target name when it has been skipped.

[CTRL] 2/10 2RB_2000.001.005

[ENGN] No Change

9/10

[CTRL] 2/10 2S1_2000.001.005

7. Check if the new firmware versions are displayed. 8. Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory. 9. Connect the power cord and turn the power switch off after checking that «Ready to copy» is displayed. In case of any error (the error which can not read a file), the process is interrupted immediately and the completion is displayed without executing the subsequent firmware update. (The first page) The first line: «FW-Update» Page number/total page number and upper and lower key icon are displayed. The second line: «Error» (The second and subsequent pages) The first line: «ENGN», (the character string applicable to the update target) Display page number/total page number, upper and lower key icon The second line: «Error», error code

5-8

FW-Update Error

1/10

[ENGN] Error

10/10 0100

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Error code Code

Error contents

Code

Error contents

0000

Others

S000

Other signature verification error *1

0100

There is no master file.

S001

The signature verification file is insufficient.

0200

Master file version mismatch.

N001

Unable to connect the network *2 (There is no target under the update.)

N002

can not connect to the network *3 (There is the target to update.)

03xx*4

There is no download file (No.xx).

04xx*4

File (No.xx) check sum discrepancy

05xx*4

File (No.xx) preparation failure

06xx*4

File(No.xx) size excess

08xx*4

File (No.xx) writing failure

*1: The expiration of the FM certification is also included. *2: Since the normal start-up is available next time, it is restarted automatically and starts up normally. *3: Since the normal start-up is not available next time, it is not restarted automatically but moved to the USB update mode. *4: The identifier applicable to the code XX is as follows. Update target Controller data

Code

Identifier

01

BOOT

02

KERNEL

03

FDTBIN

04

ROOTFS

05

APPLI

Optional language data

01

M_OPT_ALL

Engine PWB

01

ENGN

The signature verification result display Official signature verification file

Indicate the result

Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful.

Version number

Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful.

S000

Neither certificate nor signature files exist. Or either of them does not exist.

S001

10. Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory. 11. Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on. 12. Check that the «Home» screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off. Precautions Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update. Safe-Update When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on. Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed. *: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.

5-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6 Maintenance mode 6-1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing the maintenance mode Start

Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

Enter the maintenance item number using the [▲] [▼] keys or numeric keys.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes

Repeat the same maintenance item?

No Yes

Run another maintenance item? No Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys or numeric keys and press the start key.

Maintenance mode is exited.

End Operational caution There is a difference of a way of selecting each item by operational section type(TSI or LCD mode). Read «Select xxx item» in each procedure as follows. TSI model: Touching the item on the screen and select it. LCD model: Using the [▲] or [▼] key, select the item. (In order to move to the adjustment screen, Press the [OK] key or [START] key.)

6-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Maintenance modes list Section General

No.

Maintenance item

Outline

U000 Printing Maintenance Report

Printing the reports and exporting them to a USB memory

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

Exiting from the maintenance mode

U002 Set Factory Default

Initializing to the factory-default setting

U004 Machine number

Display of the machine serial number and setting

U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

Setting the maintenance mode ID

U019 Firmware Version

Displays the firmware version of the PWB

U021 Initializes Memory

Initializing the backup RAM

U025 Firmware update (S)

Updates the firmware

Drive Paper feed Conveying Cooling

U034 Paper timing adjustment

Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center line

Optical

U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scanning

U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

Adjusting the center line for table scanning

U068 DP scanning position adjustment

Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning

U070 DP magnification adjustment

Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning

U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

Adjusting the DP scanning timing

U072 Adjusting the DP original center

Adjusting the center line for DP scanning

U110 Drum counter

Displays/cleas the drum counter

U120 Drum counter

Displays/clears the drum driveing distance counter

Developer system

U130 Developer initial setting

Set the toner install mode on or off.

U158 Developer counter

Displays/sets the developer counter

Operation section / Support equipment

U201 Initializing the touch panel

Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch panel

U222 Setting the IC card type

Sets the ID card type

Initialization

High voltage system

6-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Section Mode Setting

Mode Setting Image processing

Image processing

FAX

No.

Maintenance item

Outline

U250 Changing the preset maintenance counter value

Display or set the maintenance counter preset value.

U251 Clearing/checking the maintenance counter

Display, set or clear the maintenance counter.

U252 Destination

Sets the machine operation and indication depending on the specification of the destination

U253 Switching the double/single counts

Sets the counter by color mode

U260 Select Copy Count

Setting the count-up timing

U285 Set Service Status Page

Setting the print coverage report output

U287 Set Auto Reset Function

Enable/disable the auto recovery after error

U290 Setting the drive to save the HyPAS application

Sets the drive to save the HyPAS application

U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

Setting the coefficient of the custom size

U345 Set Service Status Page

Setting the counter to display close to time for maintenance

U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

Setting the BAM related sleep mode

U402 Adjusting the printing margins

Adjusts the scan image margins

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass

Adjusts the margin for scanning originals

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor

Adjusts the margin for scanning originals

U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Reversal)

Adjusting the writing timing when duplex printing

U411 Scanner auto adjustment

Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically

U425 Set Target

Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment original

U520 TDRS setting

Checking/setting the TDRS

U600 Initialize: All Data

Initializes all data and image memory.

U601 Initialize: Keep data

Initializing the software switches of other than the machine data

U603 User data 1

Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX

U604 User data 2

Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX

U605 Data clear

Initializing the FAX communication data

U610 System 1

Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a FAX at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.

U611 System 2

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.

6-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Section FAX

Others

Others

No.

Maintenance item

Outline

U612 System 3

Setting regarding the FAX communication operation

U620 FAX system

Sets the signal detection method for remote switching

U625 Communication settings

Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing

U630 Communication control procedures 1

Setting the FAX communication

U631 Communication control procedures 2

Sets the FAX communication

U632 Communication control procedures 3

Setting the FAX communication

U633 Communication control procedures 4

Setting the FAX communication

U634 Communication control procedures 5

Set the acceptable error when judging the received TCF signal

U640 Communication time setting 1

Setting the detection time by remote switching mode

U641 Communication time setting 2

Sets the time-out time for the fax communication

U650 Modem 1

Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer

U651 Modem 2

Sets the modem output level

U660 Ring setting

Setting the NCU (network control unit)

U670 List output

Outputting the list of the fax communication data

U695 FAX function customization

FAX batch transmission is set up.

U699 Software switch: Set

Sets the software switches individually

U910 Black rate data

Clearing the print coverage data and its period

U917 Read/Write Backup Data

Reading/writing the backup data to a USB memory

U920 Billing counter

Displays the billing count

U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

Clearing the billing count and machine life count

U928 Machine life counter

Displays the machine life count

U964 Log check

Transfer the log files to a USB memory

U977 Setting the data capture mode

Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory

6-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode U000

Printing Maintenance Report (Message: Mainte Report) Contents Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences. Output the event log and service status page. Also, sends output data to a USB memory. Purpose Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences. Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to output. Items

Output list

Maintenance

Maintenance mode setting list

User Status

Output User Status Page

Svc Status

Output Service Status Page

Event

Output the event log report

NW Status

Output Network Status Page

All

All reports output

3.Press the [Start] key to output the list. * :If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, select the paper cassette. Output status is displayed. Method: when sending output data to a USB memory 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot. 3.Select the item to send. 4.Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)]. Items

Output list

Print

A report is printed.

USB(Text)

Destination: send to USB memory (text format)

USB(HTML)

Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

5.Press the [Start] key. * :The output data is sent to the USB memory. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-5

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Detail of event log (1)

Event Log MFP

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

(2) 2014/10/19 15:15

ECOSYS M2640idw

(1) Firmware version 2S5_2000.000.000 2014.09.19

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

(4)

(3) (6) Machine No.:Z7T0000000

(7) Life Count:100000

(8) Paper Jam Log # 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Count. 9999999 8888888 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 (a) 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

# 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

(10) Maintenance Log

Event Descriptions Date and Time 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/22 10:00 0501.01.00.00.00 2014/09/20 09:22 4201.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/03 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/08/15 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/08/11 10:00 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/07/05 10:00 (b) (c) (d) 2014/07/04 (e) 4003.01.00.00.00 10:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/06/26 10:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/05/01 10:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/04/05 10:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/02/21 10:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2013/11/3010:00 4003.00.00.00.00 2013/11/24 10:00

# 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4003.01.00.00.00

(9) Service Call Log Count. 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

(5)

Count. 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

Item 02.01 02.00 02.01 02.02 02.03 02.01 02.00 02.02

Date and Time 2014/07/05 10:00 2014/07/04 10:00 2014/06/26 10:00 2014/05/01 10:00 2014/04/05 10:00 2014/02/21 10:00 2013/11/30 10:00 2013/11/24 10:00

(11) Toner Log

Service Code Date and Time 01.00.0100 2014/07/05 10:00 02.01.0100 2014/07/04 10:00 01.01.0000 2014/06/26 10:00 01.00.0000 2014/05/01 10:00 01.01.0000 2014/04/05 10:00 02.00.0000 2014/02/21 10:00 02.00.0000 2013/11/30 10:00 01.00.0000 2013/11/24 10:00

# 5 4 3 2 1

Count. 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

Item 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00

1

Figure 6-1

6-6

Serial Number 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF

Date and Time 2014/05/01 10:00 2014/04/05 10:00 2014/02/21 10:00 2013/11/30 10:00 2013/11/24 10:00

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Detail of event log (2)

Event Log MFP

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

ECOSYS M2640idw

(2) 2014/10/19 15:15

(1) Firmware version 2S5_2000.000.000 2014.09.19

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

(3) (6) Machine No.:Z7T0000000

(7) Life Count:100000

(12) Counter Log (f) J0000 :

1 J0001 : 2 J0002 : 3 J0003 : 4 J0004 : 5 J0005 : 6 J0006 : 7 J0007 : 8 J0008 : 9 J0009 : 10 J0010 : 20 J0011 : 30 J0012 : 40 J0013 : 50 J0014 : 60 J0015 : 70 J0016 : 80 J0017 : 90 J0018 : 100 J0019 : 110 J0020 : 120 J0021 : 130 J0022 : 140 J0023 : 150 J0024 : 160 J0025 : 170 J0026 : 180 J0027 : 190 J0028 : 200 J0029 : 300 J0030 : 400 J0031 : 500 J0032 : 600 J0033 : 700 J0034 : 800 J0035 : 900

J0035 : 999 J0036 : 999 J0037 : 999 J0038 : 999 J0039 : 999 J0040 : 999 (g) C0001 : 1 C0002 : 2 C0003 : 3 C0004 : 4 C0005 : 5 C0006 : 6 C0007 : 7 C0008 : 8 C0009 : 9 C0010 : 10 C0011 : 11 C0012 : 12 C0013 : 13 C0014 : 14 C0015 : 15 C0016 : 16 C0017 : 17 C0018 : 18 C0019 : 19 C0020 : 20 CF245: 21 ( 0) CF248: 22 ( 11) CF345: 222 ( 111) (h) T00 : 10 T01 : 20 T02 : 30 T03 : 40 M00 : 50 M01 : 60 M02 : 70 M03 : 80 M04 : 90

2

Figure 6-2

6-7

(4)

(5)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Description of event log No.

Items

Contents

(1)

System version

(2)

System date

(3)

Engine firmware version

(4)

Engine boot version

(5)

Operation panel firmware version

(6)

Machine serial number

(7)

Life counter

(8)

Paper Jam # Log Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence. If the past paper jam occurrence is less than 16, all of them are indicated. The oldest log is deleted when exceeding 16 events.

Count.

Event

The total page count at the time of a paper jam.

Log code ( 5 types in hexadecimal) (a) Cause of paper jam (b) Paper source (c) Paper size (d) Paper type (e) Paper eject

(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal) :Refer to «17-1 Paper Misfeed Detection» (See page ),for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (7-64) (b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal) 00: MP tray 01: Cassette 1 02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder) 03 to 09: Reserved

(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal) 00: Not specified 01: Monarch 02: Business 03: International DL 04: International C5 05: Executive 06: Letter-R 86: Letter-E 07: Legal 08: A4R 88: A4E 09: B5R 89: B5E 0A: A3

0B: B4 0C: Ledger 0D: A5R 0E: A6 0F: B6 10: Commercial #9 11: Commercial #6 12: ISO B5 13: Custom size 1E: C4 1F: Hagaki 20: Oufuku Hagaki 21: Oficio II

6-8

22: Special 1 23: Special 2 24: A3 Wide 25: Ledger Wide 26: Full bleed paper (12 x 27: 8K 28: 16K-R A8: 16K-E 32: Statement-R B2: Statement-E 33: Folio 34: Youkei type 2 35: Youkei type 4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 No. (8) cont.

(9)

(10)

Items

Contents

Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal) Log 0A: Color 01: Plain 0B: Prepunched 02: Transparency 0C: Envelope 03: Preprinted 0D: Cardstock 04: Labels 0E: Coated 05: Bond 0F: 2nd side 06: Recycled 10: Media 16 07: Vellum 11: High quality 08: Rough 09: Letterhead Service Call Log

Maintenance Log

#

Count.

15: Custom 1 16: Custom 2 17: Custom 3 18: Custom 4 19: Custom 5 1A: Custom 6 1B: Custom 7 1C: Custom 8

Service Code

The total page count at the Remembers 1 to 8 th of occurrence of self diagnos- time of the self diagnostic error. tics error. If the occurrence of the previous self-diagnostic error is 8 or less, all of the diagnostics errors are logged.

Self diagnostic error code (See page 7-113)

#

Count.

item

Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of unknown toner detection. If the occurrence of the previous unknown toner detection is less than 8, all of the unknown toner detection are logged.

Total page count at the time of the replacement of the maintenance item.

Maintenance item code (1byte value to indicate 2 items)

The toner replacement log is triggered by toner empty. This record may contain such a reference as the toner container is inserted twice or a used toner container is inserted.

Example: 01.6000 Self diagnostic error6000: Self diagnostic error code number

First byte (Replacing item) 01: Toner container Second 1 byte (replacement item type) 00: Black First byte (Replacing item) 02: Maintenance kit Second 1 byte (replacement item type) 01: MK-1150 MK-1151 MK-1152 MK-1154

6-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-2 No.

Items

(11)

Toner Log

(12)

Counter Log Consist of three log counters of paper jams, self diagnostics errors, and maintenance replacement items.

Contents #

Count.

item

Remembers 1 to 32 of occurrence of unknown toner detection. If the occurrence of the previous unknown toner detection is less than 32, all of the unknown toner detection are logged.

The total page count at the time of the request of toner container replacement.

Unknown toner log code (1 byte, 2 categories)

(f) Paper jam

(g) Self diagnostic error

(h) Replacement for maintenance Items

Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location. Refer to Paper Jam Log.

Indicates the log counter of self diagnostics errors depending on cause.

Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance replacing item.

Example: C6000: 004 Self diagnostic error 6000 has happened four times.

T: Toner container 00: Black

All instances including those not having occurred are displayed.

First byte (Replacing item) 01: Toner container (Fixed to 01) Second byte (Type of replacing item) 00: Black

M: Maintenance kit 01: MK-1150 MK-1151 MK-1152 MK-1154 Example: T00: 1 The toner container (Black) has been replaced once. The toner replacement log is triggered by toner empty. This record may contain such a reference as the toner container is inserted twice or a used toner container is inserted.

6-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Detail of service status page (1)

(6)

Service Status Page

[XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP ECOSYS M2640idw

(2) 2014/10/30 15:15 (4) (5)

(3)

(1) Firmware Version 2S5_2000.000.000 2014.10.30

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Controller Information Memory status Standard Size Option Slot (7) Total Size

(28) FRPO Status 1.0 GB 1.0 GB 2.0 GB

User Top Margin User Left Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time

(8) Local Time Zone (9) Date and Time (10) Time Server

+01:00 _Tokyo 10/30/2014 02:33 10.183.53.13

((11) Paper Feeder2 (12) SD Card (13) Card Authentication Kit (B) (14) UG-33 (15) USB Keyboard (16) USB Keyboard Type (17) Print Coverage Average(%)

Installed Not Installed Installed Installed Installed US-English

/Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion)

(18) Total K: 1.10

/ 1111111.11

e-MPS error contro

(19) Copy K: 1.10

/ 1111111.11 RP Code

(29) 1234 5678 9012 (30) 5678 9012 3456 (31) 9012 3456 7890 (32) 3456 7890 1234

(20) Printer K: 1.10

/ 1111111.11

(21) FAX K: 1.10

(22) Period (23) Last Page K(%)

/ 1111111.11 (27/10/2010 — 03/11/2010 08:40) 1.00

FAX Information

(24) Rings (Normal) (25) Rings (FAX/TEL) (26) Rings (TAD) (27) Option DIMM Size

3 3 3 —

1

Figure 6-3

6-11

A1+A2/100 A3+A4/100

Y6

0.0 0.0

0

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Detail of service status page (2)

Service Status Page

[ZE76100020]

MFP ECOSYS M2640idw Firmware Version 2S5_2000.001.123 2016.02.18

2016/03/09 19:45 [2S5_1000.001.083] [2S5_1100.001.002] [2S5_4000.002.123]

Controller Information (33) (34)

(35) (36)

(43) (44) (45) (46)

(65) (66) (67) (68) (69) (70) (71) (72) (73) (74) (75) (76) (77) (78) (79)

(80) (81) (84)

(85)

Print Settings MP Tray Priority Altitude Adjustment Status Send Information Date and Time Address

Engine Information (37) NVRAM Version (38) FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version FAX APL Version FAX IPL Version (39) MAC Address

MP Tray Priority Normal 14/03/05 15:30 [email protected]

_CR05A19_CR05A19 2NM_1200.001.089 2NM_5000.001.006 2NM_5100.004.001 2NM_5200.001.006 00:17:C8:3B:41:7E

1/4 (40) (41) 644/600 (42) -10/0/0/0/ 0/0/-49/0 0/50/0/50/ 0000064/0000000/0000064/0000000/0000064/0000000/ 0000063/0000063/0000063/0000063/ F00/U00/0/1/0/0/1/25/27/30/0/0/25/25//5/1/0/ (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) 1010/9000/2010/4000/3010/1010/4000/2010/1010/1010/5000/6000/3010/ 5010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/ 6A00/F000/9901/4302/E102/9903/E803/E803/7100/F200/8601/3D02/D902/9503/E803/E803/ 7500/F500/8701/3A02/EA02/9103/E803/E803/7400/0001/A901/4E02/F602/7C03/C403/CE03/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/ 0300A000/00000000/544B2D353234314B5300000000000000/36313246303335580000000000000000/0078/00/00 0300A000/00000000/544B2D35323431435300000000000000/36313246303136570000000000000000/0078/00/00 0300A000/00000000/544B2D353234314B5300000000000000/363132453236325A0000000000000000/0078/00/00 0300A000/00000000/544B2D35323431595300000000000000/36313245323931420000000000000000/0078/00/00 / [2R7_81BR.001.008] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] (82) (83) 0284F60000/0258000000/00CF060005/000000FF00/5A00410022/0000003F00/00003F0000/003F000000/3F00001861/0000186100/ 0018610000/1861000000/3F0000003F/0000000029/0028002300/2200900090/0028000002/0000EE02EE/02EE025203/0000002500/ 0000250000/0025000000/310000002C/0000002C00/00002C0000/003F3C6E78/8CAA000186/A00000003D/00000101B0/0438048403/ 8403840375/030302EF01/CC01EA0160/676D700105/0EFF39FEC7/004D00BCFE/DC01DE0159/FEA103EDFF/02FF1BFF0A/005800E5FF/ 320082FE60/FE1BFF1500/2800D8FF54/FFA5FF5700/2100310000/000040 4/ 1/0/5.0/12.0/ (86) (87) (88) (89) 0/5/ (90) (91) 0/0/15:47/0/ (92) (93) (94) (95)

2

Figure 6-4

6-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

No.

Items

Contents

(1)

Firmware Version

—

(2)

System date

—

(3)

Engine firmware version

—

(4)

Engine boot version

—

(5)

Operation panel firmware version

—

(6)

Machine serial number

—

(7)

Total memory size

—

(8)

Local time zone

—

(9)

Report output date

Day/Month/Year hour : minute

(10)

NTP server name

—

(11)

Availability of the paper feeder 2

Installed/Not Installed

(12)

Availability of the SD memory card

Installed/Not Installed

(13)

Availability of the ID Card Authentication Kit

Introduced/ before introduction/trial

(14)

Availability of UG-33

Introduced/ before introduction/trial

(15)

USB keyboard connection status

Connected/Not connected

(16)

Type of the USB keyboard

US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German France

(17)

Page count converted to the A4/Letter size

Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of toner consumption and will not match the actual toner consumption.

(18)

Entire average coverage

Black

(19)

Average coverage for copy

Black

(20)

Average printer coverage

Black

(21)

Average coverage for FAX

Black

(22)

Cleared date and output date

—

(23)

Coverage on the last output page

—

(24)

Number of rings

0 to 15

(25)

Number of rings before automatic switching

0 to 15

(26)

Number of rings before connecting to the answering machine

0 to 15

(27)

Optional DIMM size

—

(28)

FRPO setting

—

(29)

RP code

Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the previous update.

(30)

RP code

Code the main software version and the date of the latest update.

(31)

RP code

Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the previous update.

6-13

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA No.

Items

Contents

(32)

RP code

Code the main software version and the date of the previous update.

(33)

MP tray priority setting

Off/Auto/Always

(34)

High altitude adjustment set data

Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m

(35)

The last sent date and time

—

(36)

Transmission address

—

(37)

NVRAM version

_ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f) (a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the database _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (b) Database version (c) The oldest time stamp of database version (d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (e) ME firmware version (f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are identical with (c) and (f).

(38)

FAX firmware version

—

(39)

Mac address

—

(40)

Destination information

—

(41)

Area information

—

(42)

Margin setting

Top margin/Left margin

(43)

Top offset setting by paper source

MP tray top offest / Paper feeder 2 top offset / Duplex top offset / Top offset for rotated output

(44)

Left offset setting by paper source

MP tray left offset / Paper feeder 2 left offset / Duplex left offset / Left offset for rotated output

(45)

L parameters

Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left margin integer part /Left margin decimal part

(46)

Life counter (cassette 1)

Machine life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Paper feeder 2/Duplex

Life counter (cassette 2)

Drum unit K/Transfer unit/Developer Unit K Fuser unit

(47)

Panel lock information

F00: OFF F01: Partial lock1 F02: Partial lock2 F03: Partial lock3 F04: Full lock

(48)

USB information

U00: Not Connected U01: Full speed U02: Hi speed

6-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA No.

Items

Contents

(49)

Paper handling information

0: Paper source select 1: Paper source fixed

(50)

Auto cassette change

0: OFF 1: ON (Default)

(51)

Color printing double count mode

0: All single counts 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts

(52)

Black and white printing double count mode

0: All single counts 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts

(53)

Billing counts timing

0: When secondary paper feed starts 1: When the paper is ejected

(54)

Temperature (machine inside)

—

(55)

Temperature (machine outside)

—

(56)

Relative humidity (machine outside)

—

(57)

Absolute humidity (machine outside)

—

(58)

LSU humidity information

—

(59)

LSU 2 humidity information

—

(60)

DRT information

—

(61)

Asset Number

—

(62)

Job end judgment time-out time

—

(63)

Job end detection mode

0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs 1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in job

(64)

Prescribe environment reset

0: Off 1: On

(65)

Media type attributes 1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20)

Weight settings Fuser settings 0: Light 0: High 1: Normal 1 1: Middle 2: Normal 2 2: Low 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum 4: Heavy 1 5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings 6: Heavy 3 0: Disable 7: Extra Heavy 1: Enable

*: For details on settings, refer to MDAT command in «Prescribe Commands Reference Manual».

(66)

IO Calibration information

—

(67)

Bias Calibration information

—

(68)

Calibration information

—

(69)

Sensor initial information

—

(70)

Calibration information

—

(71)

Calibration information

—

(72)

Calibration information

—

(73)

Calibration information

—

(74)

Paper loop correction shift amount

—

(75)

Paper loop correction interval

—

6-15

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA No.

Items

Contents

(76)

Paper loop correction patch amount

—

(77)

Calibration information

—

(78)

Calibration information

—

(79)

RFID information (K,C,M,Y)

—

(80)

RFID reader/writer version

—

(81)

Optional paper feeder firmware version

—

(82)

Color table version

—

(83)

Color table 2 version

—

(84)

Maintenance information

—

(85)

MC correction

1 to 7

(86)

Automatic judgment of the color conversion process

0: Off 1: On

(87)

Configuring the toner coverage counters

0: Full-color count display 1: Color coverage count display

(88)

Low coverage setting

0.1 to 100.0

(89)

Middle coverage setting

0.1 to 100.0

(90)

Toner low setting

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

(91)

Toner low detection level

0 to 100 (%)

(92)

Full-page print mode

0: Normal mode (Factory setting) 1: Full-page mode

(93)

Wake-up mode

0: Off (Don’t wake up) 1: On (Do wake up)

(94)

Wake-up timer

Displays the wake-up time

(95)

BAM conformity mode setting

0: Non-conformity mode 1: Conformity Mode

6-16

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U001

Exiting the maintenance mode (Message: Exit Mainte) Contents Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode. Purpose Exit the maintenance mode. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.The normal copy mode is entered.

U002

Set Factory Default (Message: Set Factory Def) Contents Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default. Purpose Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Mode1(All)]. 3.Press the [Start] key. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Mode1(All)

Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.

*1: LCD model only 4.Turn the power switch off. * :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error. When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U002. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Error codes Codes

Contents

0001

Controller (Entity error)

0002

Controller (Counter error)

0003

Controller (OS error)

0020

Engine error

6-17

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U004

Machine number (Message: Machine No.) Contents Sets or displays the machine serial number. Purpose Checks the machine serial number After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the «C0180 machine number mismatch» occurs. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB, Items Machine No.

Contents Displays the machine serial number.

When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB, Items

Contents

Machine No.(Main)

Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.

Machine No.(Eng)

Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.

Setting Execute if the serial numbers do not match. 1.Select [Execute]. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :The serial number writing starts. 3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-18

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U010

Setting the maintenance mode ID (Message: Set Mainte ID) Contents Change the maintenance mode ID for service. Purpose Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

Change

Change the maintenance mode ID for service.

Initialize

Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.

Setting: Change 1.Select [New ID]. Items

Contents

New ID

Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID

New ID(Reconfirm)

Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)

Execute

Change the maintenance mode ID for service.

2.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID. * :Either [*] or [#] must be included. 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. 4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)]. 5.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID. 6.Select [Execute]. 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Method: Initialize 1.Select [Execute]. Items Execute

Contents Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.

2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Error codes Codes

Contents

0001

Do not include «#» or «*» in the ID.

0002

ID does not match.

0003

8-digit ID is not input

6-19

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U019

Firmware Version (Message: Firm Version) Contents Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB. Purpose Check the firmware version installed in each PWB Method 1.Press the [Start] key. * :The firmware version is displayed. 2.Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key. Items

Contents

Main

Main firmware

MMI

Operation firmware

Browser *1

Panel Boot

Engine

Engine firmware

Engine Boot

Engine boot

Dictionary *1

Dictionary firmware

Option Language 1

Optional language firmware 1

Option Language 2

Optional language firmware 2

Option Language 3

Optional language firmware 3

Option Language 4

Optional language firmware 4

Option Language 5

Optional language firmware 5

Cass2

Cass2 firmware

Cass3

Cass3 firmware

HyPAS EMB API *1

HyPAS EMB API firmware

Application Name1-16 Color table 1-16 *1 * :*1: TSI model only Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-20

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U021

Initializes Memory (Message: Init Memory) Contents Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area specification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination). Purpose Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Initialize data according to the destination information.

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key. * :All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting. 4.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. * :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error. When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U021. Error codes Items

Contents

0001

Controller (Entity error)

0002

Controller (Counter error)

0020

Engine error

0040

Scanner error

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-21

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U025

Firmware update (S) (Message: Firm Update(S)) Contents Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while «Very High» is selected in the Security Level settings under the System Menu. Supplement Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is inserted Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Updates the firmware

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key. * :This is not executable when a USB memory is not installed. 4.After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-22

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U034

Paper timing adjustment (Message: Adj Paper Timing) Contents Adjust the leading edge registration or center line. Purpose Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to adjust. * :The screen for adjusting is displayed. Items

Contents

LSU Out Top

Leading edge registration.

LSU Out Left

Adjusts the center line

Adjustment: LSU Out Top 1.Select the item to adjust. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Top

Adjust the reference value of the leadingedge timing.

0 to 1180

600

0.1mm

MPT

Adjust the leading-edge timing for the MP tray

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

Cass

Adjust the leading-edge timing for cassette feed

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

Dup

Adjust the leading-edge timing when copying in duplex.

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

5.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value. For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is decreased.

A

A

A

Center line (within ± 1.0 mm)

Output example 1

Correct image

Figure 6-5

6-23

Output example 2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA 6.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034 > U066(6-26) > U071(6-30) Adjustment: LSU Out Left 1.Select the item to adjust. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Left

Adjust the reference value of the center line

0 to 1180

600

0.1mm

MPT

Adjust the center line for the MP tray

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

Cass1

Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

Cass2

Adjust the center line for cassette 2 (Optional unit) feed

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

Dup

Adjusting the center line when duplex copying (Back page)

-70 to 70

0

0.1mm

5.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. For the test pattern 1, increase the value. For the test pattern 2, decrease the value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is decreased. Center line (within ± 2.0 mm)

A

Correct image

A

Output example 1

A

Output example 2

Figure 6-6 6.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034 < U067(6-27) < U072(6-32) Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-24

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U065

Adjusting the magnification for table scanning (Message: Adj Scn) Contents Adjust the magnification in the sub scanning direction of the table scanning. Purpose Adjusts the magnification in the sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the above incorrect. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select [Sub Scan]. Items

Sub Scan

Contents

Setting range

Adjusts scanner magnification in the subscanning direction

-25 to 25

Initial setting 0

Data variation 0.1%

6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-7 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-25

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U066

Adjusting the table scanning timing (Message: Table Timing) Contents Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning. Purpose Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items Front

Contents

Setting range

Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. -45 to 45

Initial setting 0

Data variation 0.085 mm

6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is decreased. Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-8 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U065(6-25) > U066 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-26

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U067

Adjusting the table scanning center line (Message: Table Center) Contents Adjusts the center line for the table scanning. Purpose Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. Items Front

Contents Adjusts the scanner center line

Setting range -40 to 40

Initial setting 0

Data variation 0.085 mm

1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is decreased. Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-9 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U065(6-25) > U067 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-27

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U068

DP scanning position adjustment (Message: DP Scn Start Pos) Contents Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP. Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment. Purpose Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used * :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to adjust. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

DP Read

Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals.

-33 to 33

0

0.085 mm

Black Line

Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy originals.

0 to 3

0

—

Adjustment: DP Read 1.Select [DP Read]. 2.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is decreased. 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Adjustment: Black Line 1.Select [Black Line]. 2.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. 4.Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu] key. 5.Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy. 6.Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-28

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U070

DP magnification adjustment (Message: Adj DP Motor) Contents Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning. Purpose Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. * :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items

Sub Scan (F)

Contents

Setting range

Adjusts the 1st side magnification in the subscanning direction when scanning in simplex

-25 to 25

Initial setting 0

Data variation 0.1%

6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-10 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-29

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U071

Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing (Message: DP Timing) Contents Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. * :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Front Head

Leading edge registration. (Front page)

-32 to 32

0

0.195 (mm)

Front Tail

Trailing edge registration. (Front page)

-32 to 32

0

0.195 (mm)

Back Head *1

Leading edge registration. (Back page)

-32 to 32

0

0.195 (mm)

Back Tail *1

Trailing edge registration. (Back page)

-32 to 32

0

0.195 (mm)

*1: 40 ppm model only

6-30

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is decreased.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-11 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary. Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U071 Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2

Figure 6-12 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-31

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U072

Adjusting the DP original center (Message: DP Center) Contents Adjusts the DP original center line. Purpose Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. * :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Front

DP center line. (Front page)

-40 to 40

0

0.085 mm

Back *1

DP center line. (Back page)

-40 to 40

0

0.085 mm

*1: 40ppm model only 6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. In the case of the copy example 1, lower the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, raise the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is decreased.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-13 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary. Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U065(6-25) > U067(6-27) > U072 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-32

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U110

Drum counter (Message: Drum Cnt) Contents Displays the drum counter values. Purpose Execute to check the drum usage status. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. * :The drum counter is displayed. Items

Contents

K

Display the drum counter value.

Clear

Clear the drum counter values.

Method 1.Press the [Clear] key. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :The drum counter value is cleared. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U120

Drum counter (Message: Drum Cnt) Contents Displays the drum driveing distance counter values. Purpose Execute to check the drum usage status. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. * :The drum counter is displayed. Items

Contents

K

Display the drum driveing distance counter value.

Clear

Clear the drum driveing distance counter values.

Method 1.Press the [Clear] key. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :The drum driveing distance counter value is cleared. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-33

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U130

Developer initial setting (Message: Set Toner Install) Contents Set the toner install mode on or off. Purpose Execute the toner installation when setting up the machine. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Mode]. Items Mode

Contents Set the toner install mode

* :If setting On (1), the toner installation is executed when turning the power on next time. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U158

Developer counter (Message: Dev Cnt) Contents Displays the developer counter Purpose Execute to check the developer unit usage status. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. * :The developer count is displayed. Items

Contents

K

Displaying the developer counter value

Clear

Clear the developer counter values.

Method 1.Press the [Clear] key. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :The developer counter value is cleared. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-34

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U201

Initializing the touch panel (Message: Init Touch Panel)

*: TSI model only

Contents Adjusts touch panel detecting positions. Purpose Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to execute. 3.Press the [Start] key. * :The screen for executing is displayed. Items

Contents

Initialize

Automatically corrects the touch panel display position

Check

Checks the touch panel display position

Method: Initialize 1.Press the center of «+».

+

2.Press the center of «+».

+

6-35

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

3.Press the center of «+». 4.The touch panel is automatically corrected after setting. 5.After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is automatically displayed.

Method: Check 1.Press the indicated three «+», and then check the display position. 2.Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the displayed coordinate is 6 or less.

+

+ Initialize

* :If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key to return to Step.1.

+ +

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-36

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-2

U222

Setting the IC card type (Message: Set IC Card Type)

*: Only when the ID card is installed

Contents Sets the ID card type Purpose Change the type of ID card Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Other

Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.

SSFC

Select when the ID card type is SSFC.

* :Initial setting: Other * :SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U250

Changing the preset maintenance counter value (Message: Mnt Cnt Pre-set) Contents Display/set the maintenance counter preset value which decides the time to display the message which promotes to replace the maintenance kit. Purpose Used to check or change the maintenance counter preset Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [M.Cnt A]. Items

Contents

M.Cnt A

Display the preset value of maintenance counter (A).

Clear

Clear the preset value of maintenance counter (A).

3.Press the [Start] key and display the preset value. Method 1.Press the [Clear] key. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :Clear the preset value of maintenance counter (A). Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-37

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U251

Clearing/checking the maintenance counter (Message: Clr Mnt Cnt) Contents Display, set or clear the maintenance counter. Purpose Used to check, change and reset the maintenance counter Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [M.Cnt A]. Items

Contents

M.Cnt A

Display the maintenance counter (A) value.

Clear

Clear all the maintenance counter (A) values.

3.Press the [Start] key to display the counter value. Method 1.Press the [Clear] key. 2.Press the [Start] key. * :The maintenance counter (A) value is cleared. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-38

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U252

Destination (Message: Set Dest) Contents Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination. Purpose Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

(No Action) *3

Malfunction preventing item

Europe Metric *2

Europe Metric

Inch *2

Inch

Asia Pacific *2

Asia Pacific

Japan Metric *1

Japan metric

Australia *2

Australia

China *2

China

Korea *2

Korea

*1: 100V model only, *2: Except 100V model, *3: LCD model only * :Initial setting: Destination 3.Press the [Start] key. * :Initializes according to the destination. 4.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. * :An error code is displayed when an error occurs. When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U252. Error codes Items

Contents

0001

Controller (Entity Error)

0002

Controller error

0020

Engine error

0040

Scanner error

6-39

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

U253

Switching the double/single counts (Message: Set D/S Count) Contents Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode. (Single/Double Count) Purpose Select, according to user’s request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count) Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [B/W]. Items

Contents

Color

Switch the counter for full color mode

B/W

Switch the counter for B/W mode

3.Select [SGL(All)] or [DBL(Folio)]. Items

Contents

SGL(All)

Sets single count for all the paper sizes

DBL(Folio)

Set double count for Folio size or larger

* :Initial setting: DBL(Folio) 4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-40

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U260

Select Copy Count (Message: Set Count Mode) Contents Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject. Purpose Change the count timing according to the user’s request Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Selects the copy count timing. Items

Contents

Feed

When secondary paper feed starts.

Eject

Selects the paper eject timing

* :Initial setting: Eject 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U285

Set Service Status Page (Message: Set Svc Sts Page) Contents Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print. Purpose Change the setting according to the user’s request Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Displays the digital dot coverage.

Off

Not to display the digital dot coverage.

* :Initial setting: On 3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. Completion 4.Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-41

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U287

Set Auto Reset Function (Message: Set Reset Func) Contents Enables/disables the auto recovery function after service call error or system error. Purpose Sets to enable/disable the auto recovery function after service call error or system error. Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

C0XXX

ENABLE/DISABLE THE AUTO RECOVERY AFTER ERROR

C1XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C1xxx error

C2XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C2xxx error

C3XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C3xxx error

C4XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C4xxx error

C5XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C5xxx error

C6XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C6xxx error

C7XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C7xxx error

C8XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C8xxx error

C9XXX

Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C9xxx error

CFXXX

Enable/disable the auto recovery after CF error

3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. Completion 4.Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-42

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U290

Setting the drive to save the HyPAS application (Message: Set Drive App)

*: Tsi 40 ppm model only *: Only when the SD card or SSD is installed

Contents Sets the drive to save the HyPAS application * :Indicated when the HyPAS application is not installed in the SD card and SSD. Purpose Sets to save to the SD card or optional SSD. Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

SD Card

Set in the SD card

SSD

Set in the SSD * :Initial setting: SD card (0)

3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. 4.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-43

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U332

Adjusting the black coverage coefficient (Message: Adj Calc Rate) Contents Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page. Setting the display of the coverage counter and the coverage threshold for color copy and color print. Purpose Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. 3.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Rate

Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.

0.1 to 3.0

1.0

Mode

Switching the full-color count display and color coverage counter display

0: Full color 1: Color coverage

1.0

Level1

Low coverage threshold value

0.1 to 99.8

10 Display: 1.0

Level2

Middle coverage threshold value

0.1 to 99.8

2.5 Display: 2.5

4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-44

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U345

Set Service Status Page (Message: Set Mnt Time Disp) Contents Setting the counter to display close to time for maintenance Displays the maintenance count has reached at the count deducting this setting value from the maintenance cycle count. Purpose If the maintenance counter value becomes the preset value or more, the message «Time for maintenance is soon» is displayed and promotes replacing the maintenance kit. Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Cnt]. 3.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Items

Contents

Cnt

Setting the counter to display close to time for maintenance

Clear

Clearing the counter

4.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. Method 1.Select [Clear]. 2.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value. Completion 3.Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-45

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U346

Selecting Sleep Mode (Message: Slct Sleep Mode) Contents Changes the sleep mode settings. Purpose Changes the sleep mode settings. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

Timer/Sleep Level

BAM conformity country setting

Auto sleep

Switches AutoSleep function setting

Setting: Timer/Sleep Level 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

More Energy Save

BAM conformity setting On Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)

Less Energy Save

BAM conformity setting Off Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)

* :Initial setting: More Energy Save 2.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. 3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Setting: Auto sleep 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.

Off

The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu. * :Initial setting: On

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-46

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U402

Adjusting the printing margins (Message: Print Margin) Contents Adjusts the scan image margins. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect * :If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser. * :If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page. Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Lead

Adjusts the printer leading edge margin

0.0 to 10.0

4.0

0.1 mm

A Margin

Printer left margin

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.1 mm

C Margin

Printer right margin

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.1 mm

Trail

Printer trailing edge margin

0.0 to 10.0

3.9

0.1 mm

6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. * :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased. Leading edge margin (4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

A Left margin (Within 4.0mm)

Right margin (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin (Within 4.0mm)

Figure 6-14 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U402 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-47

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U403

Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass (Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table)) Contents Adjusts the margins for the table scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

A Margin

Adjusts the scanner left margin

0.0 to 10.0

2.0

0.5mm

B Margin

Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0

2.0

0.5mm

C Margin

Adjusts the scanner right margin

0.0 to 10.0

2.0

0.5mm

D Margin

Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin

0.0 to 10.0

2.0

0.5mm

6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. * :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased. Leading edge margin (4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

A Left margin (Within 4.0mm)

Right margin (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin (Within 4.0mm)

Figure 6-15 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U402(6-47) > U403 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-48

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U404

Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor (Message: Scan Margin DP) Contents Adjusts the margins for DP scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select the item to adjust. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

A Margin

Adjusts the DP left margin

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.5mm

B Margin

Adjusts the DP leading edge margin

0.0 to 10.0

2.5

0.5mm

C Margin

Sets the DP right margin

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.5mm

D Margin

Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin

0.0 to 10.0

4.0

0.5mm

A Margin(B) *1

Adjusts the DP left margin (2nd side)

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.5mm

B Margin(B) *1

Adjusts the DP leading edge margin (2nd side)

0.0 to 10.0

2.5

0.5mm

C Margin(B) *1

Adjusts the DP right margin (2nd side)

0.0 to 10.0

3.0

0.5mm

D Margin(B) *1

Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin (2nd side)

0.0 to 10.0

4.0

0.5mm

*1: 40ppm model only 6.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. * :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased. Leading edge margin (4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

A Left margin (Within 4.0mm)

Right margin (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin (Within 4.0mm)

Figure 6-16 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-49

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Precautions Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode. U034(6-23) > U402(6-47) > U403(6-48) > U404 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-50

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U407

Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal) (Message: WR DR Timing) Contents Adjusts the writing timing when duplex printing. Purpose Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner reading image (image on the memory) Precautions Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes. U034(6-23) > U402(6-47) > U66(6-26)> U403(6-48) > U71(6-30) > U404(6-49) > U407 Adjustment 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Press the [System Menu] key. 3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy. 4.Press the [System Menu] key. 5.Select [Adj Data]. Items

Adj Data

Contents

Setting range

Adjusts the leading edge timing when writing the image in the memory

-47 to 47

Initial setting 0

Data variation 1dot

6.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. In the case of the copy example 1, raise the setting value. In the case of the copy example 2, lower the setting value. * :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is decreased. Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 6-17 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-51

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Error codes Codes

S001

Occurrence position

Continuing the adjustment

Original reference patch is not detected

Available

S002

Original deviation is in excess in the main scanning direction

Available

S003

Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scanning direction

Available

S004

Original skew is in excess

Available

S005

Original type error

Available

SFFF

Other scanner error

Unavailable

Engine status error

Unavailable

E002

Adjustment result error

Unavailable

EFFF

Other engine error

Unavailable

Pause status

Unavailable

C002

Adjustment result error

Unavailable

C110

Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (black)

Unavailable

C120

Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (cyan)

Unavailable

C140

Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (magenta)

Unavailable

C180

Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (yellow)

Unavailable

C210

Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black)

Unavailable

C220

Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (cyan)

Unavailable

C240

Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (magenta)

Unavailable

C280

Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (yellow)

Unavailable

CFFF

Other controller error

Unavailable

E001

C001

Scanner

Contents

Engine

Controller

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-52

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

U411

Scanner auto adjustment (Message: Auto Adj Scn) Contents Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix Purpose Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Items Table (Chart A)

Contents Automatically adjusts the table scanning.

Original for adjustment (P/N) 302NM94340

Scanning timing ( Leading edge timing / Center line / Sub-scanning direction ) Input gamma correction coefficient for color Color correction matrix coefficient Black line detection correction value LED light intensity adjustment Tentative white reference correction coefficiency DP FU(ChartA)

Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section. Input gamma correction coefficient for color Color correction matrix coefficient Input gamma correction coefficient for monochrome

DP FD(ChartA)

Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section. Input gamma correction coefficient for color Color correction matrix coefficient

DP FU(ChartB) DP FD(ChartB)

Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section. Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section.

302NM94330

Magnification in the sub-scanning direction Leading edge timing Center line Trailing edge timing Target

Set-up for obtaining the target value

6-53

302NM94340

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

65

80

*: Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.

Method: Table (Chart A) Automatic input of the target value * :Usually, it adjusts here. 1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table. 2.Enter maintenance item U411. 3.Select [Target]. 4.Select [Auto]. 5.Press the [Start] key. 6.Select [Table(ChartA)]. 7.When pressing the [Start] key, the bar code of the original chart is read and the automatic adjustment is started. 8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. *: When the error code «1e» or «1f» is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value. Manual input of the target value 1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425. 2.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table. 3.Enter maintenance item U411. 4.Select [Target]. 5.Select [U425]. 6.Press the [Start] key. 7.Select [Table(ChartA)]. 8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. 9.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it with ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color). Method: DP FU (Chart B) * :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning 1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-up on the DP. 2.Enter maintenance item U411. 3.Select [DP FU(ChartB)]. 4.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. 5.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. Method: DP FD (Chart B) * :Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning 1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-down on the DP. 2.Enter maintenance item U411. 3.Select [DP FD(ChartB)]. 4.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. 5.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

6-54

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3 Method: DP FU (Chart A) Automatic input of the target value 1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP. 2.Enter maintenance item U411. 3.Select [Target]. 4.Select [Auto]. 5.Press the [Start] key. 6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)]. 7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment. 8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. *: When the error code «1e» or «1f» is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value. Manual input of the target value 1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425. 2.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP. 3.Enter maintenance item U411. 4.Select [Target]. 5.Select [U425]. 6.Press the [Start] key. 7.Select [DP FU(ChartA)]. 8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. 9.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. Method: DP FD (Chart A) Automatic input of the target value 1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP. 2.Enter maintenance item U411. 3.Select [Target]. 4.Select [Auto]. 5.Press the [Start] key. 6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)]. 7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment. 8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. *: When the error code «1e» or «1f» is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value. Manual input of the target value 1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425. 2.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP. 3.Enter maintenance item U411. 4.Select [Target]. 5.Select [U425]. 6.Press the [Start] key. 7.Select [DP FD(ChartA)]. 8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment. 9.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

* :When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs during auto adjustment, error code «NGXX» is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.

6-55

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Error codes Codes

Contents

00

Automatic adjustment success

01

Black band detection error (Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub-scanning direction)

04

Black band is not detected (Table leading edge in the sub-scanning direction)

05

Black band is not detected (Table far end in the main scanning direction)

06

Black band is not detected (Table near end in the main scanning direction)

07

Black band is not detected (Table trailing edge in the sub-scanning direction)

08

Black band is not detected (DP far end in the main scanning direction)

09

Black band is not detected (DP near end in the main scanning direction)

0a

Black band is not detected (DP leading edge in the sub-scanning direction)

0b

Black band is not detected (Original check of DP leading edge in the sub-scanning direction)

0c

Black band is not detected (DP trailing edge in the sub-scanning direction)

0d

White band is not detected (DP trailing edge in the sub-scanning direction)

0e

DMA time out

0f

Magnification error in the sub-scanning direction

10

Leading edge error in the sub-scanning direction

11

Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning direction

12

DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction

13

Maintenance request error

14

Center line error in the main scanning direction

15

DP skew error in the main scanning direction

16

Magnification error in the main scanning direction

Corrective action 1. Set the original correctly and execute the adjustment again. 2. Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.

1. Check the attachment position of DP. 2. Check lighting of the lamp or replace it. 3. Check the back and front of the adjustment original.

Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again.

6-56

1. Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again. 2. Adjust manually. (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)

Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again. 1. Turn the power off and on, and execute again. 2. Adjust manually. (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Codes

Contents

Corrective action

17

Service call error

Turn the power off and on, and execute again.

18

DP paper jam error

Set the original correctly and execute it again.

19

PWB replacement error

—

1a

Original error

1b

Input gamma adjustment original error

1c

Matrix adjustment original error

1d

Original for the white reference correction coefficient error

1e

Lab value detection error

Check the following and execute it again. Is the bar code dirty? Is the original position correct? Is the bar code position correct?

1f

Lab value comparison error

Check the following and execute it again. Is the acquired bar code the same? Is the original position correct? Is the bar code position correct?

20

Input gamma correction coefficient error

21

Color correction matrix coefficient error

Set the original correctly and execute it again.

30

Chromatic aberration adjustment original error

50

White reference correction ratio error

Set the original correctly and execute it again.

63

Completed to obtain the test RAW

—

1. Clean the contact glass and slit glass. 2. Exchange the adjustment original. Set the original correctly and execute it again.

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-57

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

U425

Set Target (Message: Set Target Adjustment Value) Contents Enter the lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340). Purpose Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

ChartA

Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning

ChartB

Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning

Method: ChartA 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

White

Setting the white patch for the adjustment original

Black

Setting the black patch for the adjustment original

Gray1

Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original

Gray2

Setting the Gray2 patch for the adjustment original

Gray3

Setting the Gray3 patch for the adjustment original

C

Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original

M

Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original

Y

Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original

R

Setting the red patch for the adjustment original

G

Setting the green patch for the adjustment original

B

Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original

Adjust Original

Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions

Setting: White 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

93.6

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

0.9

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-0.4

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-58

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Black 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

10.6

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-0.2

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-0.7

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: Gray1 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

76.2

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-0.2

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

1.2

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: Gray2 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

25.2

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-0.2

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-0.2

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: Gray3 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

51.3

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-0.3

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

0.3

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-59

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: C 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

72.6

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-32.8

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-11.5

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: M 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

48.1

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

69.9

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-6.1

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: Y 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

86.2

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-18.6

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

81.7

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: R 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

46.7

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

54.2

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

38.6

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-60

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: G 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

67.8

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

-51.3

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

48.9

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: B 1.Select the item to set. 2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

L

L parameter setting

0.0 to 100

38.8

—

a

A value setting

-200 to 200

25.3

—

b

B value setting

-200 to 200

-22.8

—

3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Adjust Original * :This setting is usually unnecessary. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Lead

Set the adjustment value of the leading edge.

4.0 to 6.0

5.0

0.1mm

Main Scan

Sets the adjustment value of the left edge.

9.0 to 11.0

10.0

0.1mm

Sub Scan

Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge.

265.0 to 267.0

266.0

0.1mm

1.Measure the distances «A», «B» and «C» from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of the adjustment original. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance «A», «B» and «C» between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B: 105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge) ?Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3) 2.Enter the value solved in «Lead» using the [◄] [►] keys keys. 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. 4.Measure the distance «F» from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original. Measurement procedure Measure the distance «F» from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black belt 2. 5.Enter the values measured in «Main Scan» using the [◄] [►] keys. 6.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-61

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3 7.Measure the distance «D» and «E» from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at two positions. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance «D» and «E» between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E: Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.) 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2) 8.Enter the value solved in «Sub Scan» using the [◄] [►] keys keys. 9.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. 30mm 21mm

A

105mm

180mm

B

C

Black belt 1 Leading edge

F

D

E

Left edge

Black belt 2

[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3 [Dist2] = F [Dist3] = D/2+E/2 Original for adjustment (P/N: 302NM94340)

Figure 6-18

6-62

Black belt 3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3 Setting: DP(ChartB) * :This setting is usually unnecessary. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

Lead

Set the adjustment value of the leading edge.

14.0 to 16.0

15.0

0.1mm

Main Scan

Sets the adjustment value of the left edge.

14.0 to 16.0

15.0

0.1mm

Sub Scan

Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge.

265.0 to 269.0

267.0

0.1mm

1.Measure the distance «A» from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original. 2.Enter the values measured in «Lead» using the [◄] [►] keys. 3.Measure the distance «B» from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original. 4.Enter the values measured in «Main Scan» using the [◄] [►] keys. 5.Measure the distance «C» from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the adjustment original. 6.Enter the values measured in «Sub Scan» using the [◄] [►] keys. 7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. B A

C

Original for adjustment (P/N: 302NM94330)

Figure 6-19 Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-63

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U520

TDRS setting (Message: Set TDRS) Contents Checks/sets the TDRS Purpose Execute to check/set the TDRS Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Registration *1

Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog

Information *1

Transition to the Device Agent description dialog

On/Off Config

Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog

*1: displayed only when TDRS function is enabled. Setting: Registration 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

TDRS User

Registering process for user and password

Access Code

Registers Access Code

Setting: TDRS User 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Regist

Registers in the TDRS Manager

TDRS Server

Sets the TDRS server URL

TDRS User

Sets the TDRS Username

Proxy Server

Sets the TDRS proxy server URL

Proxy Port

Sets the TDRS proxy port number

Proxy User

Sets the TDRS proxy username

Text

Sets the TDRS description

6-64

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Access Code 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Regist

Registers in the TDRS Manager

TDRS Server

Sets the TDRS server URL

Access Code

Sets the TDRS access code

Proxy Server

Sets the TDRS proxy server URL

Proxy Port

Sets the TDRS proxy port number

Proxy User

Sets the TDRS proxy username

Text

Sets the TDRS description * :[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed. * :When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and displayed. After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information by pressing the [OK] or [Start] key. * :After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item that was performed. When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the item that has been operated. * :If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the «TDRS User» will be indicated. If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the «Access Code» will be indicated.

Error codes Items

Contents

Items

Contents

e0001

HDD is unavailable.

t0001

Fatal error

e0002

The USB memory is unavailable.

t0002

Error in processing the network

e0003

The file to import does not exist in the USB memory.

t0003

An illegal parameter error

e0004

Reading from the USB memory has failed.

t0004

Insufficient resource

e0005

Unmounting the USB memory has failed.

t0005

Communication error

e0006

Moving or renaming the file has failed.

t0006

Error in processing communication.

e0007

Opening the file has failed.

t0007

Login error

e0008

Closing the file has failed.

t0008

External error

e0009

Error in reading the file

t0009

Authentication error

e000A

Copying the file has failed.

t000A

HTTP error: Request error

e000B

Opening the directory has failed.

t000B

HTTP error: Error due to the server

e000C

Creating the working directory has failed.

t000C

HTTP error: Error due to the client.

e000D

Deleting the working file has failed.

6-65

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Information 1.Displays the set contents. Items

Contents

Agent ID

Agent ID

Agent Type

Agent Type

Model

Displays the model name.

Serial No

Display of the machine serial number

Offline

Display of the TDRS connection state

Setting: On/Off Config 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Enables TDRS

Off

Disables TDRS

* :Initial setting: Off 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. 3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-66

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U600

Initialize: All Data (Message: Initialize: All Data) Contents Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting. Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there. Purpose Initialize the FAX PWB Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. * :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed. Items Execute

Contents Executing data initialization

3.Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys. * :Refer to the following destination code list. Items

Contents

Country Code

Setting Destination code

OEM Code

Sets the OEM code

* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code]. 4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :Data initialization starts. Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization. 5.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization. The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed. * :When initialization is successful, «Completed» is displayed for one second. * :Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed. Kind of error Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown) Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown) Unknown Country (When both are unknown)

6-67

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-1 Destination code list Destination code

Destination

Destination code 253

Destination

000

Japan

007

Argentina

↑

Italy

009

Australia

↑

Germany

↑

Spain

CTR21 (European nations)

038

China

↑

U.K.

080

Hong Kong

↑

Netherlands

084

Indonesia

↑

Sweden

088

Israel

↑

France

097

Korea

↑

Austria

181

U.S.A.

↑

Switzerland

250

Russia

↑

Belgium

108

Malaysia

↑

Denmark

115

Mexico

↑

Finland

126

New Zealand

↑

Portugal

136

Peru

↑

Ireland

137

Philippines

↑

Norway

152

Middle East

254

156

Singapore

159

South Africa

169

Thailand

6-68

Taiwan

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U601

Initialize: Keep data (Message: Initialize: Keep Data) Contents Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting. Purpose Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. * :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed. Items Execute

Contents Executing data initialization

3.Select [Country Code]. 4.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. * :Refer to the destination code list. (See page 6-67) Items

Contents

Country Code

Setting Destination code

OEM Code

Sets the OEM code

* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code]. 5.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :Data initialization starts. Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization. 6.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization. The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed. * :When initialization is successful, «Completed» is displayed for one second.

6-69

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U603

User data 1 (Message: User Data 1) Contents Sets the line type for FAX use Purpose Execute as required Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Line Type]. Items Line Type

Contents Line Type

3.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

DTMF

DTMF

10PPS

10PPS

20PPS

20PPS

4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-70

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U604

User data 2 (Message: User Data 2) Contents Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use Purpose Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Rings(F/T)]. 3.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. Items Rings (F/T)

Contents Number of fax/telephone rings

Setting range

Initial setting

0 to 15

—

* :If the default is set to «0», the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing. 4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U605

Data clear (Message: Clear Data) Contents Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID. Purpose Clear the communication history Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Clear Com.Rec.

Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key. * :When initialization is successful, «Completed» is displayed for one second. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-71

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U610

System 1 (Message: System Setting 1) Contents Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Cut Line: A4

Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the auto reduction mode.

Cut Line: 100%

Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification.

Cut Line: Auto

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.

Setting: Cut Line: A4 Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R auto reduction mode.

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

0 to 22

0

—

* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image. 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Setting: Cut Line(100%) Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are recorded on the next page. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification.

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

0 to 22

3

—

* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image. 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-72

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Cut Line: Auto Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.

Setting range

Initial setting

Data variation

0 to 22

0

—

* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image. 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-73

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U611

System 2 (Message: System Setting 2) Contents Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. Purpose Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Adj lines

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.

Adj lines(A4)

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.

Adj lines(LT)

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

Setting: Adj lines Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.

0 to 22

Initial setting 7

Data variation —

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Adj lines(A4) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set. 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-74

0 to 22

Initial setting 22

Data variation —

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Setting: Adj lines(LT) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

0 to 22

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-75

Initial setting 26

Data variation —

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U612

System 3 (Message: System Setting 3) Contents Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

Auto reduct

Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction

Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.

Setting: Auto Reduct Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at 100% magnification. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the FAX paper.

Off

Auto reduction is not performed. * :Initial setting: On

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Off

The protocol list is not printed out automatically.

Err

Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.

On

Automatically printed out after communication. * :Initial setting: Off

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-76

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U620

FAX system (Message: FAX System) Contents Sets the signal detection method for remote switching. Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit. Purpose Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user’s telephone type, preference, etc. Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key. Items Remote Mode

Contents Setting the remote switching mode

3.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

One

Sets the one-shot type detection

Cont

Sets the continuous type detection

* :Initial setting: One 4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-77

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U625

Communication settings (Message: Set Communication) Contents Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing. Purpose FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Interval

Sets the auto redialing interval

Times

Sets the number of times of auto redialing

Setting: Interval 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the redialing interval

Initial setting

1 to 9 minutes 3 minutes

Data variation —

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Times 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the number of times of redialing

0 to 15 times

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-78

Initial setting 3 times

Data variation —

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U630

Communication control procedures 1 (Message: Communication Control 1) Contents Sets the FAX communication. Purpose Sets the following to correspond to field claims Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

TX Speed

Sets the communication starting speed.

RX Speed

Sets the reception speed.

TX Echo

Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.

RX Echo

Sets the reception speed.

Setting: TX Speed Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting. 1.Select the communication speed. Items

Contents

14400bps/V17

V.17 14400bps

9600bps/V29

V.29 9600bps

4800bps/V27ter

V.27ter 4800bps

2400bps/V27ter

V.27ter 2400bps

* :Initial setting: 14400bps/V17 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: RX Speed Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting. 1.Select the reception speed. Items

Contents

14400bps

V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter

9600bps

V.29, V.27ter

4800bps

V.27ter

2400bps

V.27ter (fallback only)

* :Initial setting: 14400bps 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-79

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: TX Echo Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at the transmitter side. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

500

Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.

300

Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.

* :Initial setting: 300 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: RX Echo Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at the receiver side. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

500

Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.

75

Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.

* :Initial setting: 75 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-80

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U631

Communication control procedures 2 (Message: Communication Control 2) Contents Sets the FAX communication. Purpose Sets the transmission and reception of ECM Sets the CED frequency Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

ECM TX

Sets ECM transmission.

ECM RX

Sets ECM reception.

CED Freq

The frequency of CED is set up.

Setting: ECM TX Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. * :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

ECM transmission is enabled.

Off

ECM transmission is disabled.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value. * :Completed is displayed. Setting: ECM RX Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. * :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

ECM reception is enabled.

Off

ECM reception is disabled.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-81

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: CED Freq Sets the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the international communication. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

2100

2100Hz

1100

1100Hz

* :Initial setting: 2100 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-82

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U632

Communication control procedures 3 (Message: Communication Control 3) Contents Sets the FAX communication. Purpose Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 1.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

DIS 4Byte

Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.

Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.

Setting: DIS 4Byte Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.

Off

Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

* :Initial setting: Off 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

1Time

Detects CNG once.

2Time

Detects CNG twice.

* :Initial setting: 1Time (100 V model)/2Time (Others) 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-83

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U633

Communication control procedures 4 (Message: Communication Control 4) Contents Sets the FAX communication. Purpose Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

V.34

Enables or disables the V.34 communication.

V.34-3429Hz

Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).

DIS 2Res

Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.

RTN Check

Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.

Setting: V.34 Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.

TX

V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.

RX

V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.

Off

V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: V.34-3429Hz Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

Off

V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-84

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: DIS 2Res Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective measures for transmission errors and other problems. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Once

Responds to the first signal.

Twice

Responds to the second signal.

* :Initial setting: Once 1.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: RTN Check Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

5%

Error line rate of 5%

10%

Error line rate of 10%

15%

Error line rate of 15%

20%

Error line rate of 20%

* :Initial setting: 15% 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-85

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U634

Communication control procedures 5 (Message: Communication Control 5) Contents Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur. Purpose * :Relax the communication conditions Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [TCF Check]. 3.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. Items TCF Check

Contents Sets the allowed error bytes when detecting the TCF signal

4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-86

Setting range 1 to 255

Initial setting 0

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U640

Communication time setting 1 (Message: Communication Time 1) Contents Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. Purpose Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user’s telephone type, preference, etc. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. 3.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Time(One)

Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.

0 to 255

7 1 (New Zealand)

Time (Cont)

Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.

0 to 255

80

4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-87

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U641

Communication time setting 2 (Message: Communication Time 2) Contents Sets the time-out time for the fax communication. Purpose Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

T0 TIME OUT

Sets the T0 time-out time.

T1 TIME OUT

Sets the T1 time-out time.

T2 TIME OUT

Sets the T2 time-out time.

Ta TIME OUT

Sets the Ta time-out time.

Tb1 TIME OUT

Sets the Tb1 time-out time.

Tb2 TIME OUT

Sets the Tb2 time-out time.

Tc TIME OUT

Sets the Tc time-out time.

Td TIME OUT

Sets the Td time-out time.

Setting: T0 Time Out Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent. Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the destination unit sets the auto switching function. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the T0 time-out time.

30 to 90 s

Initial setting 56 58 (100 V model)

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: T1 Time Out Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. *This setting is usually unnecessary. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the T1 time-out time.

30 to 90 s

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-88

Initial setting 36 38 (100 V model)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: T2 Time Out The T2 time-out time is specified as follows. From CFR signal output to image data reception From image data reception to the next signal reception In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the T2 time-out time.

1 to 255

Initial setting 69

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Ta Time Out Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-18). If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching. 1.Press the [◄] or [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the setting value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the Ta time-out time.

1 to 255 s

Initial setting 30

Ta

Start of fax reception

Rings

Tb1

Ring back tone send start

Line connection as a fax machine

Ring detection

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

Tb2

Figure 6-20 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time Setting: Tb1 Time Out Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode, (See figure 1-3-18). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the Tb1 time-out time.

1 to 255

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-89

Initial setting 20

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Tb2 Time Out Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the Tb2 time-out time.

1 to 255

Initial setting 80

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Tc Time Out In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a connected handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal phone after this. In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the Tc time-out time.

1 to 255 s

Initial setting 60

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Td Time Out Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check. In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone. 1.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Contents

Setting range

Sets the Td time-out time.

1 to 255

2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-90

Initial setting 6 30 (100 V model) 9 (120V model)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U650

Modem 1 (Message: Modem 1) Contents Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level. Purpose Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Reg G3 TX Eqr

Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.

Reg G3 RX Eqr

Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.

RX Mdm Level

Sets the modem detection level.

Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr 1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB]. * :Initial setting: 0dB 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr 1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB]. * :Initial setting: 0dB 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: RX Mdm Level 1.Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm]. * :Initial setting: -43dBm 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-91

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U651

Modem 2 (Message: Modem 2) Contents Sets the modem output level. Purpose Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit Setting 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. 3.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. Items

Contents

Setting range

Initial setting

Sgl LVL Modem

Sets the modem output level

-15 to 0

11 10 (100 V model) 12 (Australia)

DTMF LEV (Cent)

DTMF output level (center value)

-15.0 to 0.0

-8 -9 (100 V model) -7 (Australia) -6 (120V model)

0 to 5.5

2 1.5 (Australia) 1 (New Zealand)

DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level difference) 4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-92

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U660

Ring setting (Message: Set Calls) Contents Sets the NCU (network control unit). Purpose Execute as required Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to set. * :The screen for setting is displayed. Items

Contents

Exchange

Setting the PBX/PSTN connection

Dial Tone

Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.

Busy Tone

Sets the busy tone detection.

PBX Setting

Setting the PBX connection

DC Loop

Sets the loop current detection before dialing.

Setting: Exchange Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

PSTN

Connected to the public switched telephone network.

PBX

Connecting to the PBX

* :Initial setting: PSTN 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: Dial Tone Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public switched telephone network. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

The dial tone is detected.

Off

The dial tone is not detected.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed.

6-93

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Setting: Busy Tone Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may be improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Detects the busy tone.

Off

Does not detect the busy tone.

* :Initial setting: On/Off (Australia) 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: PBX Setting Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX. *According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Flash

Flashing mode

Loop

Code number mode

* :Initial setting: Loop 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: DC Loop Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing. 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

On

Detects the loop current before dialing.

Off

Detects the loop current before dialing.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-94

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U670

List output (Message: Output List) Contents Outputs the list of fax communication data. * :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed to halt printing. Purpose Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to execute. 3.Press the [Start] key. 4.Output selected list. Items

Contents

Sys Conf Report

Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential boxes, firmware versions and other information.

Action List

Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.

Self Sts Report

Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode (self-status report).

Protocol List

Outputs a list of communication procedures.

Error List

Output the error list.

Addr List(No.)

Outputs address book in the IDs order

Addr List(Idx)

Outputs address book in the order of names.

One-touch List

Outputs a list of one-touch.

Group List

Outputs the group list.

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-95

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U695

FAX function customization (Message: Customize FAX Function) Contents FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size. Purpose Execute as required Method 1.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

FAX Bulk TX

FAX batch transmission is set up.

A5 Pt Pri Chg

Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.

Setting: FAX Bulk TX 1.By using [◄] [►] keys, select [On] or [Off]. Items

Contents

On

FAX batch transmission is enabled.

Off

FAX batch transmission is disabled.

* :Initial setting: On 2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg 1.By using [◄] [►] keys, select [On] or [Off]. Items

Contents

On

At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3

Off

At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4

2.Initial setting: Off 3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-96

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U699

Software switch: Set (Message: Set: Soft SW) Contents Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually. Purpose Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs * :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [SW No.]. 3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key. Items SW No.

Contents Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)

4.Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1. Items Bit

Contents Set the software switch bit (8bit).

5.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. * :»Completed» is displayed. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. List of software switches which can be configured Communication control procedures No.

Bit

36

7654

Coding format in transmission

3210

Coding format in reception

37

38

Contents

5

33600bps/V34

4

31200bps/V34

3

28800bps/V34

2

26400bps/V34

1

24000bps/V34

0

21600bps/V34

7

19200bps/V34

6

16800bps/V34

5

14400bps/V34

4

12000bps/V34

3

9600bps/V34

2

7200bps/V34

1

4800bps/V34

0

2400bps/V34

6-97

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA No.

Bit

Contents

41

3

FSK detection in V.8

42

4

4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active

2

FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or more

Communication time setting No.

Bit

Contents

53

76543210

T3 timeout setting

54

76543210

T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)

55

76543210

T5 timeout setting

60

76543210

Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal

63

76543210

T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)

64

7

66

76543210

Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo

68

76543210

Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8

Phase C timeout in ECM reception

Modem setting No.

Bit

89

76543

Contents RX gain adjust

NCU setting No.

Bit

Contents

121

7654

Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern

122

7654

Busy tone detection pattern

1

Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching

125

76543210

Registering the access code for connection to PSTN

126

7654

Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/ telephone switching

68

76543210

Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8

Calling time setting No.

Bit

Contents

133

76543210

DTMF signal transmission time

134

76543210

DTMF signal pause time

141

76543210

Ringer detection cycle (minimum)

142

76543210

Ringer detection cycle (maximum)

143

76543210

Ringer ON time detection

144

76543210

Ringer OFF time detection

145

76543210

Ringer OFF time undetected

147

76543210

Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)

148

76543210

Allowable dial tone interruption time

6-98

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA No.

Bit

Contents

149

76543210

Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit

151

76543210

Ringer frequency detection invalid time

6-99

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U910

Black rate data (Message: Clr Coverage Dat) Contents Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the service status page). Purpose Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Clears the print coverage data.

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-100

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U917

Read/Write Backup Data (Message: R/W Bkup Data) Contents Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB memory to the main unit. Purpose Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information Setting 1.Turn the power switch off. 2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot. 3.Turn the power switch on. * :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory. 4.Press the [Start] key. 5.Select the item to set. Items

Contents

Import

Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.

Export

Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.

Method: Import/Export 1.Select the item to execute. Items

Contents

Depending data*

Address

Address book information

—

Job Accnt

Job accounting information

—

One Touch

One-touch key informa- Address book information tion

User

User management information

Document

Document box informa- Job accounting, User information tion

Shortcut *2

Short-cut information

Job accounting, User, Document Box information

Fax Fwd *1

FAX forward information

Job accounting, User, Document Box information

System

System setting informa- tion

Network

Network setting information

—

Job Set

Job setting information

—

Printer

Printer setting information

—

Fax Set *1

FAX setting information

—

Program

Program information

Information of Address book, Job accounting, User management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX setting

Job accounting information

6-101

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items Panel Set

Contents

Depending data*

Panel setting information

Information of Address book, Job accounting, User management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX setting and Program

*1: Only when FAX is attached, *2: TSI model only * :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or written. 2.Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing. * :The progress of selected item is displayed in %. * :When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears. 3.[Finish] appears after normal completion. 4.When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Error codes Codes

Contents

e000

Unspecified error

e0001

Parameter error

e0002

Generating a dummy file has failed.

e0003

The XML file to import does not exist

e0004

The exported file does not exist

e0100 to e01ff

Error in handling addressbook

e0200 to e02ff

Error in handling One-touch

e0300 to e03ff

Error in handling user management

e0400 to e04ff

Error in handling panel program data

e0500 to e05ff

Error in handling forwarding FAX data

e0600 to e06ff

Error in handling the system configuration

e0700 to e07ff

Error in handling network parameters

e0800 to e08ff

Error in handling job accounting

e0900 to e09ff

Error in handling short-cuts

e0a00 to e0aff

Error in handling job information

e0b00 to e0bff

Error in handling FAX data

e0c00: toe0cff

Error in handling printer data

e0d00 to e0dff

Error in handling panel data

e0e00 to e0eff

Error in handling document boxes

e1000 to e1fff

Error in the device-related process

e2000 to e2fff

Error in handling SOAP IF

e3000 to e3fff

Error in handling KM-WSDL IF

e4000 to e4fff

Error in process for import (e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing (e4008) Invalid file header

e5000 to e5fff

Error in the SOAP data rewriting process

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-102

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U920

Billing counter (Message: Chg Cnt) Contents Displays the billing count. Purpose Execute to check the current billing counts Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select the item to display. * :Switched to each display screen. Items

Contents

Col Copy H

Color copy counts (Coverage: High)

Col Copy M

Color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)

Col Copy L

Color copy counts (Coverage: Low)

B/W Copy

B/W copy count is displayed.

Col Prn H

Color print counts (Coverage: High)

Col Prn M

Color print counts (Coverage: Middle)

Col Prn L

Color print counts (Coverage: Low)

B/W Prn

B/W print count is displayed

B/W FAX

FAX count

Simplex

Simplex print count is displayed

Duplex

Duplex print count is displayed

Comb(Off)

Combine print counts (Off) is displayed

Comb(2in1)

Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed

Comb(4in1)

Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-103

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U927

Clearing all the billing/life counters (Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only)) Contents Clears all charge counts and machine life counts. Supplement The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key. * :Clears all charge counts and machine life counts. Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U928

Machine life counter (Message: Machine Life Counter) Contents The current machine life counts is displayed. Purpose Executed to check the machine life count Method 1.Press the [Start] key. * :The current machine life counts is displayed. Items Cnt

Contents Displays the machine life count

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-104

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

U964

Log check Contents Transfer the log files save in the HDD to a USB memory. *: Transfer screenshots at log and log acquisition. Purpose Transfer the log file saved in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs. Method 1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off. 2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot. 3.Turn the power switch on. 4.Enter maintenance item U952. 5.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Transfer the log file.

*1: LCD model only 6.Press the [Start] key. * :Starts transferring the log files saved in the HDD to a USB memory. [Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes) 7.[Completed] appears after normal completion. 8.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. * :An error code appears when there is an error. Supplement How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes Log retrieving starts when pressing four keys on the operation panel (*, 8, 6, Clear) for 3 to 6 seconds. The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns off when completed. The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory. Error codes Display

Contents

No USB Storage

The USB memory is not installed

No File

No file

Mount Error

USB memory mount error

File Delete Error

Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory

Copy Error

HDD to USB memory copy failure

Unmount Error

USB memory unmount error

Other Error

Other error

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-105

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

U977

Setting the data capture mode (Message: Set Data Capture) Contents Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory. Purpose Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it. Method 1.Press the [Start] key. 2.Select [Execute]. Items

Contents

(No Action) *1

Malfunction preventing item

Execute

Stores data in a USB memory.

*1: LCD model only 3.Press the [Start] key. * :When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed. Error codes Items

Contents

1

USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data processing or is write-protected.

4

USB memory is full.

50

Other error occurs

Completion Press the [Stop] key. * :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-106

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

6-2 Service modes The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) TSI model (1-1) Executing the service mode [Message Display] Ready to copy

1. Press the System Menu Key. System Menu: Easy Set Up Language Report Counter Cassette/MP Tray Settings Common Setting Home Copy Send Document Box FAX Application Address Book/One Touch User Login/Job Accounting Printer System/Network Date/Timer/Energy Saver Adjustment/Maintenance

2.Select [Adjustment/Maintenance] using the [▲] [▼] keys.

3. Select [Service Setting] using the [▲] [▼] keys. Adjustment/Maintenance: Density Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Background Density Adj. Print Density Auto Color Correction Correcting Black Line Display Brightness Drum Refresh Service Setting

4. Select the item to be set using the [▲] [▼] keys. Service Setting: Test Page New Developer FAX Country Code Alititude Adj. MC Memory diagnosis

6-107

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Service settings Items

Contents

page

Test Page

Outputs the test page formed in halftone

6-109

Developer

Enforce to supply toner when replacing the developer unit.

6-110

FAX Country Code

Initializes all data and image memory.

6-111

Altitude Adjustment

Sets the altitude adjustment mode.

6-112

MC

Sets the main charger output.

6-112

Memory diagnosis

Memory Diagnosis at power-up is executed to check whether read/write are executable.

6-112

6-108

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(1-2) Descriptions of service modes Test Page Contents Outputs the test page in 16-level halftone. Purpose Outputs the test page to judge the cause is at the engine or scanner when an image failure occurs. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [Test Page]. 3.Press [OK]. * :Outputs the test page.

Gray scale (16 levels)

Figure 6-21

Completion Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

6-109

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Developer Contents When replacing with the new developer unit, it needs to supply toner as it is not included in the developer unit. Though the toner is supplied automatically to the developer unit without the specific operation, it takes a long time to supply the toner inside the developer unit to the level so that it is possible to print in the case of the new developer unit which does not contain the toner at all. (About 200gram toner needs to reside.) In case of replacing the developer unit, it is possible to supply toner temporally at a high speed in this mode. Purpose Enforce to supply the toner when replacing the developer unit. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [Developer]. 3.Press the [Start] key. 4.[Received] is displayed. 5.After turning the power switch off and on, the toner installation mode is executed. Completion Press the [Menu] key.

6-110

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

FAX Country Code Contents Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.

Purpose To initialize the FAX PWB. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [FAX Country Code]. 3.Enter the destination code by using the numeric keys. 4.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. * :Data initialization starts. Destination code list Destination code

Destination

Destination code 253

Destination

000

Japan

007

Argentina

↑

?Italy

009

Australia

↑

?Germany

022

Brazil

↑

?Spain

038

China

↑

?U.K.

080

Hong Kong

↑

?Netherlands

084

Indonesia

↑

?Sweden

088

Israel

↑

?France

097

Korea

↑

?Austria

181

U.S.A.

↑

?Switzerland

250

Russia

↑

?Belgium

108

Malaysia

↑

?Denmark

115

Mexico

↑

?Finland

126

New Zealand

↑

?Portugal

136

Peru

↑

?Ireland

137

Philippines

↑

?Norway

152

Middle East

254

156

Singapore

159

South Africa

169

Thailand

Completion Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

6-111

CTR21 (European nations)

Taiwan

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Altitude Adj. Description Sets the altitude adjustment mode. Purpose Execute when print quality deteriorates in the installation at the altitude of 1,001 meters or higher Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [Altitude adjustment]. 3.Select [Normal], [1001 — 2000m], [2001 — 3000m] or [3001 — 3500m] and confirm the setting value. Completion Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

MC Contents Sets the main charger output. Purpose Execute it when the image density deterioration, background image or offset image has occurred. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [MC]. 3.Using the [▲] or [▼] key, select the setting «1» to «7» and set the setting value. Completion Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

Memory diagnostics Contents Diagnose memory at power-up (whether reading and writing are executable). Purpose Check if the memory device is defective that may cause an unresolvable F-code error, locking or abnormal images. Checks the memory failure.

Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [Memory diagnosis]. 3.Press [Start]. 4.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

6-112

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) LCD model (2-1) Executing the service mode [Message Display] Ready to copy

1. Press the System Menu Key. Report Counter System/Network User Login/Job Accounting Common Setting Copy Counter Send FAX Document Box Application Edit Distination Adjustment/Maint.

2.Select [Adjustment/Maintenance] using the [▲] [▼] keys.

3. Select [Service Setting] using the [▲] [▼] keys. Adjustment/Maint.: Copy Denst. Adj. Send/Box Density Contrast Color Calibration Color Regist. Correct. Bk Line Service Setting

4. Select the item to be set using the [▲] [▼] keys. Service Status Network Status Test Page New Developer Drum Refresh Alutitude Adj. MC FAX Country Code Remote Diag.Set. Remote Diag. ID Memory Diagnostics

6-113

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Service settings Items

Contents

page

Service Status

Outputs the service status page.

6-115

Network Status

Outputs the network status page.

6-115

Test Page

Outputs the test page formed in halftone

6-116

New Developer

Enforce to supply toner when replacing the developer unit.

6-117

Drum Refresh

Cleans the drum surface.

6-117

Altitude Adj.

Sets the altitude adjustment mode.

6-118

MC

Sets the main charger output.

6-118

FAX Country Code

Initializes all data and image memory.

6-119

Remote Diag.Set.

Sets the remote diagnostics

6-120

Remote Diag. ID

Sets the remote diagnosis ID

6-120

Mem.Diagnostics

Memory Diagnosis at power-up is executed to check whether read/write are executable.

6-120

6-114

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2-2) Descriptions of service modes Service Status Contents Output the service status page. Purpose Use to retrieve the information of the environmental setting and service data. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Service Status]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Output the service status page. * :Refer to maintenance mode U000 for detailed contents. (See page 6-23) Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

Network Status Contents Outputs the network status page. Purpose Acquires the network setting information. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Network Status]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Outputs the network status page. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-115

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Test Page Contents Outputs the test page in 16-level halftone. Purpose Outputs the test page to judge the cause is at the engine or scanner when an image failure occurs. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Test Page]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Outputs the test page.

Gray scale (16 levels)

Figure 6-22 Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-116

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

New Developer Contents When replacing with the new developer unit, it needs to supply toner as it is not included in the developer unit. Though the toner is supplied automatically to the developer unit without the specific operation, it takes a long time to supply the toner inside the developer unit to the level so that it is possible to print in the case of the new developer unit which does not contain the toner at all. (About 200gram toner needs to reside.) In case of replacing the developer unit, it is possible to supply toner temporally at a high speed in this mode. Purpose Enforce to supply the toner when replacing the developer unit. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Select [Developer]. 3.Press the [Start] key. 4.[Received] is displayed. 5.After turning the power switch off and on, the toner installation mode is executed. Completion Press the [Menu] key.

Drum Refresh Contents Toner is thinly spread to the entire drum and it is rotated about 2 minutes. The cleaning blade inside the drum unit scrapes off toner to clean the drum surface. Purpose Cleans the drum surface if an image failure occurs from the drum factor. Effective to execute when condensation occurs on the drum. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Drum Refresh]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Execute Drum refreshing.

Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-117

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Altitude Adj. Description Sets the altitude adjustment mode. Purpose Execute when print quality deteriorates in the installation at the altitude of 1,500 meters or higher Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] or [▼] key, select [Altitude Adjustment]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Using the [▲] or [▼] keys, select [Normal], [1001 — 2000m], [2001 — 3000m] or [3001 — 3500m]. 5.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

MC Contents Sets the main charger output. Purpose Execute it when the image density deterioration, background image or offset image has occurred. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] or [▼] key, select [MC]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Using the [▲] or [▼] key, select the setting «1» to «7». 5.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-118

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

FAX Country Code Contents Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.

Purpose To initialize the FAX PWB. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [FAX Country Code]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Enter the destination code by using the numeric keys. 5.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. 6.Press the [OK] key. Data initialization starts. Destination code list Destination code

Destination

Destination code 253

Destination

000

Japan

007

Argentina

↑

?Italy

009

Australia

↑

?Germany

022

Brazil

↑

?Spain

038

China

↑

?U.K.

080

Hong Kong

↑

?Netherlands

084

Indonesia

↑

?Sweden

088

Israel

↑

?France

097

Korea

↑

?Austria

181

U.S.A.

↑

?Switzerland

250

Russia

↑

?Belgium

108

Malaysia

↑

?Denmark

115

Mexico

↑

?Finland

126

New Zealand

↑

?Portugal

136

Peru

↑

?Ireland

137

Philippines

↑

?Norway

152

Middle East

254

156

Singapore

159

South Africa

169

Thailand

Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-119

CTR21 (European nations)

Taiwan

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Remote Diag.Set. Contents Sets the remote diagnostics Purpose Executed to remotely diagnose the main unit from the service center when a problem arises. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Remote Diag.Set.]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [On]. 5.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key. Remote Diag. ID Contents Sets the remote diagnostics ID Purpose An ID is registered to diagnose the main unit by using the communication from the service center when a problem arises. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Remote Diag. ID]. 3.Press the numeric keys to input the pre-designated remote diagnostic ID (0000-9999). 4.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key. Mem.Diagnostics Contents Diagnose memory at power-up (whether reading and writing are executable). Purpose The defective memory device may be regarded as one of an unresolvable factor when F-code error, lock-up or abnormal images occurs. Checks the memory failure. Method 1.Enter the Service Setting menu. 2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Mem. Diagnostic]. 3.Press the [OK] key. 4.Select [Start] by the [Left] key. 5.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Completion Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.

6-120

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7 Troubleshooting 7-1 Image formation failure Isolate the place of the image failure occurrence.

Print Test Page to check an image failure. [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting] Yes: Engine factor No: Scanner factor Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode. Yes: Scanner factor 1. Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](see page7-2). (LED lamp for originals on the contact glass —> CIS failure at scanning factor) Isolate with the original scanning position. a. DP surface, on the contact glass (scan by the main unit CIS) b. DP back side (scan by DPCIS) (40 ppm model only) 2. Refer to image failure with engine factor (see page 7-36). (Main charge —> Drum —> LSU —> Developer —> Transfer image formation process failure)

Copying : LED lamp

CIS

Main/Engine PWB

APC PWB (LSU)

CIS

Main/Engine PWB

PC

Main/Engine PWB

APC PWB (LSU)

Sending : LED lamp

Printing data from PC : Printer driver

7-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through the DP) No.

Contents

Image sample

(2-1)

Abnormal image

(2-2)

Background is colored

(2-3)

Black dots / color dots

(2-4)

Horizontal black streaks

(2-5)

Vertical streaks or bands (black/color)

(2-6)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)

(2-7)

Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

7-2

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Image sample

(2-8)

Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output

(2-9)

Moire

(2-10)

Entire blank image (white/black)

(2-11)

Part of the image is not copied

(2-12)

A part of the image is dark or light

(2-13)

The entire image is light

(2-14)

Blurred image

7-3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

(2-15)

Blurred characters

(2-16)

Color shift

(2-17)

Skewed image

Image sample

Content of Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through the DP) (1-1) Abnormal image (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Measures

1

Checking the connection

2

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-4

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-2) Background is colored (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original background density is dark. The background density adjustment is dark.

Select [Manual] for [Background Density Adjustment] in the system menu and adjust the background image density.

2

Reloading the original

The original is raised at scanning.

Set the original during pressing.

3

Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty.

Clean the shading plate at the backside of the contact glass.

4

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

When the same phenomenon occurs at the table scanning too, execute U411 [Table(chartA)].

5

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

6

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

7

Cleaning / reattaching the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty or not properly attached.

Reattach or clean the slit glass.

8

Replacing the DP

The DP frame is deformed or the DP hinge is faulty.

Replace the document processor.

9

Replacing the scanner car- The LED or CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

10

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

(1-3) Black dots / color dots Condition: Color dots at transmission only (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass.

3

Cleaning the scanner cartridge

Dust adheres on the scanner carriage.

Clean the scanner carriage.

7-5

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 4

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-4) Horizontal black streaks (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass.

3

Executing U072

The center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the center line in U072 [Front].

4

Executing U411

Image backside the size indication plate is scanned (Adjustment value of U411 [Table(ChartA)] is not proper).

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

5

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

6

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

7

Checking the main/engine PWB

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

7-6

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) Condition: Color streaks or bands at transmission only (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass and DP original conveying guide.

2

Cleaning the contact glass

The contact glass or the shading plate is dirty.

Clean the contact glass and shading plate at the backside.

3

Cleaning the scanner cartridge

Dust adheres on the scanner carriage.

Clean the scanner carriage.

4

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

5

Setting the original size

Actual original size and detected original size are mismatched.

Set the original paper size.

6

Cleaning the original mat

The original mat is dirty.

Clean the original mat.

7

Executing U072

Center line is not adjusted properly (streaks or bands appear out of the original area).

Adjust the center line in U072 [Front].

8

Executing U411

Leading edge is not adjusted properly (streaks or bands appear out of the original area).

Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].

9

Executing U068

DP original scanning start position is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the DP original scanning position in U068 [DP Read].

10

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

11

Checking the main/engine PWB

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reference

(1-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the scanner cartridge

Dust adheres on the scanner carriage.

Remove dust in the laser path of the scanner carriage.

7-7

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

4

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass and DP original conveying guide.

5

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The originals are not prop- Reset the originals. erly set on the original tray.

2

Executing U072

The center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the center line in U072 [Front].

3

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].

Reference

(1-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing U071

The leading edge timing is not properly adjusted.

Adjust original leading edge scanning timing in U071 [Front Head].

2

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].

3

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A, B

The DP conveying roller A, Clean the DP conveying B or the bushings are dirty. roller A, B and the bushings.

4

Replacing the DP conveying roller A and B

The DP conveying roller A, B are worn down.

Replace the DP conveying roller A and B.

5

Applying the grease

Excessive load is applied to the drive gear as the DP feed motor rotates irregularly.

Apply the grease to the DP drive gears.

7-8

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 6

Check description Checking the DP feed motor

Assumed cause The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Measures

Reference

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

(1-9) Moire (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original image quality is not adjusted properly (Moire changes by image quality mode).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Reloading the original

The original is not properly set. (Moire appears in the original scanning direction.)

Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset them.

Reference

(1-10) Entire blank image (white/black) (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The originals were set upside down.

Reset the original to correct the front and back direction.

2

Reattaching the slit glass

The slit glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the slit glass.

3

Executing U068

DP original scanning start position is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the DP original scanning position in U068 [DP Read].

4

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

5

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

6

Reattaching the scanner drive belt

The scanner drive belt comes off.

Reattach the scanner drive belt.

7

Reattaching the scanner drive gear

The scanner drive gear is not properly attached.

Reattach the scanner drive gear.

8

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

7-9

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 9

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-11) Part of the image is not copied (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The original is not set properly.

Reset the originals.

2

Checking the settings

Original size and paper size are unmatched on the operation panel display.

Set the original size manually.

3

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass.

4

Reattaching the slit glass

The slit glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the slit glass.

5

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-12) A part of the image is dark or light (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measures when scanning on the table

The table scanning proExecute the treatment for the cess for the front side origi- abnormal image at table nal is faulty. scanning.

2

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass.

3

Reattaching the slit glass

The slit glass is bent.

Reattach the slit glass.

4

Reattaching the DP scanning guide

The DP scanning guide is not attached properly.

Reattach the DP scanning guide.

7-10

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-13) The entire image is light (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing U068

DP original scanning start position is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the DP original scanning position in U068 [DP Read].

2

Cleaning the slit glass

The slit glass is dirty.

Clean the slit glass and DP original conveying guide.

3

Reattaching the slit glass

The slit glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the slit glass.

4

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (original type and image quality are unmatched).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

5

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (EcoPrint is set to [On]).

Change [EcoPrint] to [Off] in [System Menu/Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults].

6

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (Image density setting is light).

Increase the density in [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance].

7

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (Background density adjustment setting is [Off]) .

Select [Manual] for [Background Density Adjustment] in the system menu and adjust the background image density.

8

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartA)].

9

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

10

Replacing the scanner car- The LED or CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

11

Checking the main/engine PWB

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

7-11

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-14) Blurred image (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Correcting / replacing the original

The original is wavy.

Make the originals flat, or replace it if possible.

2

Checking the slit glass

The slit glass has condensation.

Remove condensation on the slit glass.

3

Checking the scanner carriage

The lens has condensation.

Remove condensation on the lens of the scanner carriage.

4

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].

5

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-15) Blurred characters (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the original

Original out of specification is used (Thick, thin, slippery).

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

2

Correcting the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Stretch the bending or the paper creases of the original.

3

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A, B

The DP conveying roller A, Clean the DP conveying B or the bushings are dirty. roller A, B and the bushings.

4

Reattaching the DP conveying pulley A and B

The DP conveying pulley A Reattach the DP conveying and B do not rotate propPulley A, B, and press spring. erly.

5

Reattaching the DP drive parts

The DP drive parts are not properly attached.

Reattach the DP drive parts.

6

Checking the DP scanning guide

The DP scanning guide is deformed.

Replace the DP scanning guide.

7

Checking the DP

The document processor is not properly installed on the main unit.

Check the positioning of the document processor and tighten the screws again.

7-12

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-16) Color shift Condition: At transmission only (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the original

Original out of specification is used (Thick, thin, slippery).

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

2

Correcting the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Stretch the bending or the paper creases of the original.

3

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A, B

The DP conveying roller A, Clean the DP conveying B or the bushings are dirty. roller A, B and the bushings.

4

Reattaching the DP conveying pulley A and B

The DP conveying pulley A Reattach the DP conveying and B do not rotate propPulley A, B, and press spring. erly.

5

Checking the DP drive parts

The DP drive parts are not properly attached.

Reattach the DP drive parts.

6

Replacing the DP scanning guide

The DP scanning guide is deformed.

Replace the DP scanning guide.

7

Checking the DP

The document processor is not properly installed on the main unit.

Check the positioning of the document processor and tighten the screws again.

8

Replacing the DP hinge

The DP hinge is faulty (Vertical DP hinge movement is not smooth and DP opening state cannot be held to cause horizontally warped image).

Replace the DP hinges.

Reference

(1-17) Skewed image (When scanning the front side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Correcting the original

The original is bent or creased.

Stretch the bending or the paper creases of the original.

2

Re-setting the DP original guide

The original skews.

Relocate the DP original width guides.

3

Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It can be removed by cleaning.)

Clean the DP feed roller.

4

Replacing the DP feed roller

The DP feed roller is dirty. (It cannot be removed by cleaning.)

Replace the DP feed roller.

5

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A, B

The DP conveying roller A, B are dirty.

Clean the DP conveying roller A, B.

7-13

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through the DP)

No.

Contents

Image sample

(3-1)

Abnormal image

(3-2)

Background is colored

(3-3)

Black dots / color dots

(3-4)

Horizontal black streaks

(3-5)

Vertical streaks or bands (black/color)

(3-6)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)

(3-7)

Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

7-14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Image sample

(3-8)

Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output

(3-9)

Moire

(3-10)

Entire blank image (white/black)

(3-11)

Part of the image is not copied

(3-12)

A part of the image is dark or light

(3-13)

The entire image is light

(3-14)

Blurred image

7-15

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

(3-15)

Blurred characters

(3-16)

Color shift

(3-17)

Skewed image

Image sample

Content of Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through the DP) (2-1) Abnormal image Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • DPCIS — Main/engine PWB (YC509)

2

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-16

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-2) Background is colored Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original background density is dark. The background density adjustment is dark.

Select [Manual] for [Background Density Adjustment] in the system menu and adjust the background image density.

2

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A

The DP conveying roller A is dirty.

Clean the DP conveying roller A.

4

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A drive section

The DP conveying roller A does not properly rotate.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A drive section.

5

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

6

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-3) Black dots / color dots Target: 40ppm model Condition: Color dots at transmission only (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-17

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-4) Horizontal black streaks Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is dirty.

Clean the DPCIS contact glass and DP original conveying guide.

3

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) Target: 40ppm model Condition: Color streaks or bands at transmission only (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing U072

The center line is not adjusted properly (streaks or bands appear outside the original).

Adjust the DP back side center line in U072 [Back].

2

Executing U411

The leading edge is not adjusted properly (streaks or bands appear outside the original).

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)].

3

Cleaning the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is dirty.

Clean the DPCIS contact glass.

4

Cleaning the DP conveying guide

The DP conveying guide is dirty.

Clean the DP conveying guide.

5

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A

The DP conveying roller A is dirty.

Clean the DP conveying roller A.

6

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-18

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A

The DP conveying roller A is dirty.

Clean the DP conveying roller A.

2

Checking the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is dirty.

Clean the DPCIS contact glass and DP original conveying guide.

3

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly. erly set on the original tray.

2

Executing U072

The DP rear side center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the DP back side center line in U072 [Back].

3

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)].

Reference

(2-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing U072

The DP rear side center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the DP back side center line in U072 [Back].

2

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)].

7-19

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-9) Moire Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original image quality is not adjusted properly (Moire changes by image quality mode).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Reloading the original

The original is not properly set. (Moire appears in the original scanning direction.)

Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset them.

3

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

Reference

(2-10) Entire blank image (white/black) Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-11) Part of the image is not copied Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly. erly set on the original tray.

2

Setting the original size

Actual original size and detected original size are mismatched.

Set the original size manually.

3

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7-20

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 4

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-12) A part of the image is dark or light Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original image quality is not adjusted properly (original type and image quality unmatched).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

3

Correcting the original

The original is bent or creased.

Stretch the bending or the paper creases of the original.

4

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A drive section

The DP conveying roller A does not properly rotate.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A drive section.

5

Cleaning the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is dirty.

Clean the DPCIS contact glass and DP original conveying guide.

6

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-13) The entire image is light Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measures when scanning on the table

The table scanning proExecute the treatment for the cess for the front side origi- abnormal image at table nal is faulty. scanning.

2

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Cleaning the DP conveying roller A, B

The DP conveying roller A, B are dirty.

Clean the DP conveying roller A, B.

7-21

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A and B drive section

The DP conveying roller A, B do not properly rotate.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A, B drive section.

5

Reattaching the DPCIS

The DPCIS is not properly attached.

Reattach the DPCIS.

6

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • DPCIS — Main/engine PWB (YC509)

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2-14) Blurred image Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass has condensation.

Remove condensation on the DPCIS contact glass.

2

Cleaning the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is dirty.

Clean the DPCIS contact glass and DP original conveying guide.

3

Reattaching the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass is bent.

Reattach the DPCIS contact glass.

4

Replacing the DPCIS contact glass

The DPCIS contact glass has some scratches.

Replace the DPCIS contact glass.

5

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A and B drive section

The DP conveying roller A, B do not properly rotate.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A, B drive section.

6

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7

Reattaching the DPCIS

The DPCIS is not properly attached.

Reattach the DPCIS.

8

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

7-22

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-15) Blurred characters Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measures when scanning the front side through DP

The DP scanning process for the front side original is faulty.

Execute the treatment for the abnormal image at DP 1st side (font side) scanning.

2

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A and B

The originals are conveyed without contacting the DP conveying roller A, B.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A, B.

3

Reattaching the DPCIS

The originals are away from the DPCIS contact glass.

Reattach the DPCIS.

Reference

(2-16) Color shift Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measures when scanning the front side through DP

The DP scanning process for the front side original is faulty.

Execute the treatment for the abnormal image at DP 1st side (font side) scanning.

2

Reattaching the DP conveying roller A and B

The originals are conveyed without contacting the DP conveying roller A, B.

Reattach the DP conveying roller A, B.

3

Reattaching the DPCIS

The originals are away from the DPCIS contact glass.

Reattach the DPCIS.

Reference

(2-17) Skewed image Target: 40ppm model (When scanning the back side through the DP) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measures when scanning the front side through DP

The DP scanning process for the front side original is faulty.

Execute the treatment for the abnormal image at DP 1st side (font side) scanning.

2

Reattaching the DPCIS

The DPCIS is not properly attached.

Reattach the DPCIS.

7-23

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

No.

Contents

Image sample

(3-1)

Abnormal image

(3-2)

Background is colored

(3-3)

Black dots / color dots

(3-4)

Horizontal black streaks

(3-5)

Vertical streaks or bands (black/color)

(3-6)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)

(3-7)

Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

7-24

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Image sample

(3-8)

Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output

(3-9)

Moire

(3-10)

Entire blank image (white/black)

(3-11)

Part of the image is not copied

(3-12)

A part of the image is dark or light

(3-13)

The entire image is light

(3-14)

Blurred image

7-25

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Image sample

(3-15)

Blurred characters / Color Shift

(3-16)

Skewed image

Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) (3-1) Abnormal image Step

Check description

Assumed cause The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Measures

1

Checking the connection

2

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-26

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-2) Background is colored Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original background density is dark. The background density adjustment is dark.

Select [Manual] for [Background Density Adjustment] in the system menu and adjust the background image density.

2

Reloading the original

The original is raised at scanning.

Set the original during pressing.

3

Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty.

Clean the shading plate at the backside of the contact glass.

4

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

5

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

6

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-27

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-3) Black dots / color dots Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the contact glass

The contact glass is dirty.

Clean the contact glass.

3

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

4

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

5

Checking the main/engine PWB

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reference

(3-4) Horizontal black streaks Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Cleaning the contact glass

The contact glass is dirty.

Clean the contact glass.

3

Executing U066

The image backside of the size indication plate is scanned (U066 [Front] adjustment is not proper).

Adjust the leading edge timing in U066 [Front].

4

Executing U411

Image backside the size indication plate is scanned (Adjustment value of U411 [Table(ChartA)] is not proper).

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

5

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-28

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black/color) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Changing the settings

Actual original size and detected original size are mismatched.

Set the original paper size.

3

Cleaning the original mat

The original mat is dirty.

Clean the original mat.

4

Executing U067

Center line is not adjusted properly (streaks or bands appear out of the original area).

Adjust the center line at U067 [Front].

5

Executing U411

Scanner automatic adjustment is not executed (streaks or bands appear outside the original).

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

6

Cleaning the contact glass

The contact glass or the shading plate is dirty.

Clean the contact glass and shading plate at the backside.

7

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

(3-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

2

Checking the scanner carriage

Dust adheres on the scanner carriage.

Remove dust in the laser path of the scanner carriage.

3

Cleaning the scanner cartridge

The scanner carriage is dirty.

Clean the scanner carriage.

4

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-29

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-7) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The original is not properly set on the contact glass.

Reset the originals.

2

Reattaching the contact glass

The contact glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the contact glass.

3

Executing U067

The center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the center line at U067 [Front].

4

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

Reference

(3-8) Regular difference in the leading image between the original and output Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The original is not properly placed. (The original leading edge is not aligned to the contact glass properly.)

Reset the originals.

2

Executing U066

The leading edge timing is not properly adjusted.

Adjust the leading edge timing in U066 [Front].

3

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

4

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

5

Reattaching the scanner drive belt

The scanner drive belt is loose.

Reattach the scanner drive belt.

6

Reattaching the scanner drive gear

The attachment of the scanner drive gear is loose.

Retighten the screw of the scanner drive gear.

7-30

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-9) Moire Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original image quality is not adjusted properly (Moire changes by image quality mode).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Reloading the original

The original is not properly set. (Moire appears in the original scanning direction.)

Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset them.

3

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

Reference

(3-10) Entire blank image (white/black) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The originals were set upside down.

Reset the original to correct the front and back direction.

2

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

3

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

4

Reattaching the scanner drive belt

The scanner drive belt comes off.

Reattach the scanner drive belt.

5

Reattaching the scanner drive gear

The scanner drive gear is not properly attached.

Reattach the scanner drive gear.

6

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-31

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-11) Part of the image is not copied Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

Marked part by highlighter pen on the original cannot be scanned.

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Correcting the original

A part of the original is not printed out where the light is reflected.

Scan the original excluding the section where light is reflected.

3

Reloading the original

The original is not set properly.

Reset the originals.

4

Changing the settings

Original size and paper size are unmatched on the operation panel display.

Set the original size manually.

5

Cleaning the contact glass

The original scanning side Clean the original scanning of the contact glass is dirty. side of the contact glass.

6

Reattaching the contact glass

The contact glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the contact glass.

7

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

8

Reattaching the scanner carriage

The scanner carriage is not properly attached.

Reattach the scanner carriage.

9

Replacing the DP original detection sensor

The original size and paper size are unmatched on the operation panel display (The DP original detection sensor mis-detects).

Replace the DP original detection sensor.

10

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

11

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-32

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-12) A part of the image is dark or light Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The original image quality is not adjusted properly (original type and image quality unmatched).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Replacing the original

The original is dirty.

Replace the original.

3

Correcting the original

The original is bent or creased.

Stretch the bending or the paper creases of the original.

4

Reattaching the original mat

The original mat shifts.

Reattach the original mat.

5

Cleaning the contact glass

The contact glass is dirty.

Clean the contact glass.

6

Reattaching the contact glass

The contact glass is not properly attached.

Reattach the contact glass.

7

Re-setting the book original

Original is scanned on the bent contact glass.

Set the booklet original while not bending the contact glass.

8

Replacing the scanner car- Part of LEDs do not turn riage on. The scanner carriage ISU shaft contact is deformed. The CIS is faulty.

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

9

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-33

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-13) The entire image is light Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (image quality is not consistent to original type).

Set the original image quality in the system menu.

2

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (EcoPrint is set to [On]).

Change [EcoPrint] to [Off] in [System Menu/Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults].

3

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (Image density setting is light).

Increase the density in [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance].

4

Changing the settings

Image density is not adjusted properly (Background density adjustment setting is [Off]) .

Select [Manual] for [Background Density Adjustment] in the system menu and adjust the background image density.

5

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

6

Reattaching the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not properly attached.

Reattach the home position sensor.

7

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

8

Replacing the scanner car- The LED or CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

9

Checking the main/engine PWB

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

7-34

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3-14) Blurred image Step

Check description

Assumed cause The original is wavy.

Measures

1

Correcting / replacing the original

2

Checking the contact glass The contact glass has con- Remove the condensation on densation. the contact glass.

3

Checking the scanner carriage

The scanner carriage has condensation.

Remove condensation on the scanner carriage.

4

Executing U411

The automatic scanner adjustment is not executed.

Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].

5

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

Make the originals flat, or replace it if possible.

(3-15) Blurred characters / Color Shift Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the ISU shaft

Foreign objects adhere to Remove foreign material on the ISU shaft. the ISU shaft and load is applied to the scanner carriage when moving.

2

Reattaching the scanner carriage

The scanner carriage is not attached properly and load is applied when moving.

Reattach the scanner carriage.

3

Reattaching the scanner drive belt

The scanner drive belt is loose.

Reattach the scanner drive belt.

Reference

(3-16) Skewed image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reloading the original

The original is not properly set. (The original is skewed.)

Reset the originals.

2

Reattaching the scanner carriage

The scanner carriage is not properly attached.

Reattach the scanner carriage.

7-35

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

No.

Contents

Image sample

(4-1)

spots

(4-2)

Horizontal streaks or bands

(4-3)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)

(4-4)

Vertical streaks or bands

(4-5)

Center of the original and output image is inconsistent

(4-6)

Irregular error in the leading edge between original and output image (variation in the paper leading edge timing)

(4-7)

Blank image

7-36

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Image sample

(4-8)

The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots)

(4-9)

The entire image is light

(4-10)

Blurred image

(4-11)

Blurred characters

(4-12)

Color shift in the main scanning direction

(4-13)

Color shift in the sub scanning direction

(4-14)

Toner smudge at the paper edge

7-37

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

(4-15)

Dirty reverse side

(4-16)

Offset image

(4-17)

Color reproduction is poor

(4-18)

Fusing failure

(4-19)

Paper skew

(4-20)

Uneven transfer

(4-21)

Paper creases

Image sample

7-38

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) (4-1) spots Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or scratched.

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

2

Checking the fuser unit

Clean the fuser belt if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit.

The fuser belt is dirty or scratched.

Reference

(4-2) Horizontal streaks or bands Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Cleaning the fuser belt

The fuser belt is dirty.

2

Checking the transfer roller The press spring is not attached properly or deformed.

Measures

Reference

Clean the fuser belt if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. Reattach the press spring. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

(4-3) Vertical streaks or bands (white) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or scratched.

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

2

Reattaching the FD guide

Check the paper warpage at output and reattach the FD guide.

The FD guide contacts the paper too stiffly.

7-39

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-4) Vertical streaks or bands Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The media type is not properly set.

2

Cleaning the FD guide

The FD guide is dirty with Clean the FD guide. toner or toner adheres to it.

3

Cleaning the separation needle

The separation needles are dirty with paper dust or toner.

4

Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty, deformed or worn down.

Reference

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

Clean the separation needle at the transfer/separation section with a cleaning blush. Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

(4-5) Center of the original and output image is inconsistent Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Re-setting the guide

The guide is not aligned to the paper size.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper.

2

Executing U034

The center line is not adjusted properly.

Adjust the center line in U034 [LSU Out Left].

Reference

(4-6) Irregular error in the leading edge between original and output image (variation in the paper leading edge timing) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing U034

The leading edge timing is not properly adjusted.

Adjust the leading edge timing at U034 [LSU Out Top].

2

Checking the feed clutch and registration clutch

The feed clutch and registration clutch operation is faulty.

Reattach the feed clutch and registration clutch and reconnect the connectors. If not repaired replace them.

7-40

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-7) Blank image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The transfer high voltage on signal (5V -> 0V) is not generated from the main/ engine PWB.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

2

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The transfer bias output from the high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

Reference

(4-8) The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace with the dry paper.

2

Checking the paper storage place

Paper is stored in the high humidity environment.

Ask users to store paper in a dry place. Put the dry paper into the plastic bag and seal the bag to prevent moisture from getting in.

3

Changing the settings

The media type is not properly set.

• TSI model: Set proper media type at [System Menu/ Counter] key > [Common Setting] > [Paper Settings] > [Cassette1-3] or [MP Tray] • LCD model: Set proper media type at [System Menu/ Counter] key > [Common Setting] > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [Cassette1-3] or [MP Tray]

4

Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or scratched.

Reference

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

(4-9) The entire image is light Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace the paper.

2

Checking the paper storage place

Paper is stored in the high humidity environment.

Ask users to store paper in a dry place. Put the dry paper into the plastic bag and seal the bag to prevent moisture from getting in.

3

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The transfer bias output from the high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

7-41

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-10) Blurred image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace with the new dry paper.

2

Checking the paper storage place

Paper is stored in the high humidity environment.

Ask users to store paper in a dry place. Put the dry paper into the plastic bag and seal the bag to prevent moisture from getting in.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

(4-11) Blurred characters Step

Check description

1

Replacing the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Replace with the paper within the specification.

2

Changing the settings

The media type is not properly set.

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

3

Applying the grease

The main motor drive is not transmitted smoothly.

Apply grease to the drive gears.

4

Replacing the conveying guide

The conveying guide is deformed.

Replace the conveying guide.

5

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser front guide is deformed or the fuser pressure is uneven.

Replace the fuser unit.

Reference

(4-12) Color shift in the main scanning direction Step 1

Check description Replacing the LSU

Assumed cause The LSU is faulty.

Measures

Reference

Replace the LSU.

(4-13) Color shift in the sub scanning direction Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

7-42

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-14) Toner smudge at the paper edge Step 1

Check description Cleaning the conveying guide

Assumed cause The conveying guide is dirty with toner.

Measures

Reference

Clean the conveying guide, developer unit and developer duct.

(4-15) Dirty reverse side Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or scratched.

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

2

Cleaning the fuser press roller

The fuser press roller is dirty depending on media type selection.

Clean the fuser press roller. Next, select the proper media type in the system menu.

3

Checking the conveying guide and the developer unit

The conveying guide or developer unit is dirty.

Clean the conveying guide and developer unit.

Reference

(4-16) Offset image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Replace with paper within specification or set media type to the closest one.

2

Changing the settings

The media type is not properly set.

Change the setting depending on the paper type and weight.

3

Cleaning the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty.

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval.

4

Cleaning the fuser belt

The fuser belt is dirty.

Clean the fuser belt if the image failure appears in the circumference interval.

5

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser belt surface is scratched.

Replace the fuser unit.

7-43

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-17) Color reproduction is poor Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace the paper.

2

Checking the paper storage place

Paper is stored in the high humidity environment.

Ask users to store paper in a dry place. Put the dry paper into the plastic bag and seal the bag to prevent moisture from getting in.

3

Checking the paper

Rough paper for monochrome print is used.

Use the color paper with smooth surface that fits for color print.

4

Changing the settings

Installation environment is high altitude.

Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] to set the proper mode.

5

Checking the developer unit

Toner in the developer unit is degraded.

Consume degraded toner in the developer unit with test prints and replenish the toner.

6

Reinstalling the main char- The main charger unit or ger unit and drum unit drum unit is not attached properly.

Reference

Reattach the main charger unit and drum unit.

(4-18) Fusing failure Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Replace with the proper paper.

2

Changing the settings

The media type is not properly set.

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

3

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the est version. latest version.

4

Replacing the fuser unit

Replace the fuser unit. The nipped pressure (width) to the solid image is low and fuser pressure setting (spring) is too weak.

7-44

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-19) Paper skew Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Re-setting the guide

The guide is not aligned to the paper size.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper.

2

Checking the guide

The guide is not attached properly or faulty.

Reattach the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder). If not repaired, replace it.

Reference

(4-20) Uneven transfer Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty.

Clean the transfer roller if the image failure appears in the circumference interval.

2

Replacing the transfer roller

The transfer roller is faulty or not attached properly.

Correct the deformation of the press spring. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

3

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage contact on the high voltage PWB is deformed or broken.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

4

Replacing the fuser unit

The roller, drive section or fuser pressure release mechanism is deformed or worn down.

Replace the fuser unit.

7-45

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4-21) Paper creases Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Re-setting the guide

The guide is not aligned to the paper size.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper.

2

Replacing the paper

The paper is curled or wavy.

Replace the paper.

3

Checking the paper storage place

Paper is stored in the high humidity environment.

Ask users to store paper in a dry place. Put the dry paper into the plastic bag and seal the bag to prevent moisture from getting in.

4

Checking the pressure spring

The pressure springs are not attached properly at both ends of the registration roller, so the pressure balance is uneven.

Reattach the pressure springs at both sides of the registration roller.

5

Replacing the fuser unit

The pressure springs at the machine front and rear ends of the fuser unit are not properly attached.

Check the pressure balance of both ends of the fuser unit by checking the nipped pressure on the solid image. If the balance is uneven, replace the fuser unit.

7-46

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

No.

Contents

Image sample

(5-1)

Background is colored

(5-2)

Black dots

(5-3)

Horizontal streaks or bands (white/black)

(5-4)

Irregular horizontal streaks and bands (black)

(5-5)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)

(5-6)

Vertical streaks and bands (black)

(5-7)

Blank image

7-47

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

(5-8)

Entire blank image (black)

(5-9)

Part of the image is not copied

(5-10)

The entire image is light

(5-11)

Blurred image

(5-12)

Offset image

(5-13)

Horizontal uneven density

(5-14)

Vertical uneven density

Image sample

7-48

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause) (5-1) Background is colored Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the developer bias contact

The developer bias contact is dirty or deformed.

Clean the developer bias contact or correct it to secure ground.

2

Checking the temperature inside the main unit

Temperature is low in the installation environment.

When the in-machine temperature is 16°C / 60.8°F or less, request the user to change the installation environment where the room temperature is warmer than 16°C / 60.8°F.

3

Reinstalling the drum unit

The drum unit does not ground.

Reattach the main charger unit to the drum unit and reattach the drum unit to the main unit so that it is securely grounded.

4

Cleaning the main charger wire

The main charger wire sur- Clean the main charger wire face is dirty. surface. If not repaired, replace the main charger unit.

5

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • High voltage PWB — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

6

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage contact on the high voltage PWB is deformed or broken.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-49

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-2) Black dots Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Replacing the drum unit

There are some scratches on the drum surface.

Replace the drum unit.

3

Cleaning the main charger wire

The main charger wire sur- Clean the main charger wire face is dirty. surface. If not repaired, replace the main charger unit.

4

Changing the settings

Developer bias leaks.

Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] to set the proper mode.

5

Checking the developer unit

The developer roller and magnet roller are dirty or faulty.

Clean the developer roller. If not repaired, replace the developer unit.

7-50

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-3) Horizontal streaks or bands (white/black) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the developer unit

Both ends of the developer roller are dirty and it causes the developer bias leakage.

Clean both ends of the developer roller and main charger contact.

2

Replacing the developer unit

Both ends of the developer roller and the developer bias contact are deteriorated and it causes the developer bias leakage.

Replace the developer unit.

3

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

4

Replacing the drum unit

There are some scratches on the drum surface.

Replace the drum unit.

5

Cleaning the main charger wire

The main charger wire sur- Clean the main charger wire face is dirty. surface. If not repaired, replace the main charger unit.

6

Changing the settings

The electric charge remains on the drum surface due to insufficient discharging.

Execute [MC] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] to reduce the main charger output value.

7

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • High voltage PWB — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

8

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The bias voltage is generated unevenly from the high voltage PWB since the PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

9

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-51

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-4) Irregular horizontal streaks and bands (black) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the settings

The settings do not match the installation environment (High altitude exceeding 1,500m above sea-level).

Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] to set the proper mode.

2

Correcting the main charger contact

The main charger contact is not grounded.

Correct the main charger contact for secure ground.

3

Reinstalling the drum unit

The drum unit is not properly installed, so it does not ground the drum drive shaft.

Reattach the drum unit.

4

Replacing the paper

Paper with the high surface resistance is used.

Replace with the recommended paper.

Reference

(5-5) Vertical streaks or bands (white) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Cleaning the LSU glass

The LSU glass is dirty.

Clean the LSU glass.

3

Checking the laser path

There are foreign objects on the laser path of the LSU.

Remove foreign objects on the frame or sealing material between the developer unit and the drum unit.

4

Replacing the developer unit

Foreign objects are in the developer unit.

Replace the developer unit.

5

Cleaning the main charger wire

The main charger wire sur- Clean the main charger wire face is dirty. surface. If not repaired, replace the main charger unit.

6

Replacing the drum unit

There are some scratches on the drum surface.

7-52

Replace the drum unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-6) Vertical streaks and bands (black) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Replacing the drum unit

The drum surface is worn down.

Replace the drum unit.

3

Cleaning the main charger wire

Streaky dirt adhere to the Clean the main charger wire main charger wire surface. surface.

4

Replacing the main charger unit

The main charger wire sur- Replace the main charger face is altered. unit.

5

Checking the developer unit

Foreign objects are on the developer roller surface.

Reference

Clean the developer roller. If not repaired, replace the developer unit.

(5-7) Blank image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the developer bias contact

The developer bias contact is dirty or deformed.

Clean the developer bias contact, or correct its shape so that it grounds securely.

2

Replacing the developer unit

The developer unit side gear is faulty.

Replace the developer unit.

3

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • LSU (APC PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC505)

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • High voltage PWB — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

5

Checking the developer clutch

The developer clutch or drive parts do noto operate properly.

Reattach the developer clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

6

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

7

Replacing the LSU

The APC PWB in the LSU is faulty.

Replace the LSU.

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-53

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-8) Entire blank image (black) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the drum unit

The drum unit or main charger unit is not attached properly.

Reattach the main charger unit to the drum unit and reattach the drum unit to the main unit so that it is securely grounded.

2

Checking the main charger contact

The main charger contact is dirty or deformed.

Clean the main charger contact and correct it for secure grounding.

3

Checking the developer bias contact

The developer bias contact is dirty or deformed.

Clean the developer bias contact or correct it to secure ground.

4

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • LSU (APC PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC505)

5

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • High voltage PWB — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

6

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

7

Replacing the LSU

The LSU is dirty or faulty.

Replace the LSU.

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(5-9) Part of the image is not copied Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Cleaning / replacing the transfer roller

The transfer roller is dirty or deformed.

Clean the transfer roller. If not repaired, replace the transfer roller.

7-54

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-10) The entire image is light Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the toner container

Toner is collected on one side.

2

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. densation.

3

Replacing the toner container

The toner supply opening does not open.

Replace the toner container.

3

Replenishing toner in the developer unit

Toner in the developer unit is degraded due to many low coverage prints.

Consume degraded toner in the developer unit with test prints and replenish the toner.

4

Reinstalling the drum unit and developer unit

The drum unit or the devel- Reinstall the drum unit and developer unit. oper unit is not properly attached, so that the developer roller does not contact the drum.

5

Correcting the developer bias contact

The developer bias contact is deformed.

Correct the developer bias contact so that it surely grounds.

6

Cleaning the DS pulley

The DS pulleys are dirty.

Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the developer unit.

7

Replacing the developer unit

The DS pulleys are faulty.

Replace the developer unit.

8

Replacing the drum unit

The drum surface is worn down.

Replace the drum unit.

9

Correcting the main charger contact

The voltage impressed to the main charger contact is high.

Correct the main charger contact for secure ground.

10

Checking the connection

The FFC is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the FFC. If the FFC terminal is peel, deformed or broken, replace it. • LSU (APC PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC505)

11

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • High voltage PWB — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

12

Replacing the high voltage PWB

The high voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB.

13

Replacing the LSU

The LSU is dirty or faulty.

Replace the LSU.

14

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-55

Sufficiently shake the toner container and reinstall it to the main unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-11) Blurred image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. densation.

2

Cleaning the LSU glass

The LSU glass is dirty.

Clean the LSU glass.

3

Replacing the LSU

The LSU glass is deteriorated.

Replace the LSU.

Reference

(5-12) Offset image Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface is dirty.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Replacing the drum unit

The drum surface is worn down or scratched.

Replace the drum unit.

3

Cleaning the developer roller

The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.

4

Replacing the developer unit

The developer roller surface is worn down or scratched.

7-56

Replace the developer unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(5-13) Horizontal uneven density Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the DS pulley

The DS pulleys are dirty.

Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the developer unit.

2

Replacing the developer unit

The DS pulleys are faulty.

Replace the developer unit.

3

Checking the developer bias contact

The conduction is not stabilized due to the dirty developer bias contact.

Clean the developer bias contact.

4

Replenishing toner in the developer unit

Toner in the developer unit is degraded.

Consume degraded toner in the developer unit with test prints and replenish the toner.

5

Executing Drum refresh

Toner smudges in the shape of a streak are on both ends of the drum surface.

Execute Drum refresh.

6

Changing the settings

The electric charge remains on the drum surface due to insufficient discharging.

Execute [MC] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] to reduce the main charger output value.

7

Replacing the drum unit

The drum surface is worn down.

Replace the drum unit.

8

Replacing the LSU

The laser emission is uneven.

Replace the LSU.

Reference

(5-14) Vertical uneven density Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. densation.

2

Replacing the LSU

The laser is not evenly emitted from the LSU (The internal mirror comes off).

Replace the LSU.

3

Cleaning the main charger wire

Dirt adheres to the main charger wire.

Clean the main charger wire surface. If not repaired, replace the main charger unit.

4

Replacing the drum unit

The drum surface is worn down.

Replace the drum unit.

5

Replacing the developer unit

The toner layer on the developer roller is uneven.

Replace the developer unit.

7-57

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-2 Conveying failures (1) Prior standard check items

No.

Contents

(1-1)

Paper jam due to the cover-open detection

(1-2)

Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper

(1-3)

Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl

(1-4)

Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feedshift guide

(1-5)

Paper jam caused by incorrectly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck

(1-6)

Paper jam due to the inferior paper

(1-7)

Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys

(1-8)

Paper jam due to the sensor

(1-9)

Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

(1-10)

Paper jam due to the static electricity

(1-11)

Paper jam caused by installation in the environment where paper inside the cassette is always moist.

Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures (1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Opening / closing the front cover

The front cover is not engaged.

Open/close the front cover.

2

Re-loading / replacing paper

The paper fanning is not enough or the cutting edge of loaded paper is damaged.

Fan the paper well and reload paper after switching top and bottom ends. If the paper is folded, correct or replace it.

3

Re-loading paper

The paper is wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

4

Checking the paper

Paper out of specification is used or foreign objects adhere to paper.

Ask a user to use the specified paper type. Or, remove the paper with foreign objects.

5

Re-loading paper

The paper is not properly loaded.

Reload paper in the cassette.

7-58

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Re-loading paper

The paper curls.

Reload paper upside down.

2

Re-loading paper

The paper fanning is not enough.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

3

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace the paper.

Reference

(1-3) Paper jam due to dog-ear, skew, crease. fusing failure, curl, etc. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path and the paper

Paper is caught up by a piece of paper or paper leading edge is bent.

2

Changing the settings

Media type is not set prop- Select the proper media type erly. in the system menu.

Reference

If there is a piece of paper, foreign object or burr on the part on the conveying path, remove them. If the paper leading edge is bent, remove the paper.

(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The paper is caught with a piece of paper, etc.

If there is a piece of paper, foreign object or burr on the part on the conveying path, remove them.

2

Cleaning the guide and separation needle

The guide and separation needle are dirty.

If the guide or separation needle is dirty with toner or paper dust, clean it with a cleaning cloth or brush.

3

Reattaching / replacing the guide

The guide does not properly operate due to the incorrect attachment or a fault.

If the guide does not smoothly move manually, reattach it. If not repaired, replace it.

4

Checking the solenoid

The solenoid does not operate properly.

Test print and check the guide operation with the operation sound. If the guide does not operate or it is not smooth, reattach the guide. If not repaired, replace the solenoid.

7-59

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-5) Paper jam due to paper loading failure at the paper source Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(When skewing, creasing, paper jam occurs) Re-setting the guide.

The guide is not aligned to the paper size.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper.

2

Re-loading paper

The paper fanning is not enough.

Fan paper and reload it in the paper source. If a part of the paper is bent, remove it.

Reference

(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper Step 1

Check description Replacing the paper

Assumed cause Unspecified papers are used.

7-60

Measures Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-7) Paper jam caused by conveying rollers and pulleys Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning / replacing the roller and pulley

The roller and pulley are dirty.

If paper dust, toner or foreign object adheres to the roller or pulley, clean it. If there is variation in the external diameter or wear, replace it.

2

Operation check

The clutch does not operate properly.

Test print and check the related motor operation with the operation sound. Check the clutch operation. If the clutch does not operate, go to the next step. (If the motor operation is faulty, execute the treatment by jam code.)

3

Checking the clutch

The clutch is not attached properly, connector is not connected properly or foreign objects adhere to the clutch.

Reattach the clutch and reconnect the connector. If foreign objects adhere to the clutch, clean it to remove.

4

Replacing the clutch

The clutch is faulty.

Replace the clutch (individual clutch or unit including the clutch).

5

Cleaning the roller shaft and bushing

The roller shaft or bushing is dirty.

If more load is applied to the conveying rollers due to dirt on the roller shaft and bushing, clean there.

6

Reattaching the spring

The spring comes off.

Check if the spring came off, or if it adequately presses the roller or the pulley, and reattach it if necessary.

Reference

(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator or spring does not operate properly.

If the sensor actuator is caught up or comes off, reattach the actuator or spring. If deformed, replace them.

2

Cleaning the sensor

The sensor is dirty.

If the sensor surface is dirty, clean it.

3

Reattaching / replacing the sensor

The sensor is faulty.

Reattach and reconnect the sensor. If not repaired, replace it.

7-61

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-9) Paper jam due to setting failure or detection failure Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper leading edge margin

The leading edge margin is not enough.

When there is no margin from the paper leading edge to 4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm), and, when the fuser jam occurs while there is no check line on 20mm(+/-1mm) from the paper leading edge of the test pattern that is output at U034, adjust the leading margin by executing [Lead] at U402.

2

Re-setting the guide

The paper size is misdetected.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper (multi feed jam factor).

3

Changing the settings

Media type is not set prop- In case the media type seterly. ting mismatch against the actual paper thickness (jam by separation failure), set the proper media type in the system menu.

Reference

(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity Step 1

Check description Checking the ground

Assumed cause

Measures

The static electricity accumulates.

When the main unit is installed in the low humidity environment where the static electricity easily accumulates on the conveying guide during the continuous printing, check if the discharge sheet in the exit section and the metal guide in the transfer section are grounded securely. If necessary, reattach the parts.

Reference

(1-11) Paper jam due to paper storage environment (high humidity) Step 1

Check description Checking the paper storage place

Assumed cause Papers have been stored in the improper place.

7-62

Measures Ask users to store paper in a dry place.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2) Paper jam indication When a paper jam occurs, the machine immediately stops the operation and displays the paper jam message on the operation panel. Remove paper by way of pulling out the cassette, opening the front cover and rear cover when a paper jam has occurred inside the machine. *: The location and clearing method are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred. Jam location indication

(TSI model)

1

1 Shows the location of a paper jam. 2 Shows the previous step. 3 Shows the next step. 4 Shows the removal procedure.

4

Paper jam.

Clear the paper jammed in Cassette 1. Press [Next >] to follow the instructions.

3 2

< Back

Next >

5 Selecting [Status/Job Cancel] key displays [Hold]. Selecting [Hold] displays status screen, and the status of jobs can be checked. 6 Select [Display Error] to return to the paper jam guidance.

Status/Job Cancel. Status Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Scheduled Job Display Error

6

Pause All Print Jobs

Close

G (LCD model)

1 2

Paper jammed in Cassette 1. JAM**** Help

F E D A B

Attention

C

1 Shows the location of a paper jam. 2 Displays the Help screen. Figure 7-1 E. Paper jam inside machine F. Paper jam inside the rear cover G. Paper jam in document processor

A. Paper jam in the cassette 1 B. Paper jam in the cassette 2 C. Paper jam in the cassette 3 D. MP tray paper jam

7-63

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3) Paper jam detection condition Main unit + document processor + paper feeder (option)

G

5

6

7

8

F D

2 3

E

4

1 A

10

9 B

12

11 C Figure 7-2

[Paper jam location] A. Paper jam in the cassette 1 B. Paper jam in the cassette 2 C. Paper jam in the cassette 3 D. MP tray paper jam E. Paper jam inside machine F. Paper jam inside the rear cover G. Paper jam in document processor

*1: 40 ppm models only

[sensor(paper conveying)] 1. Paper sensor 2. MP paper sensor 3. Registration sensor 4. Eject sensor 5. DP original sensor 6. DP feed sensor 7. DP backside timing sensor *1 8. DP front side timing sensor 9. PF paper sensor 1 10. PF feed sensor 1 11. PF paper sensor 2 12. PF feed sensor 2

7-64

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Jam code contents Error Code

JAM Position*

Error Code

JAM Position*

Error Code

JAM Position*

Error Code

JAM Position*

J0000

—

J0509

D

J4012

E

J4218

F

J0101

—

J0511

E

J4013

E

J4219

F

J0104

—

J0512

E

J4018

E

J9000

G

J0105

—

J0513

B

J4201

E

J9002

—

J0106

—

J0518

E

J4202

E

J9010

—

J0107

—

J0519

E

J4203

E

J9061

—

J0110

—

J1403

C

J4208

E

J9110

G

J0501

A

J1413

B

J4209

E

J9300

G

J0502

B

J4002

A

J4211

F

J9310

G

J0503

C

J4003

A

J4212

F

J9400

G

J0508

E

J4008

A

J4213

F

J9410

G

* Refer to figure 7-2 for the paper JAM indication (see page 7-64).

7-65

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4) Jam Codes

Error code

Contents

note

J0000

Power ON jam

J0101/J0104/J0105/ J0106

Paper jam caused by the software factor

J0107

Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

J0110

Right cover open detection

J0501/J0502/J0503/ J0508/J0509

No feed

Note: Prior check point at no feed

J0501/J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and the cassette bottom plate does not rise.

J0501

Cassette no feed

Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and, the cassette bottom plate is rising but the paper feed drive does not start.

J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and, the cassette bottom plate is rising but the paper feed drive does not start.

J0501/J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: Mark of paper feed slippage at the paper leading edge (the pickup roller cannot convey paper.)

J0501/J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: A part other than the center part of the leading edge of the paper is broken. (Paper jam occurs as paper is caught up before entering the retard roller)

J0501/J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: The center part of the paper leading edge is folded or torn (It does not reach to the retard roller or retard roller does not rotate).

J0501

Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips.

J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips.

J0501

Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips or the roller does not rotate.

J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips or the roller does not rotate.

J0501

Cassette no feed

Condition: The sensor detection is unstable.

J0502/J0503

Cassette no feed

Condition: The sensor detection is unstable.

J0508

No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips).

J0508

No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: Paper is not damaged (The duplex conveying drive does not rotate).

7-66

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

note

J0509

No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips).

J0509

No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: Paper is not damaged (The MP bottom plate does not ascend or feed drive does not start).

J0511

Multi feed jam

J0512/J0513

Multi feed jam

J0518

Multi-feeding from the duplex section

J0519

Multi-feeding from the MP tray

J1403

PF feed sensor non-arrival jam

Target: Paper feeder 2 Condition: Paper is not damaged (Paper feed does not start or the PF conveying clutch does not operate properly).

J1403

PF feed sensor non-arrival jam

Target: Paper feeder 2 Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips).

J1413

PF feed sensor stay jam

Target: Paper feeder 2

J4002/J4003

Registration sensor nonarrival jam

Condition: Paper is damaged.

J4002/J4003

Registration sensor nonarrival jam

Condition: Paper is not damaged. (The PF conveying roller does not rotate properly. The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.)

J4008

Registration sensor nonarrival jam

J4012/J4013/J4018

Registration sensor stay jam

J4201/J4202/J4203/ J4208/J4209

Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam before the fuser section

J4201/J4202/J4203/ J4208/J4209

Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section

J4201/J4202/J4203/ J4208/J4209

Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper rolled up on the fuser roller (leading edge margin less than 4.0mm)

J4201/J4202/J4203/ J4208/J4209

Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper rolled up on the fuser roller (leading edge margin 4.0mm or more)

J4201/J4202/J4203/ J4208/J4209

Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam after passing the lower exit roller

J4211/J4212/J4213/ J4218/J4219

Exit sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section

J4211/J4212/J4213/ J4218/J4219

Exit sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit

J4211/J4212/J4213/ J4218/J4219

Exit sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam at FD guide

J9000

No original feed from the DP

7-67

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

note

J9002

Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

J9009

DP original jam caused by the image scanning

J9010

Document processor open detection

J9061

DP feed motor rotation error

J9110

DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

J9300

DP backside timing sensor non-arrival jam

Target: 40ppm model

J9310

DP backside timing sensor stay jam

Target: 40ppm model

J9400

DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

J9410

DP timing sensor stay jam

Content of Jam Code J0000: Power ON jam The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The paper is caught with a piece of paper, etc.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

2

Cleaning the sensor

The sensor is dirty.

Clean the registration sensor or exit sensor.

3

Checking the connection

The sensor is not properly connected.

Reconnect the connector to the registration sensor or exit sensor.

4

Replacing the sensor

The sensor is faulty.

Replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor) or fuser unit (including the exit sensor).

7-68

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the software factor The firmware does not properly activate. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The controller does not activate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Firmware upgrade

The firmware does not properly activate.

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

Reference

J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The controller does not activate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Changing the external power source

The electric power supply fluctuates or the electric voltage reduces.

Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.

3

Changing the settings

The actual paper and the paper settings (media type, paper size) do not match.

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

4

Firmware upgrade

The firmware does not properly activate.

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

5

Checking the fuser unit

The fuser heater is faulty.

Replace the fuser unit.

Reference

J0110: Right cover open detection Right cover open was detected during printing. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the right cover

The right cover is not engaged.

Check if the right cover is securely closed and reattach it if necessary. If deformed, repair or replace it.

2

Checking the interlock switch

The interlock switch does not operate properly.

Reattach the interlock switch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

7-69

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0501/J0502/J0503/J0508/J0509: No feed Note: Prior check point at no feed During paper feed, the next sensor does not turn on even passing a certain time (paper factor). Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

4

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

5

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

Reference

J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and the cassette bottom plate does not rise. During paper feed from cassette 1-3, the leading edge does not come out from the cassette (no mark of paper feed at the leading edge). Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the spring

The spring is deformed and cannot lift up the cassette bottom plate.

Correct the spring if deformed. If not repaired, replace it.

2

Replacing the cassette bottom plate

The cassette bottom plate is deformed or broken and cannot be lifted up.

Replace the cassette bottom plate.

7-70

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0501: Cassette no feed Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and, the cassette bottom plate is rising but the paper feed drive does not start. During paper feed from cassette 1, the leading edge does not come out from the cassette (no mark of paper feed at the leading edge). Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Feed clutch — Main/engine PWB (YC10) • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

2

Checking the paper feed shaft

The feed roller shaft or pin is not attached properly and feed roller does not rotate.

Reattach the feed shaft and feed pin. If deformed, replace them.

3

Checking the driving parts

The main motor drive is not properly transmitted.

Check if the feed roller smoothly rotates manually and clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

4

Checking the paper feed clutch

The paper feed clutch is not connected, so the paper feed roller does not rotate.

Reattach the feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-71

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: No mark of paper feed at the paper leading edge and, the cassette bottom plate is rising but the paper feed drive does not start. During paper feed from cassette 2,3, the leading edge does not come out from the cassette (no mark of paper feed at the leading edge). Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed clutch — PF main PWB (YC2) • PF feed motor — PF main PWB (YC4) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J0503 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) (at J0503 jam) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

2

Checking the paper feed shaft

The PF feed roller shaft or pin is not attached properly and PF feed roller does not rotate.

Reattach the feed shaft and feed pin. If deformed, replace them.

3

Checking the driving parts

The PF feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the PF feed roller smoothly rotates manually and clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

4

Checking the PF feed clutch

The PF feed clutch is not linked and the PF feed roller does not rotate.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Checking the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

6

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-72

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: Mark of paper feed slippage at the paper leading edge (the pickup roller cannot convey paper.) When feeding from cassette 1-3, paper stops at the pickup roller and the next sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch or PF feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

2

Checking the pickup roller

The conveying function of the pickup roller is not enough.

Clean the pickup roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

3

Checking the paper feed roller

The conveying function of the paper feed roller is not enough.

Clean the feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

Reference

J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: A part other than the center part of the leading edge of the paper is broken. (Paper jam occurs as paper is caught up before entering the retard roller) When feeding from cassette 1-3, paper stops at the feed roller and the next sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch or PF feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

Paper curls downward.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

2

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

Reference

J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: The center part of the paper leading edge is folded or torn (It does not reach to the retard roller or retard roller does not rotate). When feeding from cassette 1-3, paper stops at the retard roller and the next sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch or PF feed clutch turns on. Step 1

Check description Checking the retard roller

Assumed cause The retard roller conveying force is not enough.

7-73

Measures Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Reattaching the retard spring

The retard spring comes off.

Reattach the retard spring.

3

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

Reference

J0501: Cassette no feed Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips. When feeding from cassette1, the paper leading edge gets out of cassette but does not reach the middle roller after the feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause The conveying performance is lowered due to the retard roller rotation failure.

Measures

Reference

Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

1

Checking the retard roller

2

Checking the retard holder The load increases since the retard holder is caught up.

Reattach the retard holder. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Checking the paper feed roller

The conveying function of the paper feed roller is not enough.

Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

4

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

5

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper up to the paper stack limit label level.

J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips. When feeding from cassette 2,3, the paper leading edge gets out of cassette but does not reach the PF conveying roller after the PF feed clutch turns on. Step 1

Check description Checking the retard roller

Assumed cause The conveying performance is lowered due to the retard roller rotation failure.

7-74

Measures Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the retard holder The load increases since the retard holder is caught up.

Reattach the retard holder. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Checking the paper feed roller

The conveying function of the paper feed roller is not enough.

Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF conveying clutch — PF main PWB(YC2) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J0503 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) (at J0503 jam) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

5

Checking the PF conveying clutch

The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

6

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0501: Cassette no feed Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips or the roller does not rotate. When feeding from cassette 1, the paper leading edge gets out of cassette but stops at the middle roller after the feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper feed roller

The conveying function of the paper feed roller is not enough.

Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

2

Checking the middle roller and middle pulley

The middle roller conveying force is not enough.

Clean the middle roller and middle pulley on their surface. If the spring and bushing come off, reattach them. If the roller and pulley are deformed or worn down, replace them.

7-75

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Checking the driving parts

The main motor drive is not properly transmitted.

Check if the middle roller smoothly rotate manually, clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

4

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

5

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper within the upper limit label level.

6

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

7

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

8

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

9

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: The paper conveying force is lowered and paper slips or the roller does not rotate. When feeding from cassette 2,3, the paper leading edge gets out of cassette but stops at the PF conveying roller after the PF feed clutch turns on. Step 1

Check description Checking the paper feed roller

Assumed cause The conveying function of the paper feed roller is not enough.

7-76

Measures Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the PF conveying roller and PF conveying pulley

The PF conveying roller conveying force is not enough.

Clean the PF conveying roller and PF conveying pulley on their surface. If the spring and bushing come off, reattach them. If the roller and pulley are deformed or worn down, replace them.

3

Checking the driving parts

The PF feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the PF conveying roller smoothly rotates manually. Clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

4

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

5

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper within the upper limit label level.

6

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

7

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF conveying clutch — PF main PWB(YC2) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J0503 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) (at J0503 jam) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

8

Checking the PF conveying clutch

The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

9

Checking the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

7-77

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

10

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

11

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0501: Cassette no feed Condition: The sensor detection is unstable. When feeding from cassette 1, the paper leading edge reaches the registration sensor but it does not turn on after the feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

2

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-78

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed Condition: The sensor detection is unstable. When feeding from cassette 2,3, the paper leading edge reaches the PF feed sensor but it does not turn on after the PF feed clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed sensor — PF main PWB (YC7) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J0503 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) (at J0503 jam) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

1

Checking the connection

2

Checking the PF feed sen- The PF feed sensor does sor not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips). When feeding from duplex section, the registration sensor does not turn on after the exit solenoid turns on (after paper switches back). Step 1

Check description Performing the prior standard check items

Assumed cause There is a mechanical cause such as the dirty guide, etc.

7-79

Measures Perform the prior standard check items.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

2

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

3

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is damp.

4

(In case paper slips and stops at the DU conveying roller) Checking paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

5

(In case paper stops at the DU conveying roller) Checking the DU conveying roller and pulley

The conveying performance is lowered or slippage occurs (rotation not smooth).

Clean the DU conveying roller and DU conveying pulley on their surface. Check the pressure to the roller and pulley and if the spring and bushing come off, reattach them. If the roller and pulley are deformed or worn down, replace them. If foreign objects adhere to the drive gear, remove them. If damaged, replace it.

6

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Reattach the actuator and spring for the registration sensor. If not operating properly due to deformation, correct or replace it.

J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section Condition: Paper is not damaged (The duplex conveying drive does not rotate). When feeding from duplex section, the registration sensor does not turn on after the exit solenoid turns on (after paper switches back). Step 1

Check description (In case paper stops at the DU conveying roller) Checking the drive parts

Assumed cause The main motor drive is not properly transmitted.

7-80

Measures Check if the DU conveying roller A, B smoothly rotate manually, clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

3

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

4

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips). The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

2

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

3

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

4

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

7-81

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

5

(In case paper stops at the MP feed roller) Checking paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

6

(In case paper stops at the MP feed roller) Checking paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

7

(In case paper stops at the MP feed roller) Checking the MP feed roller

The paper conveying performance of the MP feed roller is not enough.

Clean the MP paper feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

8

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Correct and reattach the registration sensor actuator if does not operate properly due to deformation, etc. If not repaired, replace it.

Reference

J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray Condition: Paper is not damaged (The MP bottom plate does not ascend or feed drive does not start). The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case the MP bottom plate does not ascend) Checking the cam

The cam to lift up the MP bottom plate does not operate properly.

Align the MP bottom plate elevation cam and reattach it.

2

(In case the MP bottom plate does not ascend) Checking the MP bottom plate

The MP bottom plate is not properly attached.

Reattach the MP bottom plate.

3

(In case the MP bottom plate does not ascend) Checking the MP solenoid

The MP solenoid does not operate properly.

Reattach the MP solenoid and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

4

(In case paper stops at the MP feed roller) Checking the drive parts

The main motor drive is not properly transmitted.

Check if the MP feed roller smoothly rotates manually and clean and reattach the drive parts if necessary. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Correct and reattach the registration sensor actuator if does not operate properly due to deformation, etc. If not repaired, replace it.

7-82

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

6

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

7

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

8

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

9

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0511: Multi feed jam When feeding cassette 1, the registration sensor does not turn on even passing certain time after the registration clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

4

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace the paper.

5

Checking the retard roller

The paper separation force Clean the retard roller surof the retard roller is not face. If worn down, replace it. enough.

6

Checking the retard holder The retard holder comes off.

Reattach the retard holder.

7

Checking the retard spring

Reattach the retard spring.

The retard spring comes off.

7-83

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

8

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC10) • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Feed clutch — Main/engine PWB (YC10)

9

(In case of no mark of paper loop) Checking the registration clutch

The registration clutch continues linkage and the registration roller rotation does not stop.

Reattach the registration clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

10

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

11

Checking the paper feed clutch

The feed clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

12

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0512/J0513: Multi feed jam When feeding from cassette 2,3, the PF feed sensor does not turn off even passing certain time after the PF feed sensor turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

4

Replacing the paper

The paper is damp.

Replace the paper.

5

Checking the retard roller

The paper separation force Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down, replace it. of the retard roller is not enough.

6

Checking the retard holder The retard holder comes off.

Reattach the retard holder.

7

Checking the retard spring

Reattach the retard spring.

The retard spring comes off.

7-84

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

8

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF conveying clutch — PF main PWB (YC2) • PF feed sensor — PF main PWB (YC7) • PF feed clutch — PF main PWB (YC2) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J0513 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6) (PF1) (at J0513) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

9

(In case of no mark of paper loop) Checking the PF conveying clutch

The PF conveying clutch continues linkage and the PF conveying roller rotation does not stop.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

10

Checking the PF feed sen- The PF feed sensor does sor not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

11

Checking the PF feed clutch

The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

12

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

13

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section When feeding from duplex, the registration sensor does not turn off even passing certain time after the registration clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

7-85

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

Checking the paper

Paper is wavy with moisture or curled.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

5

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC10) • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

6

(In case paper reached the registration roller but no mark of paper loop) Checking the registration clutch

The registration clutch continues linkage and the registration roller rotation does not stop.

Reattach the registration clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

7

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray When feeding from MP tray, the registration sensor does not turn off even passing certain time after the registration clutch turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

4

Checking the paper

The paper is curled or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

5

Checking the MP feed roller and the MP separation pad

The paper separation force of the MP separation pad is insufficient.

Clean the MP feed roller and MP separation pad on their surface or replace them.

7-86

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

6

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Correct and reattach the registration sensor actuator if does not operate properly due to deformation, etc. If not repaired, replace it.

7

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Registration clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC10)

8

(In case paper reached the registration roller but no mark of paper loop) Checking the registration clutch

The registration clutch continues linkage and the registration roller rotation does not stop.

Reattach the registration clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

9

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

10

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J1403: PF feed sensor non-arrival jam Target: Paper feeder 2 Condition: Paper is not damaged (Paper feed does not start or the PF conveying clutch does not operate properly). The PF feed sensor (PF1) does not turn on even passing certain tie after the PF feed sensor (PF2) turns on. Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

(In case the leading edge of paper stops at the paper feeder 1 PF conveying roller) Checking the drive parts

The PF feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the PF conveying roller smoothly rotates manually. Clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

7-87

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed sensor (PF1) — PF main PWB (YC7) • PF conveying clutch (PF1) PF main PWB (YC2) • PF feed motor (PF1) — PF main PWB (YC4) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

2

Checking the connection

3

Checking the PF feed sen- The PF feed sensor does sor not operate properly.

Clean the PF feed sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it. (Paper feeder 1)

4

Checking the PF conveying clutch

The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.

Clean the PF feed clutch, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it. (Paper feeder 1)

5

Checking the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor does not operate properly.

Clean the PF feed motor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it. (Paper feeder 1)

6

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB. (Paper feeder 1)

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J1403: PF feed sensor non-arrival jam Target: Paper feeder 2 Condition: Paper is damaged (Paper is caught up, the paper conveying force is lowered or paper slips). The PF feed sensor (PF1) does not turn on even passing certain tie after the PF feed sensor (PF2) turns on. Step 1

Check description (In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Assumed cause Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

7-88

Measures If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

2

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

3

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the press spring

The PF feed roller presReattach the PF feed roller sure balance is not proper. press spring. If deformed, correct or replace it.

4

(In case paper is conveyed in skew or in delay) Checking the PF feed roller and conveying gear

The conveying performance is lowered or slippage occurs (rotation not smooth).

Clean the PF feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it. If foreign objects adhere to the drive gear, remove it. If damaged, replace it.

5

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

6

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

7

Checking the paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

8

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

9

(In case paper slips) Checking paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

J1413: PF feed sensor stay jam Target: Paper feeder 2 The PF feed sensor (PF1) does not turn off even passing certain tie after the PF feed sensor (PF2) turns off. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

2

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

3

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper within the upper limit label level.

7-89

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the press spring

The front/rear PF feed roller pressure balance is not proper.

Reattach the PF feed roller press spring. If deformed, correct or replace it.

5

(In case paper skews) Checking the conveying guide

The paper is caught with the conveying guide.

Reattach the conveying guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide, remove it or replace the conveying guide.

6

Checking the PF feed roller and drive gear

The conveying performance is lowered or slippage occurs (rotation not smooth).

Clean the PF feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it. If foreign objects adhere to the drive gear, remove them and if damaged, replace it.

7

Checking the PF cover

The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely. If not closed due to deformation, replace it.

8

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

9

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

10

Checking the paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

11

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

12

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

13

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed sensor (PF1) — PF main PWB (YC7) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

14

Checking the PF feed sen- The PF feed sensor does sor not operate properly.

Clean the PF feed sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it. (Paper feeder 1)

15

Replacing the PF main PWB

Replace the PF main PWB. (Paper feeder 1)

The PF main PWB is faulty.

7-90

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 16

Check description Replacing the main/engine PWB

Assumed cause The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Measures

Reference

Replace the main/engine PWB.

J4002/J4003: Registration sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper is damaged. The registration sensor does not turn on when feed from cassette 2, 3. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(There is a mark of paper caught up or paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper path

Paper is caught up at the foreign objects, hole, burr, etc. on the conveying side of the conveying guide.

If there is a foreign object or burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating, on the sheet guide material correct or replace it.

2

(In case of Z-folded paper) Checking the paper conveying path

The conveying path is filled with foreign objects such as paper piece.

If there is a burr or foreign object on the conveying side of the conveying guide, remove it. If broken, replace the conveying guide.

3

(Paper is conveyed in skew or paper has a Zfold) Checking the PF conveying roller and drive gear

The conveying performance is lowered or slippage occurs (rotation not smooth).

Clean the PF conveying roller surface. If worn down, replace it. If foreign objects adhere to the drive gear, remove them and if damaged, replace it.

4

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

5

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper within the upper limit label level.

6

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the press spring

Pressure balance of the PF conveying pulley is not proper.

Reattach the PF conveying pulley press spring. If deformed, correct or replace it.

7

(In case paper conveying delays) Checking the PF cover

The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely. If not closed due to deformation, replace it.

8

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

9

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

7-91

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

10

(In case paper leading edge is bent) Checking paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

11

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16)

12

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

13

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4002/J4003: Registration sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper is not damaged. (The PF conveying roller does not rotate properly. The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.) The registration sensor does not turn on when feed from cassette 2, 3. Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

(In case paper stops at the PF conveying roller) Checking the drive parts

The PF feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the PF conveying roller smoothly rotates manually. Clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

7-92

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • PF conveying clutch — PF main PWB (YC2) • PF feed motor — PF main PWB (YC4) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector (at J4003 jam) • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) (at J4003 jam) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

3

Checking the PF conveying clutch

The PF conveying clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

4

Checking the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the PF feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

6

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4008: Registration sensor non-arrival jam The registration sensor does not turn on when feed from the duplex section. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

2

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

3

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

7-93

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

Checking the paper

Paper is wavy with moisture or curled.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

5

Checking the DU conveying roller and DU conveying pulley

The conveying performance is lowered or slippage occurs (rotation not smooth).

Clean the DU conveying roller A,B and DU conveying pulley A,B on their surface. If worn don, replace them. If the press spring is deformed, correct and reattach it. If not repaired, replace it.

6

Checking the driving parts

The main motor drive is not properly transmitted.

Check if the DU conveying roller A, B smoothly rotate manually, clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace them.

7

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

8

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

9

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

10

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-94

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J4012/J4013/J4018: Registration sensor stay jam • When feeding from cassette 2,3, the registration sensor does not turn off even passing the specified time after the PF feed sensor is turned off. • When feeding from duplex, the registration sensor does not turn off even passing the specified time after the registration sensor is turned on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up by the conveying guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the conveying guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it or replace it. If there is a scratch, deformation or floating on the sheet or film, correct or replace it.

2

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

3

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the paper stacking level

Paper is loaded above the highest level.

Reload paper within the upper limit label level.

4

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the press spring

Pressure balance of the PF conveying pulley is not proper.

Reattach the PF conveying pulley press spring. If deformed, correct or replace it.

5

(In case multiple paper is fed) Reloading paper

The cut-end of the paper is crushed.

Fan the paper well and load it by reversing the paper direction

6

(In case multiple paper is fed) Checking the feed roller and retard roller

The paper fanning is not enough.

Clean the feed roller and retard roller. If worn down, replace them.

7

Checking the PF conveying roller and PF conveying pulley

The PF conveying roller conveying force is not enough.

Clean the PF conveying roller and PF conveying pulley on their surface. If worn down, replace them.

8

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

9

Checking the paper

Paper is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

10

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

11

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

7-95

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

12

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Registration sensor (on the high voltage PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC16) • Registration clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC10)

13

Checking the registration sensor

The registration sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the registration sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the high voltage PWB (including the registration sensor).

14

Checking the registration clutch

The registration clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the registration clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

15

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam before the fuser section When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, the exit sensor does not turn of when passing the specified time after the secondary feed is started. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case paper is bent or conveyed in skew) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up at the fuser entry guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a foreign object or burr on the conveying side of the fuser entry, remove it or replace the fuser entry guide. If the sheet or film comes off, correct or replace it.

2

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

3

Checking the fuser roller and drive parts

The fuser roller does not drive properly.

Attach the fuser unit so that the main motor drive is transmitted to the fuser roller. If the fuser roller drive gear is damaged or the busing is worn down, replace them.

7-96

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper jams in the fuser section and the exit sensor does not turn on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

(In case of accordion jam) Checking the actuator and spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Reattach the exit sensor actuator and spring. If not operating properly due to deformation, correct or replace them.

2

Checking the fuser exit guide

Paper is caught up at the conveying side of the fuser exit guide.

If there is a burr or fused toner on the conveying side of the fuser exit guide, remove it or replace the fuser unit.

3

Changing the settings

The actual paper and the paper settings (media type, paper size) do not match.

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

4

Replacing the paper

The paper curls.

Replace with long grain paper.

5

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

6

Checking the paper

The paper is wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

7

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

8

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

9

Checking the press roller and fuser belt

Foreign objects adhere to the press roller or fuser belt.

Clean the press roller and fuser belt. Or replace the fuser unit.

Reference

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper rolled up on the fuser roller (leading edge margin less than 4.0mm) When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper is rolled up along the fuser roller and the exit sensor does not turn on. Step 1

Check description Adjusting the paper leading edge timing

Assumed cause The margin at the paper leading edge is incorrect.

7-97

Measures If each margin shift is regular, execute U034 to adjust the leading edge timing .

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

3

Replacing the paper

The paper curls.

Replace with long grain paper.

4

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

5

Checking the paper

The paper is wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

6

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

7

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

8

Checking the press roller and fuser belt

Foreign objects adhere to the press roller or fuser belt.

Clean the press roller and fuser belt. Or replace the fuser unit.

Reference

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper rolled up on the fuser roller (leading edge margin 4.0mm or more) When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper is rolled up along the fuser roller and the exit sensor does not turn on. Step 1

Check description Checking the press roller and fuser belt

Assumed cause Foreign objects adhere to the press roller or fuser belt.

Measures

Reference

Clean the press roller or replace the fuser unit.

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam after passing the lower exit roller When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper jams after passing through the lower exit roller and the exit sensor does not turn on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

(When the paper skew The actuator does not occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. ator and the spring

2

(In case paper is conveyed in skew) Checking the fuser exit guide

The fuser exit guide is deformed.

7-98

Measures Reattach the exit sensor actuator and spring. If not operating properly due to deformation, correct or replace them. Reattach the fuser exit guide. If the conveying side of the fuser exit guide is warped, correct it. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

(In case paper skews) Checking the lower exit roller

The lower exit roller conClean the lower exit roller and veying force is not enough. lower exit pulley on their surface. If the surface is won down, replace the fuser unit.

4

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

5

Checking the paper

The paper is wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

6

Checking the paper

Unspecified papers are used.

Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

7

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

8

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Exit sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

9

Checking the exit sensor

The exit sensor does not properly operate.

Clean the exit sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit (including the exit sensor).

10

Replacing the fuser unit

The load is applied to the fuser belt.

Replace the fuser unit.

11

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4218/J4219: Exit sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section Paper jams before entering into the upper exit roller and the exit sensor does not turn on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper

The paper curls.

Replace with long grain paper.

2

Checking the exit guide

Paper is caught up at the exit guide, a piece of paper, etc..

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the exit guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Checking the exit guide

Toner is fused on the exit guide.

Clean the conveying side of the exit guide.

7-99

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

Checking the actuator

The actuator is not attached properly.

Reattach the exit sensor actuator.

5

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Exit sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC19) • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

6

Checking the lower exit roller and drive parts

The lower exit roller and drive parts do not operate properly.

Reattach the fuser unit so that the main motor drive is transmitted to the lower exit roller. If the drive gear is damaged or bushing is worn down, replace the fuser unit.

7

Checking the exit sensor

The exit sensor does not properly operate.

Clean the exit sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit (including the exit sensor).

8

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

9

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4218/J4219: Exit sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper jam occurs at the exit section and the exit sensor does not turn off. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper tray

There is an obstacle on the tray.

Remove an obstacle.

2

Checking the paper tray

The paper stopper on the tray is not stored.

Store the paper stopper.

3

(When the paper skew occurs) Relocating the paper width guides

The locations of the paper width guides do not fit with the paper size.

Relocate the paper width guides to fit them with the paper size.

4

(In case paper skews) Checking the exit guide

Foreign objects such as toner, etc. adhere to the exit guide and paper is caught up there.

Clean and reattach the exit guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the exit guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace the exit unit.

7-100

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

5

Checking the upper exit roller and upper exit pulley

The upper exit roller conClean the surface of the veying force is not enough. upper exit roller and upper exit pulley. If worn down, replace them.

6

Checking the driving parts

The exit roller does not rotate.

In case the drive gear is deformed, torque limiter is faulty or bushing is worn down, replace the exit unit.

7

(In case the sensor does not turn on with paper) Reattaching the fuser unit or exit unit

The fuser unit or exit unit is not attached properly.

Reattach the fuser unit and exit unit, and reconnect the exit unit connector.

8

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9) • Exit sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

9

Checking the main motor

The main motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the main motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

10

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

Reattach the actuator and spring for the exit sensor. If faulty due to deformation, etc., correct it. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit.

11

Checking the exit sensor

The exit sensor does not properly operate.

Clean the exit sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the fuser unit (including the exit sensor).

12

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4218/J4219: Exit sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam at FD guide When feeding from cassette 1-3, duplex or MP tray, paper jam occurs at the feed-shift section and the exit sensor does not turn off. Step 1

Check description Checking the paper

Assumed cause Unspecified papers are used.

7-101

Measures Explain to the user to use the paper within the specifications.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the paper

foreign objects are on the paper.

Remove the paper with foreign objects.

3

Checking the paper

The paper leading edge is bent.

Remove the bent paper.

4

Checking the paper

The paper is wavy.

Correct or replace paper. If difficult to replace, re-load paper by switching top and bottom ends or turning it over.

5

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Cleaning the FD guide

Toner is fused on the FD guide.

Clean the conveying side of the FD guide.

6

(In case paper jam occurs at the FD guide) Replacing paper

The paper curls.

Replace with long grain paper.

7

(In case paper jam occurs at the FD guide) Replacing paper

Paper stiffness is lowered with moisture.

Replace the paper.

8

(In case paper jam occurs at the FD guide) Checking paper

The actual paper and the paper settings (media type, paper size) do not match.

Select the proper media type in the system menu.

9

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Checking the conveying path

Paper is caught up at the FD guide or paper piece.

If there is a paper piece or foreign object on the conveying side or a burr on the conveying side of the FD guide or on the parts such as actuator, remove it. If not repaired, replace it.

10

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Checking the FD guide

The FD guide does not operate properly.

Reattach the FD guide and reconnect the exit unit connector.

11

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Checking connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Exit solenoid — Main/engine PWB (YC1)

12

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Checking the exit solenoid

The exit solenoid does not operate properly.

Reattach the exit solenoid and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

(In case paper hits the FD guide and jams) Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-102

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J9000: No original feed from the DP The DP feed sensor does not turn on even after trying to feed again. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

2

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. if difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it.

3

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

4

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

5

Checking the paper path

The original is caught up by a piece of paper.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

6

Checking the DP feed roller

The paper conveying force of the DP feed roller is insufficient.

Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

7

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

If the DP feed sensor does not operate properly due to deformed actuator or spring, correct and reattach it. If not repaired, replace it.

8

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP feed sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC33) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

9

Checking the driving parts

The DP feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the DP feed roller smoothly rotate manually. Clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace it.

10

Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed clutch does sor not operate properly.

Clean the DP feed sensor and reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

11

Checking the DP feed clutch

Reattach the DP feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

The DP feed clutch does not operate properly.

7-103

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

12

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The foreign objects such as a piece of paper are on the paper path.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP feed sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP timing sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP back side timing sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC34)(40 ppm model)

3

Checking the sensor

The sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP conveying sensors on the conveying path, reattach them and reconnect the connectors. If not repaired, replace them. • 35ppm model: DP feed sensor, DP timing sensor • 40ppm model: DP feed sensor, DP timing sensor, DP backside timing sensor

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-104

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning The next original is in standby during the image scanning. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The controller does not activate properly.

Remove the originals and check the sensors. Then, turn the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn the power switch on.

2

Firmware upgrade

The firmware does not properly activate.

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

3

Executing [Memory Diagnostics]

The memory on the main/ engine PWB is faulty.

Execute [Memory Diagnostics] at [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/ Maintenance] > [Service Settings].

Reference

J9010: Document processor open detection The document processor open is detected during the original conveying. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the DP

The DP is not attached properly or faulty.

Check if the DP can be securely closed and reattach it if necessary. If the cover is deformed, correct or replace it.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP open/close sensor Main/engine PWB (YC34)

3

Checking the DP opening/ closing sensor

The DP opening/closing sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP open/close sensor, reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-105

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J9061: DP feed motor rotation error The DP feed motor keeps rotating. Or, the firmware does not properly operate. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The controller does not activate properly.

Remove a piece of paper from the conveying section and check the sensors. Then, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. When 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn the power switch on.

2

Firmware upgrade

The firmware does not properly activate.

Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

Reference

J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam The DP feed sensor does not turn off. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

2

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. if difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it.

3

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

4

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

5

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP feed roller

The paper conveying force of the DP feed roller is insufficient.

Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

6

(When the original is skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides

The position of the DP original width guides does not match to the original size.

Align the DP original width guides to the original size.

7

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP feed belt

The original is hooked with the DP feed guide.

Reattach the DP feed guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the DP feed guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace it.

8

Checking the actuator and the spring

The actuator does not operate properly.

If the DP feed sensor does not operate properly due to deformed actuator or spring, correct and reattach it. If not repaired, replace it.

7-106

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

9

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP feed sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed clutch — Main/ engine PWB (YC33) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

10

Checking the driving parts

The DP feed motor drive is not transmitted properly.

Check if the DP feed roller smoothly rotate manually. Clean the drive parts and reattach them if necessary. If not repaired, replace it.

11

Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed clutch does sor not operate properly.

Clean the DP feed sensor and reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

12

Checking the DP feed clutch

The DP feed clutch does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed clutch and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

14

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J9300: DP backside timing sensor non-arrival jam Target: 40ppm model The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on even passing certain pulses after the DP feed sensor turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The original is caught up by a piece of paper.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

2

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP feed roller

The paper conveying force of the DP feed roller is insufficient.

Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

3

(When the original is skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides

The position of the DP original width guides does not match to the original size.

Align the DP original width guides to the original size.

7-107

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause The original is caught up with the DP original conveying guide.

Measures Reattach the DP original conveying guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace the guide.

4

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP original conveying guide

5

(When the original convey- The original conveying ing delays) Checking the force of the DP conveying DP conveying roller A roller A is not enough.

Clean the DP conveying roller A surface. If worn down, replace it.

6

(When the original convey- The DP top cover is deformed. ing delays) Checking the DP top cover

Check if the DP top cover is securely closed. If it cannot be closed due to the deformation, replace it.

7

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

8

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. If difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it. In case of duplex scanning, turn over the original and reload it.

9

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

10

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

11

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP back side timing sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

12

Checking the DP backside timing sensor

The DP back side timing sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP back side timing sensor and reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

14

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-108

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam Target: 40ppm model The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned off. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The original is caught up by a piece of paper.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

2

(When the original is skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides

The position of the DP original width guides does not match to the original size.

Align the DP original width guides to the original size.

3

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP original conveying guide

The original is caught up with the DP original conveying guide.

Reattach the DP original conveying guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace the guide.

4

(When the original convey- The original conveying force of the DP conveying ing delays) Checking the roller A, B is not enough. DP conveying roller A, B

Clean the DP conveying roller A, B surface. If worn down, replace them.

5

(When the original convey- The DP top cover is ing delays) Checking the deformed. DP top cover

Check if the DP top cover is securely closed. If it cannot be closed due to the deformation, replace it.

6

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

7

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. If difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it. In case of duplex scanning, turn over the original and reload it.

8

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

9

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

10

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP back side timing sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

7-109

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

11

Checking the DP backside timing sensor

The DP back side timing sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP back side timing sensor and reattach it and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

12

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam The DP timing sensor does not turn on even passing certain pulses after the DP feed sensor turns on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the paper path

The original is caught up by a piece of paper.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

2

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP feed roller

The paper conveying force of the DP feed roller is insufficient.

Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

3

(When the original is skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides

The position of the DP original width guides does not match to the original size.

Align the DP original width guides to the original size.

4

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP original conveying guide

The original is caught up with the DP original conveying guide.

Reattach the DP original conveying guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace the guide.

5

(When the original convey- The original conveying ing delays) Checking the force of the DP conveying DP conveying roller A roller A is not enough.

Clean the DP conveying roller A surface. If worn down, replace it.

6

(When the original convey- The DP top cover is ing delays) Checking the deformed. DP top cover

Check if the DP top cover is securely closed. If it cannot be closed due to the deformation, replace it.

7

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

8

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. If difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it. In case of duplex scanning, turn over the original and reload it.

9

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

7-110

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

10

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

11

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the following wire connector terminal and reconnect it. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP timing sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

12

Checking the DP timing sensor

The DP timing sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP timing sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

14

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam The DP timing sensor does not turn off when passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned off. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the original

The leading edge of the original is bent.

Remove the folded original.

2

Checking the original

The original is curled downward or wavy.

Correct or replace the original. If difficult to replace, switch the top and bottom end and reload it. In case of duplex scanning, turn over the original and reload it.

3

Checking the original

The original out of specification is used.

Explain users to use the original within the specifications.

4

Checking the original

Foreign objects adhere on the original.

Remove the original with the foreign objects.

5

Checking the paper path

The original is caught up by a piece of paper.

If there is a paper piece, foreign object or burr on the part such as guide and actuator on the conveying path, remove it.

6

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP feed roller

The paper conveying force of the DP feed roller is insufficient.

Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn down, replace it.

7

(When the original is skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides

The position of the DP original width guides does not match to the original size.

Align the DP original width guides to the original size.

7-111

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause The original is caught up with the DP original conveying guide.

Measures Reattach the DP original conveying guide. If there is a burr on the conveying side of the guide, remove it. If not repaired, replace the guide.

8

(When the original is skewed) Checking the DP original conveying guide

9

(When the original convey- The original conveying ing delays) Checking the force of the DP conveying DP conveying roller A, B roller A, B is not enough.

Clean the DP conveying roller A, B surface. If worn down, replace them.

10

(When the original convey- The DP top cover is deformed. ing delays) Checking the DP top cover

Check if the DP top cover is securely closed. If it cannot be closed due to the deformation, replace it.

11

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the following wire connector terminal and reconnect it. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • DP timing sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC34) • DP feed motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC33)

12

Checking the DP timing sensor

The DP timing sensor does not operate properly.

Clean the DP timing sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

13

Checking the DP feed motor

The DP feed motor does not operate properly.

Reattach the DP feed motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

14

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-112

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-3Self diagnostic (1) Self diagnostic function This machine is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops operating and displays an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of error.

(2) Self diagnostic codes If the parts of the failure cause is not supplied, replace the unit that includes it. Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power switch off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct service until the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)

(2-1) Error codes list Error code

Contents

C0030

FAX PWB system error

C0070

FAX PWB compatibility error

C0100

Backup memory device error

C0120

MAC address data error

C0130

Backup memory reading/writing error

C0140

Backup memory data error

C0150

Engine EEPROM data error

C0160

Engine EEPROM data error

C0170

Charger count error

C0180

Machine serial number mismatch

C0190

Backup memory device error (Engine)

C0500

Drive lock detection by the engine firmware

C0510

High voltage remote control error

C0530

Backup task error

C0540

Engine firmware unexpected control detection

C0800

Print sequence error

C0830

FAX flash program area checksum error

C0840

RTC error («Time for maintenance T» appears)

C0870

FAX PWB large capacity data transfer error

C0920

FAX file system error

C0970

Power interruption detection

C1810

Paper feeder communication error (PF1)

C1820

Paper feeder communication error (PF2)

C2000

Main motor steady state error

C2010

Main motor startup error

C2600

PF feed motor error (PF1)

C2610

PF feed motor error (PF2)

7-113

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

C3100

Carriage error

C3200

CIS lamp error

C3210

DPCIS lamp error

C3300

CIS AGC error

C3310

DPCIS AGC error

C3500

Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

C4000

Polygon motor startup error

C4010

Polygon motor steady-state error

C4201

Laser error

C6000

Broken fuser heater

C6020

Thermopile high temperature error

C6030

Broken thermopile

C6050

Thermopile low temperature error

C6200

Fuser edge thermistor error

C6220

Fuser edge thermistor high temperature error

C6230

Broken fuser edge thermistor

C6250

Fuser edge thermistor low temperature error

C6400

Zero-cross signal error

C6600

Fuser rotation error

C6610

Fuser press-release sensor error

C6650

Thermopile EEPROM error

C7220

Broken in-machine thermistor

C7800

Outer thermistor broken

C7990

Waste toner full

7-114

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-2) Content of Self Diagnostic C0030: FAX PWB system error The FAX PWB does not operate properly. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

2

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

3

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C0070: FAX PWB compatibility error The FAX and the controller mismatch. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

2

Checking the FAX PWB

The incompatible FAX PWB is installed.

Install the FAX PWB for the applicable model.

3

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

Reference

C0100: Backup memory device error An abnormal status is output from the flash memory. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The EEPROM does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Reinstalling the EEPROM

The EEPROM is not properly attached.

Reattach the EEPROM on the main/engine PWB.

7-115

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Replacing the EEPROM

The EEPROM is faulty.

Replace the EEPROM on the main/engine PWB. After replacement, C0180 appears and execute U004.

4

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

C0120: MAC address data error MAC address data was incorrect data. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The flash memory does not operate properly.

2

Checking the MAC address

The MAC address is incor- Replace the main/engine rect. PWB when the MAC address is not indicated on the network status page.

Reference

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The flash memory does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

7-116

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0140: Backup memory data error The data read from the flash memory is judged as abnormal at the startup. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The flash memory does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Executing U021

The flash memory does not operate properly.

Execute U021.

3

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

C0150: Engine EEPROM data error 1. After writing in the EEPROM, written value and readout value after writing mismatched 8 times consecutively. 2. After reading from the EEPROM, readout value from the same location mismatched 8 times consecutively. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The EEPROM does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Reinstalling the EEPROM

The EEPROM is not properly attached.

Reattach the EEPROM on the main/engine PWB.

3

Replacing the EEPROM

The EEPROM is faulty.

Replace the EEPROM on the main/engine PWB and execute U004.

4

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

C0160: Engine EEPROM data error The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal. Step 1

Check description Resetting the main power

Assumed cause The EEPROM does not operate properly.

7-117

Measures Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Executing U021

The data saved in the EEPROM is faulty.

Execute U021.

3

Replacing the EEPROM

The EEPROM is faulty.

Replace the EEPROM on the main/engine PWB and execute U004.

Reference

C0170: Charger count error The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side and the engine side. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the machine serial number in the EEPROM on the main/ engine PWB

The main/engine PWB for the different main unit is installed.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the main number is different, attach the correct main/engine PWB.

2

Checking the machine serial number in the EEPROM on the main/ engine PWB

The EEPROM for the different main unit is installed.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the engine number is different, install the correct EEPROM in the main/ engine PWB.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the main number is different, replace the main/ engine PWB and execute U004.

4

Checking the EEPROM

The EEPROM is faulty.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the engine number is different, reinstall the EEPROM in the main/engine PWB. If not repaired, replace the EEPROM and execute U004. Note: Do not execute U004 (selecting [Execute] and pressing the [Start] key). A different machine serial number is overwritten.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-118

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0180: Machine serial number mismatch Machine serial number mismatch between the main and engine side when turning the power on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the machine serial number in the EEPROM on the main/ engine PWB

The main/engine PWB for the different main unit is installed.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the main number is different, attach the correct main/engine PWB.

2

Checking the machine serial number in the EEPROM on the main/ engine PWB

The EEPROM for the different main unit is installed.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the engine number is different, install the correct EEPROM in the main/ engine PWB.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the main number is different, replace the main/ engine PWB and execute U004.

4

Checking the EEPROM

The EEPROM is faulty.

Check the main and engine machine serial number in U004 and if the engine number is different, reinstall the EEPROM in the main/engine PWB. If not repaired, replace the EEPROM and execute U004. Note: Do not execute U004 (selecting [Execute] and pressing the [Start] key). A different machine serial number is overwritten.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C0190: Backup memory device error (Engine) The data is not read from the EEPROM when turning the power on. (3 retries) Step 1

Check description Resetting the main power

Assumed cause

Measures

The EEPROM is not properly read.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

7-119

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

3

Replacing the EEPROM

The data is not properly read since the EEPROM is faulty.

Contact the service support to acquire the new EEPROM, and install it on the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

C0500: Drive lock detection by the engine firmware The main motor continuously rotates. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

C0510: High voltage remote control error Only the high voltage PWB remote signal turns on while the drum unit is not driven. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

7-120

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0530: Backup task error The backup task does not operate for 30s or more. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

C0540: Engine firmware unexpected control detection The solenoid turns on over the certain time. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

C0800: Print sequence error Print sequence jam (J010x) occurred twice consecutively. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-121

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0830: FAX flash program area checksum error The FAX program saved in the flash memory is broken. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

3

Initializing the fax

The data in the FAX PWB is faulty.

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

4

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C0840: RTC error («Time for maintenance T» appears)

• RTC value has returned to the past • No power was supplied for 5 years or more • RTC setting value is older than 2000/01/01 • RTC has returned to the past than the previous check • After C0840 was detected and the main power was reset for partial operation, [Time for Maintenance T] is displayed Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Setting the RTC

RTC is not properly set.

Set the RTC in the System Menu.

2

Reattaching the main/ engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is not correctly attached.

Retighten the screws for the main/engine PWB.

3

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector is not connected properly or the wire or main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector of the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, repair or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/ engine PWB.

7-122

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0870: FAX PWB large capacity data transfer error The DMA transfer failed between the controller and FAX PWB. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

2

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C0920: FAX file system error The file system in the FAX PWB flash memory is broken. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

3

Initializing the fax

FAX control values are incorrect

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

4

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-123

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C0970: Power interruption detection Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the interlock switch

The interlock switch does not turn on.

2

Resetting the main power

The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

3

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

4

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

Check if the interlock switch turns on by opening/closing the right cover. If not, reattach the interlock switch.

C1810: Paper feeder communication error (PF1) Target: Paper feeder 1 No paper feeder is detected after the paper feeder installation is detected when turning the power on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the paper feeder

The drawer connector between the main unit and paper feeder 1 is not connected properly.

Place the main unit on the paper feeder 1 so that the drawer connector is securely connected.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not connected properly or, the wire or drawer connector is faulty.

Check and clean the terminal of the following wire connectors or, repair and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity or the drawer connector is faulty, replace the wire. • PF main PWB (YC5) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

3

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-124

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C1820: Paper feeder communication error (PF2) Target: Paper feeder 2 No paper feeder is detected after the paper feeder installation is detected when turning the power on. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the paper feeder

The drawer connector between the paper feeder 1 and the paper feeder 2 is not connected properly.

Place the main unit and the paper feeder 1 on the paper feeder 2 so that the drawer connectors are securely connected.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not connected properly or, the wire or drawer connector is faulty.

Check and clean the terminal of the following wire connectors or, repair and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity or the drawer connector is faulty, replace the wire. • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

3

Replacing the PF main PWB

The PF main PWB is faulty.

Replace the PF main PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C2000: Main motor steady state error Ready signal turns off for 1s consecutively after the motor becomes stable. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the drum unit and the developer unit

More load is applied to the main motor drive caused by the drum unit lockup.

Check if the drum smoothly rotates manually and if locked, replace the drum unit.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

7-125

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Checking the driving parts

The main motor drive parts do not properly operate.

If the coupling and gear in the main motor drive section do not rotate smoothly, clean the gear and apply grease to it. If the coupling or gear is broken, replace it.

4

Replacing the main motor

The main motor is faulty.

Replace the main motor.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C2010: Main motor startup error Ready signal does not turn on even passing 2s after the main motor starts up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the drum unit and the developer unit

More load is applied to the main motor drive caused by the drum unit lockup.

Check if the drum smoothly rotates manually and if locked, replace the drum unit.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main motor — Main/engine PWB (YC9)

3

Checking the driving parts

The main motor drive parts do not properly operate.

If the coupling and gear in the main motor drive section do not rotate smoothly, clean the gear and apply grease to it. If the coupling or gear is broken, replace it.

4

Replacing the main motor

The main motor is faulty.

Replace the main motor.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-126

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C2600: PF feed motor error (PF1) Target: Paper feeder 1 Ready signal does not turn on even passing 2s after the PF feed motor starts up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed motor — PF main PWB (YC4) • PF main PWB (YC5) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

2

Checking the driving parts

The PF feed motor drive parts do not operate properly.

If the coupling and gear in the PF feed motor drive section do not rotate smoothly, clean the gear and apply grease to it. If the coupling or gear is broken, replace it.

3

Replacing the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor is faulty.

Replace the PF feed motor

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C2610: PF feed motor error (PF2) Target: Paper feeder 2 Ready signal does not turn on even passing 2s after the PF feed motor starts up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • PF feed motor — PF main PWB (YC4)(PF2) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF2) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — PF main PWB (YC6)(PF1) • PF main PWB (YC5)(PF1) Drawer connector • Drawer connector — Main/ engine PWB (YC17)

7-127

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the driving parts

The PF feed motor drive parts do not operate properly.

If the coupling and gear in the PF feed motor drive section do not rotate smoothly, clean the gear and apply grease to it. If the coupling or gear is broken, replace it.

4

Replacing the PF feed motor

The PF feed motor is faulty.

Replace the PF feed motor

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C3100: Carriage error The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or finishing the original scan by the scanner. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the scanner movement

A load is applied to the scanner movement.

If there is an excessive load to the scanner movement when manually shifting the scanner carriage, check if foreign material is on the scanner drive belt. Then, clean the scanner drive belt and apply the grease to the ISU shaft.

2

Checking the tension of the drive belt

A load is applied to the scanner movement since the drive belt tension is improper.

Adjust the drive belt tension properly.

3

Checking the connection

The connector and FFC Reconnect the connector and are not connected properly the FFC. If there is no contior the wire or FFC is faulty. nuity, replace the wire. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • Home position sensor Main/engine PWB (YC31) • Scanner motor — Main/ engine PWB (YC31) • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

4

Checking the home position sensor

The home position sensor is not attached properly or faulty.

Reattach the home position sensor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

5

Checking the scanner motor

The scanner motor is not attached properly or faulty.

Reattach the scanner motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

7-128

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

6

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

7

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is faulty.

Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest version

8

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C3200: CIS lamp error The white reference data obtained by turning the CIS lamp on at initialization was less than the specified value. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

2

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

C3210: DPCIS lamp error Target: 40ppm model The white reference data obtained by turning the DPCIS lamp on at initialization was less than the specified value. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • DPCIS — Main/engine PWB (YC509)

2

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-129

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C3300: CIS AGC error The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

2

Replacing the scanner car- The CIS is faulty. riage

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

Replace the main/engine PWB.

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

C3310: DPCIS AGC error Target: 40ppm model Proper white reference value was not obtained from the DPCIS after AGC. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • DPCIS — Main/engine PWB (YC509)

2

Replacing the DPCIS

The DPCIS is faulty.

Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U411 [DP FD(ChartA)].

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine CPU. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • CIS — Main/engine PWB (YC506)

2

Replacing the scanner car- The scanner carriage is riage faulty.

Replace the scanner carriage and execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] and [DP FU(ChartA)].

7-130

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C4000: Polygon motor startup error Ready signal does not turn on even passing 10s after the polygon motor starts up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean and reattach the wire connector terminal as follows. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • LSU (polygon motor) Main/engine PWB (YC3)

2

Checking the LSU

The polygon motor does not rotate properly.

Check the polygon motor rotation sound. If not rotating properly, reattach the LSU. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C4010: Polygon motor steady-state error Ready signal turns off for 1s consecutively after the polygon motor becomes stable. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean and reattach the wire connector terminal as follows. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • LSU (polygon motor) Main/engine PWB (YC3)

2

Checking the LSU

The polygon motor does not rotate properly.

Check the polygon motor rotation sound. If not rotating properly, reattach the LSU. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C4201: Laser error Laser cannot be received for 1s after starting laser emission. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The FFC terminal is not properly connected or faulty.

Reconnect the following FFC. If the FFC terminal is peeled, deformed or broken, replace it. • LSU (APC PWB) — Main/ engine PWB (YC505)

7-131

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the LSU

The laser diode is faulty.

Reattach the LSU while taking care of static electricity. If not repaired, replace it.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6000: Broken fuser heater 1. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the thermopile does not reach 100°C/212°F even if the fuser heater is turned on for 10s consecutively. 2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the thermopile does not reach Ready temperature even passing 30s after the temperature detected by the thermopile reached 60°C/140°F. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Removing a piece of paper A piece of paper resides in the fuser unit and the thermopile cannot detect temperature properly.

Remove a piece of paper remaining in the fuser unit.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19) • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser heater is broken. Replace the fuser unit.

4

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6020: Thermopile high temperature error 1. The thermopile detected 200°C/392°F or more for 5s. 2. The thermopile detected 200°C/392°F or more for 0.5s when passing 1s or more after the drive stopped. (however, at the emergency stop, the relay circuit is used and this detection is not done.) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Thermopile — Main/engine PWB (YC2)

2

Replacing the thermopile

The thermopile is faulty.

Replace the thermopile.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-132

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C6030: Broken thermopile The thermopile AD value is abnormal. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Removing a piece of paper A piece of paper resides in the fuser unit and the thermopile cannot detect temperature properly.

Remove a piece of paper.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Thermopile — Main/engine PWB (YC2)

3

Replacing the thermopile

The thermopile is faulty.

Replace the thermopile.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6050: Thermopile low temperature error During stand-by or printing, the thermopile detected less than 100°C/212°F for 3s consecutively. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the external power source

The power supply voltage reduces.

Connect the power cord to a different wall outlet if the power supply voltage descends by 10% or more of the rated voltage, or multiple devices use the same outlet.

2

Removing a piece of paper A piece of paper resides in the fuser unit and the thermopile cannot detect temperature properly.

Remove a piece of paper remaining in the fuser unit.

3

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Thermopile — Main/engine PWB (YC2)

4

Replacing the thermopile

The thermopile is faulty.

Replace the thermopile.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6200: Fuser edge thermistor error 1. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the edge thermistor does not reach 60°C/140°F when turning the heater on for 30s consecutively.

7-133

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the edge thermistor does not reach Ready temperature when passing 20s after the temperature detected by the edge thermistor reached 60°C/140°F. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the fuser unit

The fuser unit drawer con- Reinstall the fuser unit so that nector is not inserted com- the drawer connector is conpletely. nected securely.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser edge thermistor is faulty and cannot detect correct temperature.

Replace the fuser unit.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

5

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6220: Fuser edge thermistor high temperature error 1. While drive is stopped, the fuser edge thermistor detected 240°C/464°F or more. 2. During drive, the fuser edge thermistor detected 255°C/491°F or more. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Reinstalling the fuser unit

The fuser unit drawer con- Reinstall the fuser unit so that nector is not inserted com- the drawer connector is conpletely. nected securely.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser edge thermistor is faulty and cannot detect correct temperature.

Replace the fuser unit.

7-134

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

5

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6230: Broken fuser edge thermistor The fuser thermistor AD value is abnormal. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the fuser unit

The fuser unit drawer con- Reinstall the fuser unit so that nector is not inserted com- the drawer connector is connected securely. pletely.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser edge thermistor is faulty and cannot detect correct temperature.

Replace the fuser unit.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

5

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6250: Fuser edge thermistor low temperature error During printing, the fuser edge thermistor detected less than 60°C/140°F for consecutive 3s or more. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Reinstalling the fuser unit

The fuser unit drawer con- Reinstall the fuser unit so that nector is not inserted com- the drawer connector is conpletely. nected securely.

7-135

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser edge thermistor is faulty and cannot detect correct temperature.

Replace the fuser unit.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

5

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6400: Zero-cross signal error During the fuser heater on, the zero cross signal is not input for 1s consecutively. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) — Main/engine PWB (YC20)

2

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6600: Fuser rotation error Despite the motor stable signal input, the fuser roller rotation detection signal is not input for 2s consecutively. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Removing a piece of paper A piece of paper resides in the fuser unit and the fuser pressure release does not operate properly.

7-136

Measures Remove a piece of paper remaining in the fuser unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit — Main/engine PWB (YC19)

3

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser unit is faulty.

Replace the fuser unit.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6610: Fuser press-release sensor error 1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn on even passing 10s after starting the fuser pressure increase. 2. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off even passing 10s after starting the fuser pressure decrease. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Removing a piece of paper A piece of paper resides in the fuser unit and the fuser pressure release does not operate properly.

Remove a piece of paper remaining in the fuser unit.

2

Checking the fuser pressure release operation

The fuser press-release does not operate properly.

Manually reverse-rotate the fuser gear to check if the fuser pressure is decreased. If not, replace the fuser unit.

3

Reattaching the fuser pressure release sensor

The fuser press-release sensor is not properly attached.

Check the fuser pressure release sensor is photo-interrupted by the actuator when decreasing the pressure. If not, reattach the fuser pressure release sensor.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Fuser unit (Fuser pressure release sensor) — Main/ engine PWB (YC19) • Fuser pressure release motor — Main/engine PWB (YC1)

5

Replacing the fuser pressure release motor

The fuser pressure release motor does not operate properly.

Replace the fuser pressure release motor.

6

Replacing the fuser unit

The internal parts of the fuser unit such as the fuser press-release sensor are faulty.

Replace the fuser unit.

7-137

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

7

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C6650: Thermopile EEPROM error The thermopile EEPROM cannot be accessed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing the external power source

The power supply voltage reduces.

If the supply power voltage drops exceeding 10% of rated voltage or multiple tap is used, change the power supply.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Thermopile — Main/engine PWB (YC2)

3

Replacing the thermopile

The thermopile is faulty.

Replace the thermopile.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

C7220: Broken in-machine thermistor The in-machine thermistor input sampling value exceeds the reference value. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • In-machine temperature sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC1)

2

Replacing thein-machine temperature sensor

The in-machine temperature sensor is faulty.

Replace the in-machine temperature sensor.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-138

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

C7800: Outer thermistor broken The temperature/humidity sensor (external thermistor) input sampling value exceeds the reference value. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Temperature/humidity sensor — Main/engine PWB (YC2)

2

Replacing the temperature/humidity sensor

Temperature/humidity sen- Replace the temperature/ sor is faulty. humidity sensor.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Reference

Replace the main/engine PWB.

C7990: Waste toner full The waste toner sensor detected the waste toner box in the drum unit full. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Replacing the drum unit

The waste toner reservoir in the drum unit is full.

Replace the drum unit if not recovered after turning the power off and on.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Waste toner sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC2)

3

Replacing the waste toner sensor

The waste toner sensor is faulty.

Replace the waste toner sensor.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-139

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline (3-1) System Error code list Error code

Contents

F000

Communication error between the main unit and CPU

F010

Program read error

F020

RAM read / write error

F040

Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the controller and the print engine)

F050

Engine main program error

(3-2) Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main/engine PWB and the operation panel PWB is unavailable. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The controller does not activate properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • TSI model: Operation panel PWB (YC6) — Main/engine PWB (YC507) • LCD model: Operation panel PWB (YC2) — Main/ engine PWB (YC507)

3

Checking the expansion memory

The expansion memory is not properly connected.

Clean the expansion memory and reconnect it to the main/engine PWB

4

Executing U021

The backup RAM data is faulty.

Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM data.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

6

Replacing the operation panel PWB

The operation panel PWB is faulty.

Replace the operation panel PWB.

7-140

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

F010: Program read error The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The program does not start up properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Executing U021

The backup RAM data is faulty.

Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM data.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

F020: RAM read / write error The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The program does not start up properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Executing U021

The backup RAM data is faulty.

Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM data.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the controller and the print engine) The communication between the controller and the print engine is faulty. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

1

Resetting the main power

The communication between the controller and the print engine is faulty.

2

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware est version. and the engine firmware to the latest version.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

7-141

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

F050: Engine main program error The engine program cannot start up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The print engine ROM checksum is faulty.

2

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the engine firmware est version. to the latest version

3

Reinstalling the EEPROM

The EEPROM is not properly attached.

Reattach the EEPROM to the main/engine PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-142

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(4) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis error code list. Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs. *: Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated. — Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing and reinserting the DIMM. If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM. *: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off. Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on. Number

Contents

Verification procedure & check point

Remarks

—

It locks on a Welcome screen.It locks on a starting logo (Taskalfa/Ecosys) screen.(Even if time passes for a definite period of time in more than * notes, a screen does not change)

(1) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and perform an operation check. (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check. If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check. (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (4) Exchange a Panel PWB and perform an operation check. (5) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.

*Note 70 [s] or immediately displayed [Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507, YC511, YC514 Panel PWB: YC4, YC6, YC17

*Note 60 [s] [Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507 Panel PWB: YC2

F000

CF000 will be displayed if * notes progress is carried out for a definite period of time with a Welcome screen.The communication fault between Panel-Main/Engine PWBsCommunication fault between Panel Core-Main Core

(1) Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and perform an operation check. (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check. If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check. (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (4) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (5) Exchange a Panel PWB and perform an operation check. (6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.

[Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507, YC511, YC514 Panel PWB: YC4, YC6, YC17

[Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507 Panel PWB: YC2

F12X

Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section

(1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation check. (2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (3) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check. (4) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main<=>Scan] Main/Engine PWB: YC506, YC31 ISU side: CIS, sensor, motor [Main<=>DP] Main/Engine PWB: YC509, YC33, YC34 DP side: cis. sensor, motor

[Main<=>Scan] Main/Engine PWB: YC506, YC31 ISU side: CIS, sensor, motor [Main<=>DP] Main/Engine PWB: YC509, YC33, YC34 DP side: cis. sensor, motor

7-143

TSI model

LCD model

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Number

Contents

Verification procedure & check point

Remarks

TSI model

LCD model

F14X

Abnormality detecting in a FAX control part

(1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation check. (2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (3) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671. * Notes(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.) (4) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check. (5) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Checking FAX connector connection] I/F dedicate to FAX (Not eKUIO) [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

[Checking FAX connector connection] I/F dedicate to FAX (Not eKUIO) [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

F15X

Abnormality detecting in an authentication device control section

Authentication device: IC card reader (1) Check the harness between authentication device <=>Main/ etc. Engine PWBs, and the connection situation of a connector, and perform an operation check. (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (3) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main unit<=>Authentication device] USB Host connector [Main/Engine PWB<=>USB connector] Main/Engine PWB: YC510

[Main unit<=>Authentication device] USB Host connector [Main/Engine PWB<=>USB connector] Main/Engine PWB: YC510

F18X

Abnormality detecting in a Video control section (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation check. (2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (3) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Video device] Main/Engine PWB: YC1, YC2, YC3, YC5, YC6, YC7, YC9, YC10, YC14, YC21, YC23

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Video device] Main/Engine PWB: YC1, YC2, YC3, YC5, YC6, YC7, YC9, YC10, YC14, YC21, YC23

F1DX

Abnormality detecting of the image memory Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an opera- * Poor arrangement of F1D4:Random Access Memory tion check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (1) Initialization of a set point (U021) (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F21X, F22X, F23X

Abnormality detecting in an image-processing part

(1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation check. (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (3) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F24X

Abnormality detecting in the system Management Department

(1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation check. (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (3) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Support [Controller failure] Cleared by turning power off and on only USB log is required for investigation [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM]YS500

Support [Controller failure] Cleared by turning power off and on only USB log is required for investigation [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F25X

Abnormality detecting in a network management department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an opera- * It may occur according to a visitor’s network environment. tion check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service headquarters.

[Main unit<=>Outside network] Ethernet connector

[Main unit<=>Outside network] Ethernet connector

7-144

* F248 is the abnormalities of a printer process.In recurring by specific printer data, please give me cooperation at acquisition of capture data and USBLOG.

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Number

Contents

Verification procedure & check point

Remarks

TSI model

LCD model

F26X, F27X, F28X, F29X, F2AX

Abnormality detecting in the system Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

(SSM:F26X) [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

(SSM:F26X) [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F2BX, F2CX, F2DX, F2EX, F2FX, F30X, F31X, F32X

Abnormality detecting in a network control part

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.(Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture acquisition)

[Main unit<=>Outside network] Ethernet connector

[Main unit<=>Outside network] Ethernet connector

F33X

Abnormality detecting in the Scan Management Department

(1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation check. (2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (3) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check. (4) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main<=>Scan] Main/Engine PWB: YC506, YC31 ISU side: CIS, sensor, motor [Main<=>DP] Main/Engine PWB: YC509, YC33, YC34 DP side: cis. sensor, motor

[Main<=>Scan] Main/Engine PWB: YC506, YC31 ISU side: CIS, sensor, motor [Main<=>DP] Main/Engine PWB: YC509, YC33, YC34 DP side: cis. sensor, motor

F34X

Abnormality detecting in the Panel Management Department

(1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main/Engine PWBs, and the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation check. * Notes (2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. (3) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check. (4) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Error in panel process (Command response timeout, etc.) Regarding hardware factor, PanelMain/Engine PWB harness connector disconnection can be considered [Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507, YC511, YC514Panel PWB: YC4, YC6, YC17

Error in panel process (command response timeout, etc.) Not occurring with hardware factor [Main<=>Panel I/F] Main/Engine PWB: YC507, YC511, YC514 Panel PWB: YC4, YC6, YC17

F35X

Abnormality detecting in the printing controlling Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

*Combined PWB of Main and Engine [Main/Engine PWB<=>Video device] Main/Engine PWB: YC1, YC2, YC3, YC5, YC6, YC7, YC9, YC10, YC14, YC21, YC23

*Combined PWB of Main and Engine [Main/Engine PWB<=>Video device] Main/Engine PWB: YC1, YC2, YC3, YC5, YC6, YC7, YC9, YC10, YC14, YC21, YC23

F37X

Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

No flash memory for FAX data [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

No flash memory for FAX data [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

F38X

Abnormality detecting in the authentication authorized Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main unit<=>Authentication device] USB Host connector [Main/Engine PWB<=>USB connector] Main/Engine PWB: YC510

[Main unit<=>Authentication device] USB Host connector [Main/Engine PWB<=>USB connector] Main/Engine PWB: YC510

7-145

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Number

Contents

F3AX, F3BX, F3CX, F3DX, F3EX, F3FX, F40X, F41X, F42X, F43X, F44X, F45X

Abnormality detecting in the Entity Management Department

F46X

Verification procedure & check point

Remarks

TSI model

LCD model

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part (1) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of a printer (2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG — carry out process.In recurring by specific printer (Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) data, please give me cooperation at acquisition of capture data and USBLOG.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F47X, F48X, F49X

Abnormality detecting of an image editing processing part

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Not Support(F49X) [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

Not Support(F49X) [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F4DX, F4EX

Abnormality detecting in the Entity Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F4FX

Abnormality detecting in the JOB Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is needed for analysis, please give me cooperation of acquisition.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F50X

Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is needed for analysis, please give me cooperation of acquisition.

No flash memory for FAX data HDD non-standard [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

No flash memory for FAX data HDD non-standard [Main<=>FAX] Main/Engine PWB: YC508 FAX PWB: CN4

F51X, F52X, F53X, F55X, F56X, F57X

Abnormality detecting in a JOB execution part

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is needed for analysis, please give me cooperation of acquisition.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F58X, F59X, F5AX, F5BX, F5CX, F5DX, F5EX

Abnormality detecting in the various-services Management Department

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an opera- Since the USB log at the time of occurrence is needed for analysis, please tion check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. give me cooperation of acquisition. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F5DX (especially X is 9, A, B, C or D) occurs at Fax reception or URDS related process. Check transmission data from PC [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

F5DX (especially X is 9, A, B, C or D) occurs at Fax reception or URDS related process. Check transmission data from PC [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

7-146

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Number

Contents

Verification procedure & check point

Remarks Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is needed for analysis, please give me cooperation of acquisition.

F5FX

Abnormality detecting in a service execution part

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F62X

Abnormality detecting in a service execution part

F63X

F69X, F6AX, F6BX, F6CX,

TSI model

LCD model

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an opera- Since the USB log at the time of occurrence is needed for analysis, please tion check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. give me cooperation of acquisition. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

Please cooperate to retrieve USB log that is necessary for analysis [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

Please cooperate to retrieve USB log that is necessary for analysis [Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

Abnormality detecting in a device control section

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500

Abnormality detecting in a HyPAS-E part

(1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. (2) Exchange a Main/Engine PWB and perform an operation check. (3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

[Main/Engine PWB<=>Option DIMM] YS500 TSI model only

7-147

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-4 FAX Related Errors (1) FAX Related Errors

No.

Contents

(1)

C0030: FAX PWB system error

(2)

C0070: FAX PWB compatibility error

(3)

C0830: FAX flash program area checksum error

(4)

C0870: FAX PWB large capacity data transfer error

(5)

C0920: FAX file system error

(6)

FAX cannot be sent

Content of FAX Related Errors (1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error The FAX PWB does not operate properly. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

2

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

3

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

4

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-2) C0070: FAX PWB compatibility error The FAX and the controller mismatch. Step 1

Check description Checking the connection

Assumed cause

Measures

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

7-148

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the FAX PWB

The incompatible FAX PWB is installed.

Install the FAX PWB for the applicable model.

3

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

Reference

(1-3) C0830: FAX flash program area checksum error The FAX program saved in the flash memory is broken. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

3

Initializing the fax

The data in the FAX PWB is faulty.

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

4

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-4) C0870: FAX PWB large capacity data transfer error The DMA transfer failed between the controller and FAX PWB. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

2

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

3

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

7-149

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(1-5) C0920: FAX file system error The file system in the FAX PWB flash memory is broken. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB does not operate properly.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Main/engine PWB (YC508) — FAX PWB

3

Initializing the fax

FAX control values are incorrect

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

4

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

5

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(1-6) FAX cannot be sent Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The modular cable discon- Reconnect the modular nects. cable.

2

Changing the connection

If the adapter and the switching device or the like is connected to the telephone line, it is affected.

3

Changing the settings

The line settings are incor- Correct the line settings. rect. (Reduce the transmission speed, etc.)

4

Checking the destination unit

The destination unit is busy.

Wait a while and then redial the number if busy tones are heard.

5

(In case calling but not answered by the destination machine) Request to the destination machine

The modular cable of the destination machine comes off.

Request the destination unit to reconnect the modular cable.

6

(In case calling but not answered by the destination machine) Request to the destination machine

The manual reception is set at the destination machine.

Ask the destination unit to change the reception settings.

7-150

Directly connect the main unit to the telephone line.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 7

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Correcting the destination machine FAX number

When transmitting the data to the other country, the communication line is automatically cut.

Input a pause at the last of the destination FAX number.

7-151

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2) Error codes Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5digit number) Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits small classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.

Error code EXXXXX UXXXXX

Detailed classification of error code General classification of error code Error code indication

Figure 7-1

Communication Errors Error code

Contents

U00000/E00000

No response or busy after the set times of redials.

U00100/E00100

Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

U00200/E00200

Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.

U00300/E00300

Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.

U00430/E00430

Communication was canceled with the permission number mismatch at the polling request (occurred at the sender side) or at the sub address bulletin board transmission request (occurred at the sender side).

U00431/E00431

An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not registered.

U00432/E00432

A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.

U00433/E00433

A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address box.

U00440/E00440

Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not registered.

U00450/E00450

The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.

U00460/E00460

The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.

7-152

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

U00462/E00462

Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered.

U00601/E00601

1. The original feed jam occurs. 2. The original length exceeds the maximum allowed.

U00613/E00613

Image writing section error

U00656/E00656

The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.

U00690/E00690

System error

U00800/E00800

A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.

U00811/E00811

A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.

U00900/E00900

An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.

U01000/E01000

An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.

U01001/E01001

Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.

U01016/E01016

T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.

U01019/E01019

Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal. (between own machines)

U01020/E01020

Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)

U01021/E01021

Command send retry time has exceeded since message signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)

U01022/E01022

Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)

U01028/E01028

T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)

U01052/E01052

DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)

U01080/E01080

PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.

U01092/E01092

Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed at V.34 sending.

U01093/E01093

A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.

U01094/E01094

DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.

U01095/E01095

Command send retrial time is exceeded since significant signal is not received after sending (PPS) Q signal at phase D during transmission.

U01096/E01096

DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.

U01097/E01097

The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.

U01100/E01100

Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.

U01101/E01101

Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.

U01102/E01102

DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.

U01110/E01110

No response is received after sending DIS signal.

U01111/E01111

No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.

U01113/E01113

No response after transmitting an FTT signal.

7-153

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

U01125/E01125

No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)

U01129/E01129

No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)

U01141/E01141

DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.

U01143/E01143

DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.

U01155/E01155

DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)

U01160/E01160

Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.

U01162/E01162

Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.

U01191/E01191

Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.

U01193/E01193

No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.

U01194/E01194

DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.

U01195/E01195

No message is received at phase C during reception.

U01196/E01196

Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.

U01400/E01400

An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.

U01500/E01500

A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.

U01600/E01600

A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.

U01700/E01700

A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

U01720/E01720

The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).

U01721/E01721

The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the destination unit.

U01800/E01800

A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

U01810/E01810

A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).

U01820/E01820

The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).

U01821/E01821

The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the destination unit.

U03000/E03000

No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.

U03200/E03200

In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box specified by the destination unit.

U03300/E03300

Communication was canceled with the permission ID and permitted phone number mismatch at the polling reception (destination is own machine) or at the sub address bulletin board reception.

U03400/E03400

Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).

U03500/E03500

In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password was not registered in the destination unit.

U03600/E03600

An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified sub address password.

U03700/E03700

Destination machine did not have the sub address bulletin board transmission function at the sub address bulletin board reception, or no data was accumulated in any of the destination machine sub address confidential box.

U04000/E04000

In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was not registered in the destination unit.

7-154

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Error code

Contents

U04100/E04100

The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was executed.

U04200/E04200

In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.

U04300/E04300

The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the other machine.

U04400/E04400

Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.

U04500/E04500

Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.

U05100/E05100

The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).

U05200/E05200

Communication was canceled since the permitted FAX and ID number mismatched or matched the denied FAX number at the restricted reception (password check reception) or the destination machine did not notify the own phone number.

U05300/E05300

Communication was canceled since the destination machine restricted reception with password check and the permission FAX and ID number mismatched or matched the denied FAX number, or own machine did not notify the own phone number.

U14000/E14000

Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.

U14100/E14100

In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.

U19000/E19000

Memory overflowed during memory reception.

U19100/E19100

Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.

U19300/E19300

Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.

Content of Communication Errors U00000/E00000 Step 1

Check description Resending

Assumed cause The status is Busy.

Measures

Reference

Check if the destination unit can receive the data and resend the data if there is no particular problem.

U00100/E00100 Step 1

Check description Resending

Assumed cause Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

7-155

Measures Resend.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U00200/E00200 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Request to the destination unit

Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.

Suspend resending from the destination unit or request the destination unit to resend the data.

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Request to the destination unit

Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.

Reference

U00300/E00300 Step 1

Reference

Request the destination unit to set the recording papers.

U00430/E00430 Step 1

Check description Checking the permitted number

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted number letin board transmission were requested, but the communication was interrupted because the permitted ID did not match. (It occurs in the transmitting unit.)

U00431/E00431 Step 1

Check description Request to the destination unit

Assumed cause An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not registered.

Measures

Reference

Request the sub address password registration to the destination machine.

U00432/E00432 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the sub address password

A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.

Send by using correct the sub address password.

7-156

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U00433/E00433 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Checking the sub address box

A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address box.

Measures

Reference

Set data in the sub address box.

U00440/E00440 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Checking the sub address password

Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not registered.

Measures

Reference

Register the sub address password.

U00450/E00450 Step 1

Check description Checking the permitted number

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

Register the permitted numThe reception was interrupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ted ID and FAX number did machine side. not match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.

U00460/E00460 Step 1

Check description Checking the encryption key

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

Register an encrypted box The encryption reception number. was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.

U00462/E00462 Step 1

Check description Checking the encryption key

Assumed cause Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered.

7-157

Measures Register an encryption key.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U00601/E00601 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Clearing the paper jam

Original jam

Clear original feed jam and resend.

2

Checking the original

The original length exceeds the maximum allowed.

Check if the original length does not exceed 1.6 meter and resend.

Reference

U00613/E00613 Step 1

Check description Checking the service call error record

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

Image writing section error Check the service call error record and perform the corrective actions.

U00656/E00656 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Transmission was interrupted because there was an error in the modem.

Resend.

2

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

Transmission was interrupted because there was an error in the modem.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

3

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to est version. the latest version.

4

Initializing the fax

The FAX initial value was changed.

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

5

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

Reference

U00690/E00690 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

System error

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Measures for the system error

System error in the main unit

Perform the corrective actions for the system error in the main unit.

7-158

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U00800/E00800 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Checking the transmit start speed

A page was not correctly transmitted because of the receiving an RTN or PIN signal during communication.

In case pages are not properly sent and resending does not solve it, reduce transmit start speed and resend the data.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U00811/E00811 Step 1

Check description Resending

A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.

Reference

In case pages are not properly sent and resending does not solve it, reduce transmit start speed and resend the data.

U00900/E00900 Step 1

Check description Resending

Assumed cause

Measures

An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.

Resend the page if there is a page not transmitted properly.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U01000/E01000 Step

Check description

1

Resending

An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-159

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01001/E01001 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01016/E01016 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01019/E01019 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Resend. Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal. (between own machines)

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-160

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01020/E01020 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Resend. Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01021/E01021 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Command send retry time has exceeded since message signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01022/E01022 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Resend. Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-161

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01028/E01028 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01052/E01052 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01080/E01080 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-162

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01092/E01092 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed at V.34 sending.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01093/E01093 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The modem is not detected since the received signal is attenuated with its frequency response.

Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX Mdm Level]. (Initial setting: 43dBm)

2

Checking the settings

The modem is not detected since the received signal is attenuated with its frequency response.

Set the G3 reception cable equalizer by executing U650 [Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial value: 0dBm)

Reference

U01094/E01094 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-163

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01095/E01095 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Command send retrial time is exceeded since significant signal is not received after sending (PPS) Q signal at phase D during transmission.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01096/E01096 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

DCN signal or invalid com- Resend. mand is received at phase D during transmission.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01097/E01097 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

The preset number of com- Resend. mand retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-164

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01100/E01100 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01101/E01101 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01102/E01102 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01110/E01110 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

No response is received after sending DIS signal.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

7-165

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01111/E01111 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01113/E01113 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The modem is not detected since the received signal is attenuated with its frequency response.

Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX Mdm Level]. (Initial setting: 43dBm)

2

Checking the settings

The modem is not detected since the received signal is attenuated with its frequency response.

Set the G3 reception cable equalizer by executing U650 [Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial value: 0dBm)

Reference

U01125/E01125 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01129/E01129 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

7-166

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01141/E01141 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01143/E01143 Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.

Measures

Reference

Set the G3 reception cable equalizer by executing U650 [Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial value: 0dBm)

U01155/E01155 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01160/E01160 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01162/E01162 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

7-167

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01191/E01191 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01193/E01193 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.

Extend T2 time-out time at U641 [T2 Time Out]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to 150.)

2

Checking the settings

Line condition is poor.

Set the corrective measures for echoes at the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial setting: 75)

3

Changing the transmit start timing

Line condition is poor.

Change the reception starting speed to «9600bps» or less.

Reference

U01194/E01194 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request for resending

DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.

Request resending.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01195/E01195 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

No message is received at phase C during reception.

Extend T2 time-out time at U641 [T2 Time Out]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to 150.)

2

Checking the settings

Line condition is poor.

Set the corrective measures for echoes at the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial setting: 75)

3

Changing the transmit start timing

Line condition is poor.

Change the reception starting speed to «9600bps» or less.

7-168

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01196/E01196 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

Error line control overflow Resend. and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Reference

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

U01400/E01400 Step

Assumed cause

Measures

«#» exists in advance of «x» on the phone numbers of the destination unit, so it is processed as the invalid dial line.

Delete «#» from the registered numbers if «#» exists in advance of «x» on the phone numbers of the destination unit.

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the transmit start speed

The communication line is the poor condition.

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

The communication line condition is poor and an error frequently occurs.

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

1

Check description Checking the telephone number

Reference

U01500/E01500 Step

Reference

U01600/E01600 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Request to the destination unit

The communication line is the poor condition.

Request the destination unit to resend the data after reducing the transmit start speed.

2

Changing the transmit start timing

The communication line condition is poor and an error frequently occurs.

Request the destination machine re-transmission after executing U630 [RX Speed] to lower the reception speed.

7-169

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01700/E01700 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01720/E01720 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

Reference

U01721/E01721 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the destination unit.

Resend.

2

Checking the transmit start speed

Line condition is poor. (Destination unit)

Reduce transmit start speed by executing [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the data.

3

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the transmit start speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-170

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U01800/E01800 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request to the destination unit

A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

Request the destination unit to resend the data after reducing the transmit start speed.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01810/E01810 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request to the destination unit

A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).

Request the destination unit to resend the data after reducing the transmit start speed.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01820/E01820 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request to the destination unit

A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).

Request the destination unit to resend the data after reducing the transmit start speed.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

Reference

U01821/E01821 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Request to the destination unit

The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the destination unit.

Request the destination unit to resend the data after reducing the transmit start speed.

2

Changing the initial value

Line condition is poor. (Own machine)

Change the reception speed by executing U630 [RX Speed].

7-171

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U03000/E03000 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Request to the destination unit

No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.

Measures

Reference

Request the destination unit to set the originals.

U03200/E03200 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Request to the destination unit

There is no data in the sub address box in the main unit that are specified from the destination unit.

Measures

Reference

Request the destination unit to store the original data in the sub address box.

U03300/E03300 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Request to the destination unit

The permitted ID and FAX number registered in the destination unit are incorrect.

Request the destination unit to register the own ID and the own FAX number as the permitted ID and the permitted FAX number.

Assumed cause

Measures

In polling reception, the operation was interrupted because the password input in the destination unit and the own FAX number in the receiver did not match.

Revise it so that the password input at the destination machine is consistent with the receiver’s own FAX ID to receive again.

Assumed cause

Measures

In polling reception, the operation was interrupted because the password input in the destination unit and the own FAX number in the receiver did not match.

Revise it so that the password input at the destination machine is consistent with the receiver’s own FAX ID to receive again.

Reference

U03400/E03400 Step 1

Check description Checking the destination unit

Reference

U03500/E03500 Step 1

Check description Checking the destination unit

7-172

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U03600/E03600 Step 1

Check description Resending

Assumed cause

Measures

Reception was canceled since the sub address password was unmatched that was specified at the sub address bulletin board reception.

Input the sub address password registered by the destination machine and retransmit.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U03700/E03700 Step 1

Check description Checking the functions

Destination machine has no sub address bulletin board communication function or no originals are stored in any original delivery box (sub address box).

Reference

Check if the destination unit has a sub address bulletin board communication function. If available, request the destination unit to save the original data in the sub address box.

U04000/E04000 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request to the destination unit

The original was transmitted to the sub address box, but the specified box was not registered in the destination unit that is our own model.

Request the sub address password registration to the destination machine.

2

Checking the sub address of the FAX transmission condition

The original was transmitted to the sub address box in the destination unit that is our own model, but the sub address of the transmission condition did not match.

Match the sub address in the FAX forward condition

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U04100/E04100 Step 1

Check description Resending

The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was executed.

7-173

Transmit the data according to the reception function in the destination unit.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U04200/E04200 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Request to the destination unit

In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.

Request the destination unit to register the encrypted box.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U04300/E04300 Step 1

Check description Resending

Reference

Transmit the data according The encryption transmisto the reception function in sion was carried out, but there is no encryption func- the destination unit. tion at the other machine.

U04400/E04400 Step 1

Check description Checking the encryption key

Assumed cause Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.

Measures

Reference

Request resending after checking the encryption key registered in the receiving and sending machines.

U04500/E04500 Step 1

Check description Checking the encryption key

Assumed cause Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.

Measures

Reference

Request resending after checking the encryption key registered in the receiving and sending machines.

U05100/E05100 Step 1

Check description Checking the permitted number

Assumed cause

Measures

Resend after confirming the The transmission was authorization number that interrupted because the has been registered. permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).

7-174

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U05200/E05200 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The number does not match a permitted FAX number / ID, or it matches a rejected FAX number.

Change the restricted reception settings.

2

Request to the destination unit

The own telephone number is not informed from the destination unit.

Request the destination unit to register the own telephone number.

Reference

U05300/E05300 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Request to the destination unit

The number does not match a permitted FAX number / ID, or it matches a rejected FAX number.

Ask the destination unit to change the restricted reception settings.

2

Request to the destination unit

The main unit did not acknowledge its phone number in question .

Request the destination unit to register the own telephone number.

Reference

U14000/E14000 Step 1

Check description Checking the memory

Assumed cause The reception to the FAX box was interrupted due to memory overflow in its unit.

Measures

Reference

Print the document saved in the memory and free up the memory. Or cancel the FAX box reception.

U14100/E14100 Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Request to the destination unit

Transmission was interrupted due to the memory overflow in the destination unit when transmitting into the sub address box.

Measures

Reference

Request the destination unit to release memory.

U19000/E19000 Step 1

Check description Checking the memory

Assumed cause The reception was interrupted due to the memory overflow in the main unit during memory reception.

7-175

Measures Release memory by printing originals stored in memory.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

U19100/E19100 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resending

The transmission was interrupted because there is an error in the data during transmission.

Resend.

2

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The transmission was interrupted because there is an error in the data during transmission.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

U19300/E19300 Step

Check description

1

Resending

The transmission was interrupted because there is an error in the data during transmission.

Resend.

2

Reinstalling the FAX PWB

The transmission was interrupted because there is an error in the data during transmission.

Turn off the power switch and pull out the power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then, turn on the power switch.

3

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to est version. the latest version.

4

Initializing the fax

The FAX initial value was changed.

Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.

5

Replacing the FAX PWB

The FAX PWB is faulty.

Replace the FAX PWB.

7-176

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-5 Send Related Errors (1) Send Related Errors

No.

Contents

(1)

The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings

(2)

Sending error 2203 does not disappear.

(3)

Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent

Content of Send Related Errors (1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause The incorrect port number has been set.

Measures

Reference

Change the SMB port number from «139» to «445».

(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear. Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause The Windows Fire Wall is not properly set. (Windows Vista / 7 /

Measures

Reference

Open [Control Panel] > [System&Security] >[Windows Firewall] and select [Allow programs or functions via Windows Firewall]. Next, check [File and Printer Sharing] and check the checkbox to the right.

(1-3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause Continuous Scan is not enabled.

7-177

Measures • TSI model: [System Menu/ Counter] key > [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > [Continuous Scan (Send/ Store)] > [On] • LCD model: [System Menu/ Counter] key > [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] > [Continuous Scan-Other] > Select [On]

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) (2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Error code

Contents

1101

SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1102

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1104

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1105

Invalid SMTP protocol

1106

The sender address is not set.

2101

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

2102

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

2103

The server cannot establish communication.

2201

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

2202

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

2204

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

3101

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

3201

No SMTP authentication is found.

4803

Failed to establish the SSL session.

Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes Scan to E-mail error code : 1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the SMTP/POP3 server name

SMTP / POP3 server name is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. Step 1

Check description Checking the SMTP/POP3 server name

Assumed cause The user name or the password is incorrect.

7-178

Measures Correct the SMTP / POP3 user name or password at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step 2

Check description Checking the SMTP/POP3 server

Assumed cause The SMTP/POP3 server settings are incorrect.

Measures

Reference

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

Measures

Reference

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1105 Invalid SMTP protocol Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause Invalid SMTP protocol

Measures

Reference

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1106 The sender address is not set. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause The sender address is not set.

Measures

Reference

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the SMTP/POP3 server name

SMTP / POP3 server name is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

2

Checking the LAN cable

The LAN cable is not connected to the main unit.

Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.

3

Checking the SMTP/POP3 port No.

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

7-179

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

5

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

6

Checking the settings

The SMTP/POP3 server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the SMTP/POP3 server name

SMTP / POP3 server name is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

2

Checking the SMTP/POP3 port No.

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

5

Checking the settings

The SMTP/POP3 server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 2103 The server cannot establish communication. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the SMTP/POP3 server name

SMTP / POP3 server name is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

2

Checking the SMTP/POP3 port No.

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

5

Checking the settings

The SMTP/POP3 server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

7-180

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to E-mail error code : 2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause The network settings are incorrect.

Measures

Reference

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

3

Checking the settings

The SMTP/POP3 server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

7-181

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to E-mail error code : 3201 No SMTP authentication is found. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause

Measures

The SMTP server settings are incorrect.

Set the correct SMTP Authentication Protocol at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the command center.

Reference

Scan to E-mail error code : 4803 Failed to establish the SSL session. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the self-signed certificate

The self-signed certificate of the device is incorrect.

Correct the certificates in the Security Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The service certificate settings are incorrect.

Correct the certificates in the Security Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The SMTP/POP3 settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes

Error code

Contents

1101

FTP server does not exist on the network.

1102

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1105

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1131

Initializing TLS has failed.

1132

TLS negotiation has failed.

2101

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

2102

Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

2103

The server cannot establish communication.

2201

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

2202

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

2203

No response from the server during a certain period of time.

2231

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

3101

FTP server responded with an error.

7-182

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes Scan to FTP error code : 1101 FTP server does not exist on the network. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the FTP host name

The FTP host name is incorrect.

Correct the FTP host name via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 1102 Login to the FTP server has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the FTP host name

The user name or the password is incorrect.

Correct the user name and the password.

2

Checking the FTP server

FTP server is improper.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 1105 FTP protocol is not enabled. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause FTP protocol is not enabled.

Measures

Reference

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 1131 Initializing TLS has failed. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause The security settings of the device are incorrect.

7-183

Measures Correct the settings in the Security Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to FTP error code : 1132 TLS negotiation has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The security settings of the device are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Security Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the FTP host name

The FTP host name is incorrect.

Correct the FTP host name via the Command Center.

2

Checking the LAN cable

The LAN cable is not connected to the main unit.

Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.

3

Checking the FTP port number

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the FTP port number.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

5

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 2102 Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

1

Checking the FTP host name

The FTP host name is incorrect.

Correct the FTP host name via the Command Center.

2

Checking the FTP port number

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the FTP port number.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

5

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

7-184

Measures

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to FTP error code : 2103 The server cannot establish communication. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the FTP host name

The FTP host name is incorrect.

Correct the FTP host name via the Command Center.

2

Checking the FTP port number

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the FTP port number.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

5

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

3

Checking the destination folder name

The destination folder name is incorrect.

Set the correct destination folder.

4

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

7-185

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to FTP error code : 2203 No response from the server during a certain period of time. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to FTP error code : 3101 FTP server responded with an error. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

3

Checking the settings

The FTP server settings are incorrect.

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

7-186

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes

Error code

Contents

1101

Destination host does not exist on the network.

1102

Login to the host has failed.

1103

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1105

SMB protocol is not enabled.

2101

Login to the host has failed.

2201

Writing scanned data has failed.

2203

No response from the host during a certain period of time.

Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes Scan to SMB error code : 1101 Destination host does not exist on the network. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the destination host name

The destination host name is incorrect.

Correct the destination host name.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to SMB error code : 1102 Login to the host has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the user name and the password

The user name or the password is incorrect.

Correct the user name and the password.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The sharing settings of the destination host / folder are incorrect.

Correct the sharing settings of the destination host / folder.

7-187

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to SMB error code : 1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the host name, destination folder name and the file name

The host name, destination folder name, or the file name contains the invalid character.

Revise invalid characters in destination host name, destination folder name and file name properly.

2

Checking the destination folder name and the file name

The destination folder name or the file name is incorrect.

Revise the destination folder and file name according to the naming rules.

3

Checking the destination host and the destination folder

The destination host name or the destination folder name is incorrect.

Revise the destination host and destination folder properly.

Reference

Scan to SMB error code : 1105 SMB protocol is not enabled. Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause The settings of the SMP protocol are incorrect.

Measures

Reference

Correct the protocol in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

Scan to SMB error code : 2101 Login to the host has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the destination host name

The destination host name is incorrect.

Correct the destination host name.

2

Checking the LAN cable

The LAN cable is not connected to the main unit in the transmission (Scan to SMB).

Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.

3

Checking the SMB port No.

The port number is incorrect.

Correct the SMB port number.

4

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

5

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

7-188

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

Scan to SMB error code : 2201 Writing scanned data has failed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the scanning file name

The sending file name is incorrect.

Correct the scanning file name.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

3

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

Reference

Scan to SMB error code : 2203 No response from the host during a certain period of time. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The network settings are incorrect.

Correct the settings in the Network Settings via the Command Center.

2

Checking the settings

The network settings that the main unit is connected to are incorrect.

Correct the network settings that the main unit is connected to.

3

Checking the LAN cable

The LAN cable is not connected to the main unit in the transmission (Scan to SMB).

Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.

7-189

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-6 Print Errors No.

Contents

Condition

(1)

The paper loading message appears

(2)

The paper direction is incorrect

(3)

Paper is fed from the MP tray

(4)

Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

(5)

Data is output in monochrome

Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo Viewer)

(6)

Paper is not fed from the MP tray

MP tray setting is unmatched between the main unit side and PC side.

(7)

The same data is printed out endlessly

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

(8)

[Print Job Error] or [Printing Queue] is displayed on the PC screen and [Printer Unavailable] on the printer properties.

The main unit is not ready to print

(9)

Printer Pending message is displayed but [Pro- The main unit locks up. cessing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel.

(10)

Output is unavailable in sleep mode due to the main unit startup failure [Processing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel.

(11)

Print stops and operation lock after printing sev- The entire machine is locked up since image eral pages. No error is displayed and if directing processing is unavailable from memory shortprint, it is on hold. age.

(12)

Print out is not available from the network factor (1)

There is trouble in network or network setting is not proper.

(13)

Print out is not available from the network factor (2)

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

(14)

Print out is not available from the network factor (3)

The access point (router or hub) in the network does not operate properly.

(15)

Print out is not available from the network factor (4)

The router is faulty or the router setting is not proper.

(16)

Print out is not available from the network factor (5)

«Offline» appears and the print function is unavailable.

(17)

Print out is not available from the network factor (6)

Only one among installed PCs is unable to print. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold.

(18)

Print out is not available from the network factor (7)

The main unit IP address is changed.

(19)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1)

[Not connected] is displayed on the PC and a print job cannot be executed by error. Or [Preparing] is displayed at the main unit and jobs reside without output.

7-190

The main unit locks up.

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 No.

Contents

Condition

(20)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (2)

A PC does not recognize the main unit.

(21)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (3)

PC operation does not stabilize.

(22)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (4)

Printer port supporting the network print is not selected or not set up properly.

(23)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (5)

The incorrect printer driver was selected.

(24)

Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (6)

Installed printer driver shows «Deleting» and it remains when reinstalling it

(25)

A part of the image is missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.

(26)

«Paper Mismatch Error» appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

Content of Print Errors (1) The paper loading message appears Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Changing paper

Paper size is unmatched between the PC side output size and cassette side paper size.

Load the paper in the paper source of the size which is set at [Output Size] in [Printer Setting] > [Basis Setting] at the PC.

2

Changing the settings

Paper size displayed on the operation panel unmatched the size sent in the cassette.

Check if the paper size displayed on the operation panel matches the size of paper loaded in the paper source. If not, change the paper size in the system menu.

3

Re-setting the guide

The guide is not aligned to the paper size.

Align the paper width guide, paper guide (MP tray) or PF paper width guide (paper feeder) to the paper size and re-load paper.

4

Checking the actuator and the spring

The paper sensor does not operate properly.

The actuator or spring for the paper sensor, MP paper sensor or PF paper sensor is deformed or does not operate properly, replace it.

5

Checking the situation

The print data generated by a certain application (Word, etc.) is faulty.

Check if the print data not generated by a certain application (Word, etc.) is output properly. And then, change the application setting if necessary.

7-191

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

6

Changing the settings

[Orientation] is not set properly.

7

(When feeding from the Paper size and media type MP tray) Changing the set- at the main unit side ting unmatched the output size and media type set at the PC side.

Measures

Reference

Check the orientation with the preview before print and change the orientation at [Orientation] in the page layout setting of the certain application (Word, etc.). If [Paper Size] and [Media Type] for the MP tray set the main unit unmatched [Output Size] and [Media Type] respectively set at [Printer Properties] > [Preferences] of the PC setting [Paper Source: MP tray], change the main unit setting to match the PC.

(2) The paper direction is incorrect Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

There is a communication error.

Check if there is no job in process in the PC and main unit. Next, turn the main unit power off and disconnect the power cord. After 5s, reconnect the power cord and turn the power on.

2

Checking the font list

Font for special data is not resident.

After confirming Excel or Word output is normal, output Font List to check fonts for special data are resident.

3

Selecting the bitmap font

The bitmap font (default setting) is unselected.

Select the bitmap font (default setting) and print the data.

4

Reinstalling the printer driver

The printer driver is faulty.

Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.

Reference

(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray Step 1

Check description (TSI model) Changing the setting

Assumed cause [Auto Cassette] is set to [On].

7-192

Measures To prevent paper feed in case no paper is available in the cassette selected, change [Auto Cassette Switching] to [Off].

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

(LCD model) Changing the setting

[Auto Cassette] is set to [On].

To prevent paper feed in case no paper is available in the cassette selected, change [Auto Cassette Switching] to [Off].

3

Changing the settings

[Media type] at the PC side is different from the one at the main unit.

Check the media type setting of the main unit cassette and MP tray. Next, change [Media Type] at the PC side in [Printer Properties] > [Preferences] to match the main unit setting.

4

Changing the settings

[Media type] setting of the main unit cassette and MP tray is same.

Set the different media types for the cassette and the MP tray at the main unit.

Reference

(4) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

There is a communication error.

Check if there is no job in process in the PC and main unit. Next, turn the main unit power off and disconnect the power cord. After 5s, reconnect the power cord and turn the power on.

2

Checking the font list

Font for special data is not resident.

After confirming Excel or Word output is normal, output Font List to check fonts for special data are resident.

3

Selecting the bitmap font

The bitmap font (default setting) is unselected.

Select the bitmap font (default setting) and print the data.

4

Reinstalling the printer driver

The printer driver is faulty.

Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.

Reference

(5) Data is output in monochrome Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo Viewer) Step 1

Check description Checking the settings

Assumed cause

Measures

The [Color Mode] setting in the [Imaging] tab in the print settings at the PC is incorrect.

Check the color mode in the [Imaging tab] in the print settings at the PC and change to «Full color» if the color mode was set to «Black».

7-193

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the settings

The option or printer properties are not properly set up

Change [Color Mode] to [Full Color] from Page Setting of special application, Excel, etc.

3

Changing the printing method

The application is incompatible.

Directly print JPEG data instead of pasting it on Excel, etc.

Reference

(6) Paper is not fed from the MP tray MP tray setting is unmatched between the main unit side and PC side. Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause

Measures

Paper size and media type at the main unit side unmatched the output size and media type set at the PC side.

If [Paper Size] and [Media Type] for the MP tray set the main unit unmatched [Output Size] and [Media Type] respectively set at [Printer Properties] > [Preferences] of the PC setting [Paper Source: MP tray], change the main unit setting to match the PC.

Reference

(7) The same data is printed out endlessly A PC (spooler) does not properly operate. Step 1

Check description Cancelling the job

Assumed cause The generated data is faulty.

Measures

Reference

Cancel print jobs spooled by PC and reprint them.

(8) [Print Job Error] or [Printing Queue] is displayed on the PC screen and [Printer Unavailable] on the printer properties. The main unit is not ready to print Step 1

Check description Clearing the error

Assumed cause

Measures

The main unit is not ready to print

Check if an error is displayed on the operation panel or [Attention] lamp turns on and clear the error if necessary.

7-194

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(9) Printer Pending message is displayed but [Processing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel. The main unit locks up. Step 1

Check description Resetting the main power

Assumed cause

Measures

The main unit is not ready to print

After confirming no error is displayed on the operation panel, cancel print jobs from all the PCs. Next, turn the power off and disconnect the power cord. When passing 5s, reconnect the power cord and turn the power on.

Reference

(10)Output is unavailable in sleep mode due to the main unit startup failure (11) [Processing] or [Memory] lamp turns on on the operation panel. The main unit locks up. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the est version. latest version.

2

Changing the settings

The sleep level is not set to Quick Recovery mode.

Reference

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch. After that, set the Sleep Level to Quick Recovery.

(12)Print stops and operation lock after printing several pages. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold. The entire machine is locked up since image processing is unavailable from memory shortage. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Resetting the main power

The main unit locks up.

If the operation panel or the buttons are not active, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After passing 5s, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

2

Checking the situation

The data processing in a certain PC is faulty.

Check if it occurs with print from other PC in the network. If it only occurs at the certain PC, print from other PC.

7-195

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

3

Changing the settings

The application is not prop- Check if it occurs with the erly set. certain application or file (large size file such as CAD data) and change the setting of the application or refer to Help of the application.

4

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to est version. the latest version.

5

Cancelling the job

Processing fails.

Reference

Cancel the job in process in the main unit job status and reprint it.

(13)Print out is not available from the network factor (1) There is trouble in network or network setting is not proper. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cancelling the job

There is trouble in the network.

Check if the [Memory] lamp on the operation panel of the main unit is blinking. If not, cancel the job in process and reprint it.

2

Executing the error correc- There is trouble in the nettion work.

If a print error is displayed on the operation panel or PC screen, clear the error such as toner related and paper jam.

3

Re-setting the network

There is trouble in the network.

Check the main unit IP address with the user status page, etc. and check if Command Center can be opened with the IP address. If not, reconfigure the network.

4

Checking the network

There is trouble in the network.

Check if the internet connection is available. If not, repair the network connection.

5

Restarting up

There is trouble in the network.

Reconnect the network cable and restart the router or hub (concentrator).

6

Restarting up

The PC or the main unit locks up.

Restart the PC or main unit to reprint.

Reference

(14)Print out is not available from the network factor (2) The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected. Step 1

Check description Checking the connection

Assumed cause The network cable is not connected properly.

7-196

Measures Reconnect the network cable in between the main unit and PC.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Restarting up

The main unit or the PC does not properly start up.

Restart the main unit and then restart the PC.

3

Replacing the Ethernet cable

The Ethernet cable is faulty.

Replace the Ethernet cable.

4

Changing the connection

Another network is faulty.

Directly connect the main unit to the PC with the cross cable, and then check if the same data can be printed out.

Reference

(15)Print out is not available from the network factor (3) The access point (router or hub) in the network does not operate properly. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Restarting up

The router or the hub does not properly activate.

Check if the link lamp of the router or hub (concentrator) turns on and restart it.

2

Reconnecting the Ethernet cable

The Ethernet cable is not connected properly.

If the link lamp turns off, disconnect and reconnect the Ethernet cable to the router and check if it turns on.

3

Replacing the Ethernet cable

The Ethernet cable is faulty.

Replace the Ethernet cable.

4

Restarting up

The router, hub, PC or the main unit do not start up properly.

If the link lamp turns on but network connection is unavailable, restart the router or hub (concentrator), and restart the PC and main unit.

Reference

(16)Print out is not available from the network factor (4) The router is faulty or the router setting is not proper. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Correcting the IP address

The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP erly set. address displayed on the status page and system menu matches the one at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC. If not, correct the IP address at the PC.

2

Correcting the printer host name

The printer host name is not properly set.

7-197

In case of the server environment, check the printer hostname. Next, check the hostname at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties]. If different, correct the PC side.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(17)Print out is not available from the network factor (5) «Offline» appears and the print function is unavailable. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Repairing the network con- There is trouble in the netnection work.

Check if the internet is available. Improve the network connection if not available.

2

Restarting up

The PC malfunctions.

When «Offline» appears on the printer driver, check if it is used in the pause or offline. Then, restart up the PC.

3

Changing the settings

The application is not prop- Check if the other data such erly set. as Excel, Word, etc. can be output and change the setting of the application.

4

Correcting the IP address

The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP erly set. address displayed on the status page and system menu matches the one at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC. If not, correct the IP address at the PC.

5

Correcting the IP address

The IP address is not prop- Check if Command Center or erly set. communication via PING is available with the IP address set up. Then, correct the IP address if necessary and restart the main unit.

6

Changing the settings

The port settings in the printer properties at the PC are incorrect.

Uncheck [Bidirectional Support] and [SNMP Status} at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC, and restart the main unit and PC.

7

Restarting up

The main unit does not start up properly.

Check if test print is available after the printer becomes Ready and restart the main unit.

Reference

(18)Print out is not available from the network factor (6) [Condition] • PC OS: Windows7 • Print file: Test Page • Connection: Wireless LAN Only one among installed PCs is unable to print. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold. Step 1

Check description Restarting up

Assumed cause The main unit or PC does not start up properly.

7-198

Measures Restart the main unit or PC.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the connection

The network cable is not connected properly.

3

Correcting the IP address

The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP erly set. address displayed on the status page and system menu matches the one at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC. If not, correct the IP address at the PC.

4

Checking the router / hub

There is trouble in the network.

Check if access via command center or PING is available and then check the hub or router.

5

Checking the settings

The printer port IP address, the SNMP of the printer driver, or the bidirectional support is not properly set.

Correct the IP address at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC, disable [SNMP Status] and [Bidirectional Support] and restart.

6

Checking the security soft- The restriction of the secu- Check if printing is available ware rity software causes the by uninstalling the security phenomenon. software or set [Exception].

Reference

Re-connect the network cable.

(19)Print out is not available from the network factor (7) The main unit IP address is changed. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Restarting up

There is trouble in the network.

If occurring in all the PC in the network, restart the router or hub (concentrator).

2

Checking the connection

The network cable is not connected properly.

Re-connect the network cable.

3

Resetting the main power

The main unit does not start up properly.

Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the power cord and turn on the power switch.

4

Correcting the IP address

IP address was changed.

Check if the main unit IP address displayed on the status page and system menu matches the one at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC. If not, correct the IP address at the PC.

5

Changing the settings

The main unit network is not set to the static IP address.

Set the network to static IP address in the system menu.

7-199

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(20)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1) [Condition] • PC OS: Windows7 • Print file: Test Page • Connection: Wireless LAN [Not connected] is displayed on the PC and a print job cannot be executed by error. Or [Preparing] is displayed at the main unit and jobs reside without output. Step 1

Check description Cancelling the job

Assumed cause Faulty print jobs remain.

Measures

Reference

Cancel print jobs residing in the printer driver.

(21)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (2) A PC does not recognize the main unit. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the settings

The printer driver is not properly set.

Check if the printer icon of the PC is [Ready] (Execute Troubleshooting by rightclicking the printer icon).

2

Installing the printer driver

The printer driver is faulty.

Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.

3

Restarting up

The PC does not start up properly.

Restart up the PC.

4

Upgrading the printer driver

The printer driver is not the latest version.

Upgrade the printer driver.

Reference

(22)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (3) PC operation does not stabilize. Step 1

Check description Restarting the PC

Assumed cause Multiple application softwares are started up or available PC memory is short.

7-200

Measures Restart up the PC.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(23)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (4) Printer port supporting the network print is not selected or not set up properly. Step 1

Check description Correcting the IP address

Assumed cause

Measures

Reference

The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP erly set. address displayed on the status page and system menu matches the one at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC. If not, correct the IP address at the PC.

(24)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (5) The incorrect printer driver was selected. Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

Installing the printer driver

The incorrect printer driver is selected.

Select the proper printer driver. If there is no proper it on the PC, install the printer driver which supports the main unit of the destination of outputting the data.

Reference

(25)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (6) Installed printer driver shows «Deleting» and it remains when reinstalling it Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cancelling the job

The print jobs remain in the spool inside the printer driver.

Cancel all the print jobs spooled in the printer driver.

2

Uninstalling the printer driver

There is the unused printer driver.

Delete the unused printer driver.

3

Restarting the print

The system is pausing.

Right click the pausing printer icon and select [Print resuming]. Then, check the ready port.

4

Correcting the IP address

The IP address is not prop- If local network is connected, erly set. check the main unit IP address with status page. next, correct the IP address at the [Port] tab of [Printer Properties] of the PC.

5

Adding the Standard TCP/ IP port

No Standard TCP/IP port is Add the main unit IP address available for the main unit in Standard TCP/IP port and print Test Page IP address.

7-201

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(26)A part of the image is missing The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Referring to Help

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.

When the phenomenon occurs with a certain file only, check if there is an abnormality in the image data.

2

Referring to Help

The data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.

Check if the image does not drop out on the print preview, and refer to the Help in the application if necessary.

3

Changing the settings

The PDL settings is incorrect.

Select «GDI compatible mode» at [PDL settings] in the print settings at the PC.

4

Firmware upgrade

The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to est version. the latest version.

Reference

(27)»Paper Mismatch Error» appears The paper size is not detected properly. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

The paper size for the MP (When feeding from the MP tray) Changing the set- tray is not properly set. ting

2

(When feeding from the MP tray) Re-setting the paper guide

3

(When feeding from the Paper size is not set propMP tray) Changing the set- erly. ting

Set the MP tray paper size from the system menu.

4

Changing the settings

Set to [Continue] at [Paper Mismatch].

The paper guide is not aligned to the paper size.

«Paper Mismatch Error» is set to [Display Error].

7-202

Select [MP tray] in [Printer Properties] > [Preferences] > [Source] and set [Print size] at the PC side. Align the paper guide to the paper size and reload paper.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-7 Error Messages No. (1)

Contents The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

Content of Error Messages (1) The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • MP paper sensor — Main/ engine PWB (YC6)

2

Replacing the actuator

The actuator is deformed.

Replace the MP paper sensor actuator.

3

Checking the MP paper sensor

The MP paper sensor is not properly connected or faulty.

Reattach the MP paper sensor. If not repaired, replace it.

4

Checking the main/engine PWB

The connector and FFC are not connected properly or the wire, FFC or PWB is faulty.

Reconnect the connector and FFC that are connected to the main/engine PWB. If the wire is pinched or scratched, or the FFC terminal is peel or deformed, correct or replace it. If not repaired, replace the main/engine PWB.

7-203

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-8 Abnormal Noise No.

Contents

Condition

(1)

Abnormal sound (basic treatment)

(2)

Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

The conveying rollers, pulleys and gears are worn down, dirty or foreign objects adhere to them

(3)

Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

(4)

Abnormal sound from the document processor

The DP conveying section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it

(5)

Abnormal sound from the exit section

The exit section is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it

(6)

Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

The primary feed section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it

(7)

Abnormal sound from the machine front side

The MP feed section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it

(8)

Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section

Friction sound between the lower exit roller bushing and stop ring due to adhesion of dirt and foreign objects

(9)

Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section

Friction sound between the lower exit pulley and shaft due to adhesion of dirt and foreign objects

(10)

Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Dirt at the fuser section, foreign object adhesion, contact of parts

(11)

Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Toner shutter open/close failure of the toner container, toner quantity lack, or toner aggregation

(12)

Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Dirt at the developer section, Foreign object adhesion or toner aggregation

(13)

Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Worn, dirt, foreign object adhesion or waste toner clogging at the drum section

(14)

The driving sound is noisy during printing

(15)

The rotation sound of the fan is noisy

Content of Abnormal Noise (1) Abnormal sound (basic treatment) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Applying the grease

Grease to each gear and bushing is not enough.

Check the rotation of the roller, pulley and gear. If not rotating smoothly, apply grease to them.

2

Checking the gear and the bushing

The parts such as each gear or bushing are not properly attached.

Reattach the gear or bushing, and apply grease.

7-204

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section The conveying rollers, pulleys and gears are worn down, dirty or foreign objects adhere to them Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning and applying the grease

The bushing or the gear is dirty or foreign objects are on them.

Clean conveying roller shafts and gears, and apply grease.

2

Replacing the bushing

The bushing is worn down. Replace the conveying roller shafts.

2

Cleaning and applying the grease

The drive gear is dirty or Clean the main motor drive foreign objects adhere to it. gear and apply grease to it.

Reference

(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit. Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the developer unit

The developer unit drive is faulty.

Check the following and correct the developer unit if necessary.
• Developer power leaks from the developer unit

2

Replacing the developer unit

The developer unit is faulty.

Replace the developer unit.

Reference

(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The DP conveying section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning and applying the grease

The bushing or the gear is dirty or foreign objects are on them.

2

Replacing the bushing

The bushing is worn down. Replace the bushing.

3

Cleaning and applying the grease

The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gear of the foreign objects adhere to it. DP feed motor, and apply grease to it.

Reference

Clean the bushings and the shafts of the DP conveying roller A, B, and then apply grease to them.

(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section The exit section is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Cleaning and applying the grease

The bushing or the gear is dirty or foreign objects are on them.

7-205

Measures Clean the upper exit pulley shaft and gear and apply grease to it.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Cleaning and applying the grease

The shaft is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it.

Clean the upper exit pulley and apply grease to it.

3

Cleaning and applying the grease

The FD guide shaft is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it.

Clean the FD guide shaft and apply grease to it.

Reference

(6) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section The primary feed section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the gear and the clutch

The parts such as the gear or the clutch are not properly attached.

Reattach the primary paper feed drive parts such as the gear or the clutch if they are not properly attached.

2

Cleaning and applying the grease

The gear, bushing, etc. are dirty or foreign objects adhere to them.

Clean the primary paper feed drive parts such as the gear or the bushing and apply the grease to them.

3

Cleaning and applying the grease

The shaft or the bushing is dirty or foreign objects adhere on them.

Clean the shaft and the bushing of the paper feed roller and apply grease to them.

Reference

(7) Abnormal sound from the machine front side The MP feed section is worn down, dirty, not attached properly or foreign objects adhere to it Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the gear and the clutch

The parts such as the gear or the clutch are not properly attached.

When the gears or the clutch in the MP paper feed drive section are not properly attached, reattach them.

2

Cleaning and applying the grease

The shaft or the bushing is dirty or foreign objects adhere on them.

Clean the shaft and the bushing of the MP paper feed roller and apply the grease to them.

3

Checking the MP separation pad

The MP separation pad surface is dirty or worn down.

Clean the MP separation pad. Then, replace it if necessary.

4

Checking the MP bottom plate

The MP bottom plate is not properly attached.

Reattach the MP bottom plate.

7-206

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(8) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section Friction sound between the lower exit roller bushing and stop ring due to adhesion of dirt and foreign objects Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning and applying the grease

The lower exit roller, bushing, stop ring, etc. are dirty or foreign objects adhere to them.

Clean the lower exit roller, bushing, stop ring, etc. and apply heat-resistant grease.

2

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser unit is faulty.

Replace the fuser unit.

Reference

(9) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section Friction sound between the lower exit pulley and shaft due to adhesion of dirt and foreign objects Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning and applying the grease

The pulley or the shaft is dirty, or foreign objects adhere on them.

Clean the lower exit roller and shaft, and apply heat-resistant grease.

2

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser unit is faulty.

Replace the fuser unit.

Reference

(10)Abnormal sound from the fuser section Dirt at the fuser section, foreign object adhesion, contact of parts Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning and applying the grease

The bushing or the gear is dirty or foreign objects are on them.

Clean the fuser belt, fuser press roller bushing and gear and apply grease.

2

Cleaning and applying the grease

The shaft is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it.

Clean the lower exit roller and shaft,etc., and apply heatresistant grease.

3

Cleaning and applying the grease

The gear is dirty or foreign objects adhere to it.

Clean the fuser drive gear and apply the grease to it.

4

Applying the grease

The grease is not enough.

Apply the grease to the pressure release cam and the frame.

5

Replacing the fuser unit

The fuser front guide is warped and contacts the fuser press roller.

Replace the fuser unit.

Reference

(11)Abnormal sound from inside the machine Toner shutter open/close failure of the toner container, toner quantity lack, or toner aggregation Step 1

Check description

Assumed cause

Checking the toner supply opening

The spring to open/close the toner shutter is caught up or deformed.

7-207

Measures Open and close the toner supply opening manually to fix the operation.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

2

Checking the toner remaining amount

The agitating paddle in the toner container is warped or toner amount is low.

Check the toner remaining amount and replace the toner container if necessary.

3

Reinstalling / replacing the toner container

The torque increases due to the toner condensation.

Shake the toner container enough and reinstall it. Or, replace it.

Reference

(12)Abnormal sound from inside the machine Dirt at the developer section, Foreign object adhesion or toner aggregation Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Checking the toner supply opening

The spring for opening and closing of the toner supply opening is hooked with the other parts, or deformed.

Open and close the toner supply opening manually to fix the operation.

2

Cleaning the developer unit

The shaft or the bushing of the developer roller is dirty or foreign objects are on them.

Check if the developer roller rotates. If not rotating smoothly, clean the shaft or the bushing of the developer roller.

3

Replacing the developer unit

Replace the developer unit. The torque inside the developer unit increased due to the toner condensation, etc.

Reference

(13)Abnormal sound from inside the machine Worn, dirt, foreign object adhesion or waste toner clogging at the drum section Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Executing Drum refresh

Toner is not enough on the drum.

Execute Drum refresh.

2

Checking the drum unit and the developer unit

The drum screw does not properly rotate.

Check if the drum screw rotates manually. Clean it if not smoothly rotated. If it is locked, replace the drum unit.

3

Cleaning and applying the grease

Foreign objects adhere to the drum drive gear cogs or grease is in shortage.

Clean the tooth of the drum drive gear and apply the grease to them.

4

Replacing the drum unit

The torque inside the drum unit increased due to the waste toner clogging, etc.

Replace the drum unit.

7-208

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(14)The driving sound is noisy during printing Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause The Quiet Mode is off.

Measures

Reference

Press [Quiet] key to set quiet mode.

(15)The rotation sound of the fan is noisy Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the fan motor

The blades of the fan motor are dirty.

Isolate the fan motor with the noisy sounds and clean the fans.

2

Reattaching / replacing the fan motor

The fan motor is faulty.

Reattach the fan motor and reconnect the connector. If not repaired, replace the fan motor.

7-209

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

7-9 Malfunction No.

Contents

Condition

(1)

The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on

(2)

Toner drops over the paper conveying section.

(3)

The login fails with other than the ID card

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

Content of Malfunction (1) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Measuring the input voltage

The power cord has no continuity.

Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.

2

Checking the power cord

The power cord is faulty.

Check the continuity in the power cord, and replace the power cord if there is no continuity.

3

Checking the power switch The power switch is faulty.

Check the continuity between the contacts of the power switch. Then, replace the power switch if there is no continuity.

4

Checking the connection

The connector is not properly connected or the wire is faulty.

Clean the terminal of the following wire connectors and reconnect the connectors. If there is no continuity, replace the wire. • Low voltage PWB (YC103) Main/engine PWB (YC20)

5

Replacing the low voltage PWB.

The low voltage PWB is faulty.

Replace the low voltage PWB.

6

Replacing the main/engine PWB

The main/engine PWB is faulty.

Replace the main/engine PWB.

Reference

(2) Toner drops over the paper conveying section. (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge) Step

Check description

Assumed cause

Measures

1

Cleaning the developer unit and drum unit

The developer unit or drum unit is dirty.

Clean the developer unit and drum unit.

2

Replacing the developer unit

The toner is deteriorated.

Replace the developer unit.

7-210

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

(3) The login fails with other than the ID card Step 1

Check description Changing the settings

Assumed cause [User/Job Account] is valid while the card authentication kit is not installed.

7-211

Measures • TSI model: Set [Card Setting] > [Keyboard Login] to [On] in the system menu. • LCD model: Set [Card Setting] > [Ten Key Login] to [On]in the system menu.

Reference

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4

8 PWBs 8-1

Description for PWB

(1) Main/Engine PWB Connector position 10

YC504

1 20

11

YC31

7

1

1

YC508

13

YC511

1

10

YC507

4

14

YC506

1

1

YC514 5 1

1

YC510

5 13

YC509 YC33

6

1

1

YC34

15

1

5

YC522 1 5

7

1 5

YC1

YC521 YC5 1

1

1 13

2

YC501

YS1

2 3 R1 L1

YC21

1

4

YC6

1

9

2 1

1

YC7

4

1

1

11

3

1

YC2

YC505

2 1

1

YC3

YC502

YC23

R10

1

YC10

L4

7

YC14

YC503

1 6

YC16 12

YC9

1

1

2

YC8 1

YC17

1

11

13

10

1

YC20

5

1

YC526

Figure 8-1 PWB photograph

Figure 8-2

8-1

YC19

12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC1: In-machine temperature sensor, Fuser pressure release motor, In-machine fan motor, Eject solenoid YC2: Temperature humidity sensor, Waste toner sensor, Thermopile YC3: Polygon motor YC5: Eraser YC6: MP paper sensor, Paper sensor, Container relay PWB YC7: Eject fan motor YC8: Inter lock switch YC9: Main motor YC10: Developer clutch, Feed clutch, Registration clutch YC14: Toner sensor YC16: Registration sensor, High voltage PWB YC17: PF-1100 YC:19 Fuser pressure release sensor, Rotation detection sensor, Eject sensor, Fuser terminal thermistor YC20: Low voltage power supply PWB YC21: MP solenoid YC23: Power switch YC31: Home position sensor, Scanner motor YC33: DP conveying motor, DP feed clutch YC34: DP opening and closing sensor, DP paper feed sensor, DP front side timing sensor, DP original detection sensor (35 ppm model only) YC34: DP opening and closing sensor, DP paper feed sensor, DP front side timing sensor, DP original detection sensor, DP back side timing sensor (40 ppm model only) YC501: USB YC502: EtherNet YC503: SD YC504: Wi-Fi YC505: APC PWB YC506: CIS YC507: Operation panel PWB(LCD model only) YC507: Operation panel PWB(TSI model only) YC508: FAX PWB (FAX model only) YC509: DPCIS (40 ppm model only) YC510: USB PWB YC511: Operation panel PWB(TSI model only) YC514: Operation panel PWB(TSI model only) YS1: EEPROM Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

1

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

2

EXISOLRE

I

0/24 V DC

Eject solenoid drive

3

PREMOTRE-

I/O

0/24 V DC

Pressure release motor drive

4

PREMOTRE+

I/O

0/24 V DC

Pressure release motor drive

5

FAN1MOTRE

I

0/24 V DC/ about12V

Left side fan drive

6

+24V6FA(FAN)

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power (When fan stops, the output is turned off)

7

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

8

INTTMP

I

Analog

In-machine temperature sensor output

8-2

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC2

1

HUMCLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Outside machine humidity sensor clock

2

HUMDATA_

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Outside machine humidity sensor clock signal

3

TMPDATA

I

Analog

Outside temperature sensor clock signal

4

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

5

FUSTMPSE1O

I

Analog

Thermopile output 0

6

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

7

+3.3V4LS

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

8

FUSTMPSE1A

I

Analog

Thermopile output A

9

TPSDA

I/O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Thermopile I2C communication data

10

TPSCL

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Thermopile I2C communication clock

11

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

12

WTOFULSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Toner full detection signal

13

+3.3V4LS

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

1

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

PMOTREN

O

0/5 V DC

Polygon motor drive signal

4

PMOTRDYN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Polygon motor rotation stability signal

5

PMOTCLKN

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Polygon motor clock

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

2

+24V6ILFERA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power (When the eraser is off, the output is turned off.)

1

+3.3V2LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

CASPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Cassette paper detection

4

+3.3V2LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

MPFPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

MPF paper detection

7

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

8

CMDATA

0/3.3 V DC

Container communication

9

—

—

—

Not used

1

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

2

FAN2MOTRE

I

0/24 V DC

Right side fan drive

1

+24V0IL

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power (When the cover is opened, the output is turned off.)

2

+24V0

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

YC3

YC5

YC6

YC7 YC8

Signal

I/O

I/O

Voltage

8-3

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC9

YC10

YC14

YC16

Signal

I/O

Voltage

1

MAIMOTDIR

O

0/5 V DC

Main motor rotaion’s direction control signal

2

MAIMOTRDYN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Main motor rotation stability signal

3

MAIMOTCLKN

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Main motor clock

4

MAIMOTREN

O

0/5 V DC

Main motor drive signal

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

+24V6IL

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power (When the cover is opened, the output is turned off.)

1

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

2

REGCLURE

I

0/24 V DC

Registration clutch drive

3

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

4

FEEDCLURE

I

0/24 V DC

Paper feed clutch drive

5

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

6

DLPCLURE

I

0/24 V DC

Developer clutch drive

7

—

—

—

Not used

1

+3.3V4LS

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

2

ITOEMPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Toner empty detection signal

3

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

1

PGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

2

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

+3.3V4LS

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

4

REGPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Registration sensor output

5

MHVCNT

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage(M) output 310uA/155uA switch

6

HVCLK

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage(D) output pulse

7

RTHVREM

O

0/5 V DC

High voltage(M,T) output off/on

8

GHVCNT

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (M) output constant voltage/ constant current switch, G terminal voltage adjustment

9

DHVCNT

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (D) output DC voltage adjustment

10

THVCNT

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (T) output constant current off/on (output adjustment)

11

+24V6ILF

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power (When the cover is opened, the output is turned off.)

12

SHVCNT

O

Analog

High voltage (S) output off/on (output adjustment) : Japanese specification only

8-4

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-4 Connector

Pin

YC17

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

2

+3.3V4LSF

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

3

+3.3V2

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

4

PFINT

I

0/3.3 V DC

PF recovery factor detection

5

PFRDY

I

0/3.3 V DC

PF ready signal

6

PFSEL0

O

0/3.3 V DC

PF select 1 signal

7

PFSEL1

O

0/3.3 V DC

PF select 2 signal

8

PFCLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) PF clock

9

PFTXD

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) PF data sending signal

10

PFRXD

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) PF data receiving signal

11

+24V6FB

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

12

+24V6FB

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

13

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

1

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

FUSROTSE

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Fuser rotation’s detection signal

4

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

EXIPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Eject sensor signal

7

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

8

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

9

PREMOTPOSSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

Pressure release detection signal

10

FUSTMPSE2

I

Analog

Fuser terminal thermistor signal

11

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

1

+24V0

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

2

+24V0

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

3

+24V0

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

4

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

7

ZCROSS

I

0/3.3 V DC

Zero cross signal

8

HEAT

O

0/3.3 V DC

Heater lighting signal

9

STANDBYN

O

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep control signal

10

RELAY

O

0/3.3 V DC

Relay control signal

1

—

—

—

Not used

2

—

—

—

Not used

3

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

4

MPFSOLRE

I

0/24 V DC

MPF solenoid drive

YC19

YC20

YC21

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-5

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC23

1

POWERSW

I

0/3.3 V DC

Power source switch signal

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

1

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

2

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

ISUHPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

HP detection signal

4

ISUMOTA1

O

0/24 V DC

ISU motor A phase voltage

5

ISUMOTA2

O

0/24 V DC

ISU motor A phase voltage

6

ISUMOTB2

O

0/24 V DC

ISU motor B phase voltage

7

ISUMOTB1

O

0/24 V DC

ISU motor B phase voltage

1

DPMOTA1

O

0/24 V DC

DP motor A phase voltage

2

DPMOTA2

O

0/24 V DC

DP motor A phase voltage

3

DPMOTB2

O

0/24 V DC

DP motor B phase voltage

4

DPMOTB1

O

0/24 V DC

DP motor B phase voltage

5

+24V6FA

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

6

DPREGCLURE

O

0/24 V DC

DP Registration clutch drive

YC34

1

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

35 ppm model

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

DPREGPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP registration 2 sensor signal

4

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

DPFEEPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP paper feed sensor signal

7

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

8

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

9

ORGSETSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP document detection sensor signal

10

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

11

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

12

DPCOVER

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP cover opening and closing detection signal

YC34

1

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

40 ppm model

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

DPREGPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP registration 2 sensor signal

4

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

DPREGPAPSE1

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP registration 1 sensor signal

7

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

8

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

9

DPFEEPAPSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP paper feed sensor signal

YC31

YC33

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-6

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC34 40 ppm model

10

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

11

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

12

ORGSETSE

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP document detection sensor signal

13

+3.3V4LED

—

about1.2 V DC

Power for PI

14

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

15

DPCOVER

I

0/3.3 V DC

DP cover opening and closing detection signal

1

VDATA2N

O

LVDS

Image data signal

2

VDATA2P

O

LVDS

Image data signal

3

VDATA1N

O

LVDS

Image data signal

4

VDATA1P

O

LVDS

Image data signal

5

SAMPLE2

O

0/5 V DC

Sample signal

6

SAMPLE1

O

0/5 V DC

Sample signal

7

LSUENAN

O

0/5 V DC

Laser lighting signal

8

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

9

VCONT

O

Analog

Standard voltage

10

PDN

I

0/5 V DC

Main scanning synchronization signal

11

+5.0V4_F

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

1

SAAVO0

I

Analog

CIS signal out 1

2

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

SAAVO1

I

Analog

CIS signal out 2

4

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

5

SAAVO2

I

Analog

CIS signal out 3

6

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

7

+3.3V5

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

8

SAASP

O

0/3.3 V DC

Main scanning synchronization signal

9

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

10

SAACLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) CIS clock

11

SAALEDA

O

0/about18 V DC

Power source for CISLED

12

SAALEDB

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode BLUE

13

SAALEDG

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode GREEN

14

SAALEDR

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode RED

YC505

YC506

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-7

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC507

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

LCD model

2

P2C_SDAT

I

0/3.3 V DC

Panel communication data receiving signal

3

INT_ENERGYSA EKEY_N

I

0/3.3 V DC

ESAVERKEY detection signal

4

C2P_PRSTN

O

0/3.3 V DC

Panel reset signal

5

INT_ANYKEY

I

0/3.3 V DC

INT_ANYKEY detection signal

6

C2P_SDAT

O

0/3.3 V DC

Panel communication data sending signal

7

+5V2

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

8

+3.3V2

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

YC507

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

TSI model

2

PANEL_STATUS

—

—

There is no function in Libra.

3

INT_ENERGYSA EKEY

I

0/3.3 V DC

ESAVERKEY detection signal

4

FPRSTN

O

0/3.3 V DC

Panel reset signal

5

LCDCON

O

0/3.3 V DC

LCD control signal

6

24VSHUTDOWN

O

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep control signal

7

LED_PROCESSI NG_N

I

0/5 V DC

LED control processing

8

LED_ATTENTION _N

I

0/5 V DC

LED control attention

9

LED_MEMORY_N

I

0/5 V DC

LED control memory

10

PANEL_WAKEUP

O

0/3.3 V DC

Panel recovery signal

11

BUZERCON

O

0/3.3 V DC

Buzzer control

YC508

1

+24V4

—

24 V DC

24 V DC power source

FAX model

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

+3.3V2

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

4

RESB

O

0/3.3 V DC

Reset signal

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

HSCLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) SPI clock

7

HSD

I

0/3.3 V DC

SPI data input

8

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

9

HSAD

O

0/3.3 V DC

SPI data, address output

10

HSCCSB

O

0/3.3 V DC

SPI chip select

11

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

12

HINT

I

0/3.3 V DC

Interruption signal

13

—

—

—

Not used

8-8

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC509

1

ADFVO0

I

Analog

CIS signal out 1

40 ppm model

2

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

ADFVO1

I

Analog

CIS signal out 2

4

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

5

ADFVO2

I

Analog

CIS signal out 3

6

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

7

+3.3V5

—

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

8

ADFSP

O

0/3.3 V DC

Main scanning synchronization signal

9

SGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

10

ADFCLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) CIS clock

11

ADFLEDA

O

0 V DC/about18V

Power source for CISLED

12

ADFLEDB

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode BLUE

13

ADFLEDG

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode GREEN

14

ADFLEDR

I

0 V DC

CISLED cathode RED

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

2

DATAP

I/O

LVDS

USB data signal

3

DATAN

I/O

LVDS

USB data signal

4

VBUS(+5.0V4)

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

5

FGND

—

0 V DC

Ground

YC511

1

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

TSI model

2

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

3

+5V2

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

4

+5V2

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

YC514

1

VBUS(+5V4)

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

TSI model

2

DN

I/O

LVDS

Panel data signal

3

DP

I/O

LVDS

Panel data signal

4

—

—

—

Not used

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

S

SHELL

YC510

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-9

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) High voltage PWB Connector position

CN2

Gr

M

S

PGND2

T PGND1 CN1

YC201 1

D

Figure 8-3 PWB photograph

Figure 8-4

8-10

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC201: Main/Engine PWB Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC201

1

SHVCNT

I

0 to 3.3 V DC(Analog)

High voltage (S) output off/on (output adjustment) : Japanese specification only

2

+24V6ILF

—

24 V DC

Power source for high voltage

3

THVCNT

I

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (T) output constant current off/on (output adjustment)

4

DHVCNT

I

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (D) output DC voltage adjustment

5

GHVCNT

I

0/5 V DC(pulse)

High voltage (M) output constant voltage/ constant current switch, G terminal voltage adjustment

6

RTHVREM

I

0/5 V DC

High voltage(M,T) output off/on

7

HVCLK

I

0/5 V DC

High voltage(D) output pulse

8

MHVCNT

I

0/5 V DC

High voltage(M) output 310uA/155uA switch

9

REGPAPSE

O

0/3.3 V DC

Registration paper detection

10

+3.3V4LS

—

3.3 V DC

Power for registration paper detection

11

SGND

—

—

Ground for registration paper detection

12

PGND

—

—

Ground for high voltage

8-11

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Low voltage power supply PWB Connector position

YC102

YC103 1

1

YC101 2 1

Figure 8-5 PWB photograph

Figure 8-6

8-12

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC101: Inlet YC102: Fuser heater, thermal cut-off YC103: Main/Engine PWB Connector

Pin

YC101

1

L

—

AC power voltage Commercial power connection

2

N

—

AC power voltage Commercial power connection

1

HEATERCOM

—

AC power voltage Heater live side

2

HEATERLIVE

—

AC power voltage Heater neutral side

1

RELAY

I

0/3.3 V DC

Relay control signal

2

STANDBYN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep control signal

3

HEAT

I

0/3.3 V DC

Heater lighting signal

4

ZCROSS

O

0/3.3 V DC

Zero cross signal

5

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

6

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

7

GND

—

0 V DC

Ground

8

+24V0

—

8/24 V DC

24 V DC power (8V in off-mode)

9

+24V0

—

8/24 V DC

24 V DC power (8V in off-mode)

10

+24V0

—

8/24 V DC

24 V DC power (8V in off-mode)

YC102 YC103

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-13

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Operation panel PWB (TSI) Connector position

YC4 5

1

YC6

8

1

YC14

12

YC17 1 4

1

5

1

YC8 1

YC7 1

YC12

18

5

YC2 1

Figure 8-7 PWB photograph

Figure 8-8

8-14

67

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC2: LCD YC4: Main/Engine PWB YC6: Main/Engine PWB YC7: Right key PWB YC8: Left key PWB YC17: Main/Engine PWB Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC2

1/2

LED_C(-)/ LED_A(+)

-/-

(0/5 V DC)/(5 V DC/24V)

LED power input (Low)/LED power input (High)

3/4

DGND1/X1(R)

-/I

-/(0/2.5V DC)

Digital ground/Touch panel terminal (Right)

5/6

Y2(B)/X2(L)

I/I

(0/1.5V DC)/(0/ 2.5V DC)

Touch panel terminal (Low)/Touch panel terminal (Left)

7/8

Y1(T)/AGND1

I/-

(0/1.5V DC)/-

Touch panel terminal (Upper)/Analog ground

9/10

VGH/C11P

-/-

(0/14V DC)/(3/6V DC(pulse))

11/12 C11N/C12P

-/-

(0/3 V DC(pulse)/ (3/6 V DC(pulse)

13/14 C12N/VGL

-/-

(0/3 V DC(pulse))(DC11 V/0V)

15/16 C13P/C13N

-/-

(0/3 V DC(pulse)/ (DC-3V/ 0V(pulse))

17/18 AGND2/DDVDH

-/-

-/(0/6V DC)

19/20 C14P/C14N

-/-

(0/4V DC(pulse)/ (-4/0 V DC(pulse)

21/22 VCC/NC

-/-

(0/3.3 V DC)/-

Input voltage terminal for boosting voltage/unconnection

23/24 AGND3/VCL2

-/-

-/(-4/0 V DC)

Analog ground/

25/26 C21P/C21N

-/-

(0/14 V DC (pulse)/(-5/14V DC (pulse)

27/28 IOVCC/RESB

-/0

(0/3.3 V DC)/(0/3/ Power input for logic I/O/reset terminal 3V DC)

29/30 DGND2/IOVCC

-/-

-/(0/3.3 V DC)

Digital ground/Power input for logic I/O

31/32 VDD/DGND3

-/-

(0/1.5V DC/-

/Digital ground

33/34 SHUT/CSB

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC)/(0/3/ Sleep mode control terminal/Chip select 3V DC) terminal

35/36 SDI/SCK

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC)/(0/3/ Data input terminal/clock input terminal 3V DC(pulse))

37/38 AGND4/DEN

-/0

-/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

8-15

Description

Analog ground/

Analog ground/Enable signal

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector YC2

YC4

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

39/40 B5/B4

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Blue data signal(MSB)/Blue data signal

41/42 B3/B2

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Blue data signal/Blue data signal

43/44 B1/B0

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Blue data signal/Blue data signal(LSB)

45/46 G5/G4

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Green data signal(MSB)/Green data signal

47/48 G3/G2

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Green data signal/Green data signal

49/50 G1/G0

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Green data signal/Green data signal(LSB)

51/52 R5/R4

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Red data signal(MSB)/Red data signal

53/54 R3/R2

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Red data signal/Red data signal

55/56 R1/R0

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Red data signal/Red data signal(LSB)

57/58 VSYNC/HSYNC

O/ O

(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)/(0/3.3 V DC(pulse)

Vertical synchronizing signal/Horizontal synchronizing signal

59/60 DOTCLK/VCI1

O/- (0/3.3 V DC (pulse))(0/3.3 V DC)

Clock signal/

61/62 DGND4/VREG

-/-

-/(0/4.6V DC)

Digital ground/

63/64 VCOMH/VCOML

-/-

(0/3.3 V DC)/(-2/0 V DC)

65/66 DGND5/C22P

-/-

-(-5.5/9 V DC (pulse))

Digital ground/

67

C22N

—

DC3V/-11V

1

VBUS(+5V4)

—

5 V DC

VBUS signal

2

DN

I/O

0/3.3 V DC

Highspeed

3

DP

I/O

0/3.3 V DC

Highspeed

4

—

—

—

Not used

5

GND

—

—

Ground

S

SHELL

—

—

Ground

8-16

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC6

1

GND

—

—

Ground

2

BUZERCON

I

0/3.3 V DC

Notification sound rumbling signal when recovering from sleep

3

PANEL_WAKEUP

I

0/3.3 V DC

Stop mode recovery signal

4

LED_MEMORY_N

I

0/5 V DC

Memory LED light signal

5

LED_ATTENTION _N

I

0/5 V DC

Attention LED light signal

6

LED_PROCESSI NG_N

I

0/5 V DC

Processing LED light signal

7

24VSHUTDOWN

I

0/3 V DC

LCD power off signal

8

LCDCON

I

0/3.3 V DC

LCD display control signal when recovering from sleep

9

FPRSTN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Software reset signal

10

INT_ENERGYSA EKEY

O

0/3.3 V DC

Power source key interruption signal

11

PANEL_STATUS

O

0/3.3 V DC

Panel status notification signal

12

GND

—

—

Ground

1

KEY0

I

0/3.15 V DC

Key input signal 0

2

SCAN2

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 2

3

SCAN3

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 3

4

KEY1

I

0/3.15 V DC

Key input signal 2

5

ESAVEKEY

I

0/3.3 V DC

Energy Saver key input signal

6

SCAN1

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 1

7

SCAN4

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 4

8

LED0

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

LED lghting signal 0

9

ESAVELED

O

0/5 V DC

Energy Saver LED light signal

10

KEY2

I

0/3.15 V DC

Key input signal 2

11

PROCESSING

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Processing LED light signal

12

SCAN0

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 0

13

MEMORY

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Memory LED light signal

14

LED1

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

LED lghting signal 1

15

ATTENTION

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Attention LED light signal

16

BUZZER

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

Buzzer control signal

17

GND

—

—

Ground

18

KEY3

I

0/3.15 V DC

Key input signal 3

YC7

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-17

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC8

1

SCAN2

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 2

2

LED2

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

LED lghting signal 2

3

KEY4

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key input signal 4

4

SCAN1

I

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 1

5

SCAN0

O

0/3.15 V DC

Key scan signal 0

1

+5V2

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

2

+5V2

—

5 V DC

5 V DC power

3

GND

—

—

Ground

4

GND

—

—

Ground

YC17

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-18

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(5) Operation panel PWB (LCD) Connector position YC3 2

1

Figure 8-9 PWB photograph

Figure 8-10

8-19

1

YC2 YC1 8

8

1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC2: Main/Engine PWB Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC2

1

+3.3V2

—

0/3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power supply

2

+5V2

—

0/5 V DC

5 V DC power

3

C2P_SDAT

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Panel communication data receiving signal

4

INT_ANYKEY

O

0/3.3 V DC

Key input signal at sleep

5

C2P_PRSTN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Software reset signal

6

INT_ENERGYSA EKEY_N

O

0/3.3 V DC

Energy Saver key input signal

7

P2C_SDAT

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Panel communication data sending signal

8

GND

—

—

Ground

8-20

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(6) PF main PWB (option) Connector position

YC7 NC1

NC2

1

3

1

YC5

13

YC2

YC6 1

14

Figure 8-11 PWB photograph

Figure 8-12

8-21

1

YC4 4

5

1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector access point YC2: PF paper feed clutch, PF conveying clutch YC4: PF conveying motor YC5: Main/Engine PWB YC6: PF main PWB (Lower cassette) YC7: PF feed sensor Connector

Pin

YC2

1

+24V6FB

O

24 V DC

24 V DC power output

2

FEEDCLN

O

0/24 V DC

Paper feed clutch signal

3

+24V6FB

O

24 V DC

24 V DC power output

4

TRNSCLN

O

0/24 V DC

Conveying clutch signal

1

TMOTRDYN

I

0/3.3 V DC

Motor rotation stability signal

2

TMOTCLK

O

0/5 V DC(pulse)

motor rotation standard clock

3

TMOTDRVN

O

0/5 V DC

motor rotation start/stop signal

4

GND

O

—

Ground

5

+24V6

O

24 V DC

24 V DC power output

1

GND

I

—

Ground

2

+3.3V4

I

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power input

3

+3.3V2

I

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power input

4

PFINT

O

0/3.3 V DC

Recovery factor signal

5

PFRDY

O

0/3.3 V DC

Main PFRDY

6

PFSEL0

I

0/3.3 V DC

PF select signal

7

PFSEL1

I

0/3.3 V DC

PF select signal

8

PFCLK

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Main PFCLK

9

PFTXD

I

0/3.3 V DC

10

PFRXD

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) PF receiving data

11

+24V6FB

I

24 V DC

24 V DC power input

12

+24V6FB

I

24 V DC

24 V DC power input

13

GND

I

—

Ground

1

GND

O

—

Ground

2

+3.3V4

O

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

3

+3.3V2

O

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

4

PFINT

I

0/3.3 V DC

Recovery factor signal

5

PFRDY

I

0/3.3 V DC

Main PFRDY

6

PFSEL0

O

0/3.3 V DC

PF select signal

7

PFSEL1

O

0/3.3 V DC

PF select signal

8

PFCLK

O

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Main PFCLK

9

PFTXD

O

0/3.3 V DC

10

PFRXD

I

0/3.3 V DC(pulse) PF receiving data

YC4

YC5

YC6

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-22

Description

PF receiving data

PF receiving data

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Connector

Pin

YC6

11

+24V6FB

O

24 V DC

24 V DC power output

12

+24V6FB

O

24 V DC

24 V DC power output

13

GND

O

—

Ground

14

NC

—

—

Not used

1

+3.3V4

O

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

2

GND

O

—

Ground

3

PFEED

I

0/3.3 V DC

Conveying paper timing sensor

YC7

Signal

I/O

Voltage

8-23

Description

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

9 Appendixes 9-1

Appendixes

(1) Repetitive defects gauge

First occurrence of defect

40.0 mm / 1 9/16” Sleeve roller 48.0 mm / 1 7/8” Transfer roller

93.0 mm / 3 11/16” Press roller 94.0 mm / 3 11/16” Drum / Fuser belt

*: The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.

9-1

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(2) Firmware environment commands The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed permanently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands. This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.

Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page. Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parametervalues before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send theFRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;) The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence: !R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT; Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A !R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT; FRPO parameters Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

Message language selection at power-up (LCD model except 100V only)

B7

0: Entering into the language selection menu 1: Not entering the language selection menu

1

Default pattern resolution

B8

0: 300 dpi 1: 600 dpi

0

Number of copies at start-up

C0

1 to 999

1

Page orientation

C1

0: Portrait 1: Landscape

0

Default font*

C2

Middle two digits of power-up font

0

C3

Last two digits of power-up font

0

C5

First two digits of power-up font

0

PCL font switching

C8

0:HP compatible mode 32:Compatibility mode

0

Total host buffer size

H8

0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5

5

Form feed time-out value

H9

Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99).

Reduction (100 V model only)

J0

0: 100% 5: 70 % 6: 81 % 7: 86 % 8: 94 % 9: 98 %

0

Auto linefeed mode (100 V model only) (Japanese emulation only)

J7

0: Auto linefeed 1: No auto linefeed

0

9-2

6 1: 100V

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

Horizontal offset (100 V model only) *

K0

-7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm

0

K1

-99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm

0

Vertical offset (100 V model only)*

K2

-7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm

0

K3

-99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm

0

Kanji font number setting (100 V model only)

K4

0: Same as V7 1: Mincho 40 dots 2: Gothic 40 dots 5: Mincho 48 dots 6: Gothic 48 dots

0

New/old JIS code switching (100 V model only)

K6

0: JIS X 0208: 1990 1: JIS X 0208: 1978 8: JIS X 0213: 2004

0

Duplex printing mode selection

N4

0: OFF 1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind) 2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)

0

Sleep timer time-out time

N5

1 to 240 minutes

1

Ecoprint level

N6

0: OFF 2: ON

0

Default emulation mode

P1

6 : PCL6 9 : KPDL

Carriage-return action

P2

0: Ignores 1: CR 2: CR+LF?

1

Linefeed action

P3

0: Ignores 1: LF 2: CR+LF?

1

KPDL auto switching

P4

0: None 1: Auto switching

AES option Page eject command and action when automatic emulation switching (AES) is triggered

P7

If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is processed in the alternate emulation . 0: All page eject commands 1: None 2: All page eject commands and Prescribe EXIT command 3: Prescribe EXIT command only 4: ^L command only 6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is processed in KPDL. 10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed in the alternate emulation.

Command recognition character

P9

ASCII code of 33 to 126

9-3

6 9: 120V

0 1(120V model) 10 11: 120V

82(R)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

Paper size(start-up)

R2

0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 1: Envelope Monarch 2: Envelope #10 3: Envelope DL 4: Envelope C5 5: Executive 6: Letter 7: Legal 8: ISO A4 9: JIS B5 13: ISO A5 14: ISO A6 15: JIS B6 16: Envelope #9 17: Envelope #6-3/4 18: ISO B5 19: Custom 20: B4 to A4(100 V model only) 21: A3 to A4(100 V model only) 22: A4 to A4[98%](100 V model only) 23: STK to A4(100 V model only) 31: Hagaki 32: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Oficio II 40: 16K 42: 8.5×13.5 50: Statement 51: Folio 52: Youkei type 2 53: Youkei type 4

0

Default paper source

R4

0: MP paper feed section 1: Cassette 1

1

9-4

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

MP tray size

R7

1: Envelope Monarch 2: Envelope #10 3: Envelope DL 4: Envelope C5 5: Executive 6: Letter 7: Legal 8: ISO A4 9: JIS B5 13: ISO A5 14: ISO A6 15: JIS B6 16: Envelope #9 17: Envelope #6-3/4 18: ISO B5 19: Custom 31: Hagaki 32: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Oficio II 40: 16K 42: 8.5×13.5 50: Statement 51: Folio 52: Youkei type 2 53: Youkei type 4

8 6(120V)

A4/Letter override

S4

0: OFF 1: ON

1 0 (100V)

Host buffer size rate (H8 value and integration)

S5

0: 10KB 1: 100KB 2: 1MB

1

RAM disk size

S6

1 to 1024

400

RAM disk size

S7

0: RAM disk mode OFF 1: RAM disk mode ON

Tray1 size

T1

5: Executive 6: Letter 7: Legal 8: ISO A4 9: JIS B5 13: ISO A5 14: ISO A6 15: JIS B6 18: ISO B5 19: Custom 33: Oficio II 40: 16K 42: 8.5×13.5 50: Statement 51: Folio

9-5

1 8 6(120V)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting 8 6(120V)

Tray2 size

T2

5: Executive 6: Letter 7: Legal 8: ISO A4 9: JIS B5 13: ISO A5 14: ISO A6 15: JIS B6 18: ISO B5 19: Custom 33: Oficio II 40: 16K 42: 8.5×13.5 50: Statement 51: Folio

Wide A4

T6

0: OFF 1: ON

0

Line spacing

U0

Lines per inch (integer value)

6

U1

Lines per inch (fraction value)

0

U2

Characters per inch (integer value)

10

U3

Characters per inch (fraction value)

0

Country code of the resident fonts

U6

0: US 1: France 2: Germany 3: U.K. 4: Denmark 5: Sweden 6: Italy 7: Spain 8: Japan 9: US legal 10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual) 11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese) 12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French) 13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian) 14: Norway 15: Denmark 2 16: Spain 2 17: Latin America

41 0 (100V)

Supported symbol sets

U7

0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 1: IBM 6: PCL

53 0 (100V)

Default font pitch*

U8

Default font pitch/integer

10

U9

Default font pitch/decimal

0

Character spacing

9-6

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

V0

Integer value of ANK outline font size at powerup Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09

0

V1

Integer value of ANK outline font size at powerup Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99

12

V2

Decimal value of ANK outline font size at power-up Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75

0

ANK outline font name at start-up*

V3

ANK outline font name at power-up

Initial Kanji outline font side at start-up (100 V model only)*

V4

Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font size at start-up Valid value range: 00 to 09

0

V5

2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up Valid value range: 00 to 99

10

V6

2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75

0

Initial Kanji outline font name (100 V model only)*

V7

Kanji outline font name at start-up

Default weight(courier and letter Gothic)

V9

0: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = darkness 1: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = darkness 4: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = regular 5: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = regular

5

Color mode

W1

0: BW 1: Color (CMYK color)

1

Gloss mode

W6

0: OFF 1: ON

0

ANK outline font size at start-up*

9-7

Courier

MTHSMINCHO-W3

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

Paper type for the MP tray

X0

1: Plain 2: Transparency 3: Preprinted 4: Labels 5: Bond 6: Recycled 7: Vellum 8: Rough (except 100 V model) 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 12: Envelope 13: Hagaki 14: Coated 16: Thick 17: High quality 21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

1

Paper type (Paper cassettes 1)

X1

1: Plain 3: Preprinted 5: Bond 6: Recycled 8: Rough (except 100 V model) 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 16: Thick 17: High quality 21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

1

Paper type (Option paper cassette 2 to 5)

X2

1: Plain 3: Preprinted 5: Bond 6: Recycled 8: Rough (except 100 V model) 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 16: Thick 17: High quality 21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

1

Cassette selection mode (PCL)

X9

0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si 2: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000

0

Auto error clear at an error

Y0

0: OFF 1: ON

0

Auto error clear timeout time

Y1

Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99).

6

9-8

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA Items

FRPO

Setting value

Factory setting

Paper error detection at duplex printing Paper size and type error detection at fixed paper source

Y3

0: Not detected 33: Detected

33

Forced duplex printing setting (Media type is Preprinted, Prepunched and Letterhead only)

Y4

0: OFF 1: ON

0

PDF direct printing

Y5

0: Zoom depending on paper size 1: Loads paper which is the same size as the image 2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size 3: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image size 8: Printed in full magnification 9: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image size 10: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size 13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)

0

Job box error control

Y6

0: No error control 1: Output the error list 2: Displays the error 3: Displays the error and prints the error report

3

*: Ignored depending on emulation

9-9

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures Adjusting order

Item Adjusting the center line of the MP tray (printing adjustment)

Image

Maintenance mode Item No. U034

Mode LSU Out Left

P.6-23

A

1 Adjusting the LSU print start timing.

Adjusting the center line of the cassettes (printing adjustment)

(Original: test pattern)

U034

LSU Out Left

P.6-23

A

2 Adjusting the LSU print start timing.

Adjusting the leading edge registration of the MP tray (printing adjustment)

(Original: test pattern)

U034 A

LSU Out Top Full

P.6-23

3 Changes the secondary feed timing.

Adjusting the leading edge registration of the cassette (printing adjustment)

(Original: test pattern) U034 A

LSU Out Top Full

P.6-23

4 Changes the secondary feed timing.

Adjusting the leading edge margin (printing adjustment) 5

(Original: test pattern) U402

Lead

P.6-47

A

Changes the LSU illumination start timing.

Setting procedure

Page

(Original: test pattern)

Method 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Select [Lsu Out Left]. 3. Press the [System Menu] key. 4. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key. 6. Select [MPT]. 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Select [Lsu Out Left]. 3. Press the [System Menu] key. 4. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key. 6. Select?[Cass1] to [Cass3]. 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Select [Lsu Out Top Full]. 3. Press the [System Menu] key. 4. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key. 6. Select [MPT]. 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Select [Lsu Out Top Full]. 3. Press the [System Menu] key. 4. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key. 6. Select [Cass]. 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select [Lead].

Setting 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Remarks *When the setting value is increased, the image moves leftward. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex mode.

Press the [Stop] key. 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

*When the setting value is increased, the image moves leftward. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex mode.

Press the [Stop] key. 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

*When the setting value is increased, the image moves downward. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex mode.

Press the [Stop] key. 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

*When the setting value is increased, the image moves downward. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex mode.

Press the [Stop] key. 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

*When the setting value is increased, the margin widens.

Press the [Stop] key. Adjusting the trailing edge margin (printing adjustment) 6

Changes the LSU illumination end timing.

U402

Trail

A

(Original: test pattern)

P.6-47

1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select [Trail].

1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Press the [Stop] key.

9-10

*When the setting value is increased, the margin widens.

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Adjusting order

Item Adjusting the left and right margins (printing adjustment)

7

Changes the LSU illumination start/end timing.

Image

Maintenance mode Item No. U402

A

Mode A Margin C Margin

Setting procedure

Page P.6-47

(Original: test pattern)

Method 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Press the [Start] key. (output a test pattern) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select [A Margin] or [C Margin].

Setting 1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Remarks *When the setting value is increased, the margin widens.

Press the [Stop] key. Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction

U065

Main Scan

P.6-25

8 Processes data. (Original: test copy)

1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Place an original and press the [Start] key. (Test copy output) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select [Main Scan].

1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

U065: When using on the contact glass *When the setting value is increased, the imagewidens.

Press the [Stop] key. Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the sub scanning direction (scanning adjustment) 9

Changes the original scanning speed.

U065

Sub Scan

P.6-25

U070

Sub Scan(F) Sub Scan(B) Sub Scan(CIS)

P.6-29

(Original: test copy)

Adjusting the center line (scanning adjustment)

U067

Front Rotate

P.6-27

Scan data is processed.

U072

Front Back CIS

P.6-32

10

(Original: test copy)

Adjusting the leading edge registration (scanning adjustment)

11

Changes the original scan start timing.

U066

Front Rotate

P.6-26

U071

Front Head Back Head

P.6-30

(Original: test copy)

1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Place an original and press the [Start] key. (Test copy output) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select the item to be adjusted. U065: [Sub Scan] or [Rotate] U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or [Sub Scan(CIS)] 1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Place an original and press the [Start] key. (Test copy output) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select the item to be adjusted. U067: [Front] or [Rotate] U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS]

1. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [System Menu] key. 3. Place an original and press the [Start] key. (Test copy output) 4. Press the [System Menu] key. 5. Select the item to be adjusted. U066: [Front] or [Rotate] U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head]

9-11

1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Press the [Stop] key.

1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Press the [Stop] key.

1. Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value. 2. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value. Press the [Stop] key.

U065: When using on the contact glass *When the setting value is increased, the imagewidens. U070: When using document processor *When the setting value is increased, the image get longer.

U067: When using on the contact glass *Adjustment at the time of rotate copy, select[Rotate]. *When the setting value is increased, the image moves leftward. U072: When copying from the document processor *Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of duplex mode. *When the setting value is increased, the image moves rightward. U066: When using on the contact glass *Adjustment at the time of rotate copy, select[Rotate]. *When the setting value is increased, the imagemoves forward. U071: When using document processor *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the time of duplex mode. *When the setting value is increased, the imagemoves forward.

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA-3

When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94340), the following adjustments are automatically made: Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction MTF correction Input gamma correction coefficient for color Color correction matrix coefficient Input gamma correction coefficient for monochrome

When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94330), the following adjustments are automatically made: *:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly positioned against the original.

Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072)

9-12

Image quality Items

Specifications

100% magnification

Printer: ±0.8% Copy: ±1.5% Using DP: ±2.0%

Magnificaiton

Copy: ±2.0% Using DP: ±2.5%

Lateral squareness

Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm

Leading edge timing

Print: 2.0 mm or less Copy: 2.0mm or less Using DP: 2.5mm or less

Skewed paper feed (left-right difference)

Print: 1.0mm / 10.0mm or less Copy: 1.0mm / 10.0mm or less (table) 1.5 mm / 10.0mm or less (DP)

Lateral image shifting

Print: ±2.0mm or less (cassette) ±3.0mm or less (MP tray) Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette) ±3.0mm or less (MP tray) Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette) ±3.0mm or less (MP tray)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4) Wiring diagram (4-1)Standard YC9 1 2 3 4 5 6

4 1 YC21 3 2

2 Relay 1 2 1

MP solenoid

Registration clutch

Paper feed clutch

WE 2 2 WE 1 1

+24V6FA REGCLURE

GN 2 2 GN 1 1

+24V6FA FEEDCLURE

+24V6FA DLPCLURE

YW 2 2 YW 1 1

Developer clutch

+24V6FA MPFSOLRE

1 2 3 4 5 6

MAIMOTDIR MAIMOTRDYN MAIMOTCLKN MAIMOTREN GND +24V6IL

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

Main motor

Main/Engine PWB (1/4)

2 3 1 4

1 1 YC10 2 2

YC6

3 3 4 4

1 1 2 2 3 3

4 4 5 5 6 6

+3.3V2LED GND CASPAPSE

+3.3V2LED GND MPFPAPSE

3 1 2 Relay 2 1 3

3 3 2 2 1 1

Paper sensor

3 1 2 Relay 2 1 3

3 3 2 2 1 1

MP paper sensor

5 5 6 6 7 7

+24V6FA FAN2MOTRE

Right side fan motor

1 2 Relay 2 1

Eject solenoid

Fuser pressure release motor

Inside temperature sensor

Polygon motor

Toner sensor

Power source switch

PREMOTRE —

1 3 2 2 3 1

PREMOTRE+

2 Relay 2 1 1

Left side fan motor

2 2 1 1

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

+24V6FA EXISOLRE

FAN1MOTRE +24V6FA(FAN)

GND INTTMP

+24V6FA GND PMOTREN PMOTRDYN POTCLKN

BK 3 WT 2 RD 1

GND ITOEMPSE +3.3V4LS

2 RD

POWERSW

1 BK

GND

7 7 8 8

2 1 YC7 1 2

9 9

1 1 YC1 2 2 YC5 1 1 2 2

3 3

BK RD

GND +24V6ILFERA

1 2 3

Eraser PWB Temperature sensor

4 4 YC2

5 5 6 6

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

7 7 8 8

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

3 3 2 2 1 1

HUMCLK HUMDATA_ TMPDATA_ GND

FUSTMPSE1O GND +3.3V4LS FUSTMPSE1A TPSDA TPSCL

YC3

5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10

YC14

GND 11 11 WTOFULSE 12 12 +3.3V4LS 13 13

1 1 YC23 2 2

9-13

1 3 2 Relay 2 3 1

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Thermo pile

3 2 1

Waste toner sensor

BK WE RD

Temp/Humid sensor

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

Grid PWB

Gr

High voltage

Grid

Main charge

M

Developer

D

Transfer

T

Separate

S R

YC201 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 PWB 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

PGND SGND +3.3V4LS REGPAPSE MHVCNT HVCLK RTHVREM GHVCNT DHVCNT THVCNT +24V6ILF SHVCNT

Registration sensor

1 1 YC16 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12

Main/Engine PWB (2/4)

YC17 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

YS1 EEPROM

100MΩ

+24V0

10 1 YC20 9 2 8 3 7 4 6 5 5 6 4 7 3 8 2 9 1 10

+3.3V4LED 7 7 GND 8 8 PREMOTPOSSE 9 9 WE 3 3 WE 2 2 WE 1 1

Thermo stat

Fuser pressure release sensor

1 Relay 2 2 1

Thermo stat

Eject sensor

YC102 HEATERCOM 1 1 2 HEATERLIVE 3 2

2

+3.3V4LED 4 4 GND 5 5 EXIPAPSE 6 6

AC inlet

N

1 L

L L E E N N

WE 3 3 WE 2 2 WE 1 1

(E) 250V/10A (U) 250V/15A

YC101

YC19 FUSTMPSE2 10 10 GND 11 11

(E) 250V/2.5A (U) 250V/4.0A

+3.3V4LED 1 1 GND 2 2 FUSROTSE 3 3

+24V0 +24V0 +24V0 GND GND GND ZCROSS HEAT STANDBYN RELAY

Fuser edge thermistor

Low voltage power souce

YC103 10 1 9 2 8 3 7 4 6 5 PWB 5 6 4 7 3 8 2 9 1 10

3 2 YC8 2 +24V0IL 1 1

GY 3 3 GY Rotation detect sensor 2 2 GY 1 1

Inter lock switch

Fuser unit

9-14

GND +24V6FB +24V6FB PFRXD PFTXD PFCLK PFSEL1 PFSEL0 PFRDY PFINT +3.3V2 +3.3V4LSF GND

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14

P F-1100

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

LC D model

Main/Engine PWB (3/4)

USB PWB USB (A)

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

FGND VBUS(+5.0V4) DATAN DATAP GND

5 4 3 2 1

YC507

5 YC510 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GND P2C_SDAT INT_ENERGYSAEKEY_N C2P_PRSTN INT_ANYKEY C2P_SDAT +5V2 +3.3V2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 YC2 7 6 Operation 5 PWB 4 3 2 LCD 1

panel

YC502

T S I model 1000base-T

APC PWB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

+5.0V4 PDN VCONT SGND LSUENAN SAMPLE1 SAMPLE2 VDATA1P VDATA1N VDATA2P VDATA2N

11 YC505 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

YC511 1 2 3 4

YC501

USB (B)

4 3 2 1

GND GND +5V2 +5V2

1 2 2 4

4 YC17 3 2 1

YC503

SDHC

YC 507 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11

YC504

WiFi

LSU

YC514 1 2 3 4 5 S

Right key

9-15

1 2 3 4 5 S

GND 12 12 YC6 PANEL_STASUS 11 11 INT_ENERGYSAEKEY 10 10 FPRSTN 9 9 LCDCON 8 8 24VSHUTDOWN 7 7 LED_PROCESSING_N 6 6 LED_ATTENTION_N 5 5 LED_MEMORY_N 4 4 PANEL_WAKEUP 3 3 BUZERCON 2 2 1 1

VBUS(+5V4) DN DP GND SHELL

YC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PWB 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

KEY0 SCAN2 SCAN3 KEY1 ESAVEKEY SCAN1 SCAN4 LED0 ESAVELED KEY2 PROCESSING SCAN0 MEMORY LED1 ATTENTION BUZZER GND KEY3

1 2 3 4 5 S

1 YC4 2 3 4 5 S

1 YC7 2 3 4 5 6 Operation 7 PWB 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

YC2 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/22 23/24 25/26 27/28 29/30 31/32 33/34 35/36 37/38 39/40 41/42 43/44 45/46 47/48 49/50 51/52 53/54 55/56 57/58 59/60 61/62 63/64 65/66 67

LED_C(-)/LED_A(+) DGND1/X1(R) Y2(B)/X2(L) Y1(T)/AGND1 VGH/C11P C11N/C12P C12N/VGL C13P/C13N AGND2/DDVDH C14P/C14N VCC/NC AGND3/VCL2 C21P/C21N IOVCC/RESB DGND2/IOVCC VDD/DGND3 SHUT/CSB SDI/SCK AGND4/DEN B5/B4 B3/B2 B1/B0 G5/G4 G3/G2 G1/G0 R5/R4 R3/R2 R1/R0 VSYNC/HSYNC DOTCLK/VCI1 DGND4/VREG VCOMH/VCOML DGND5/C22P C22N

1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/22 23/24 25/26 27/28 29/30 31/32 33/34 35/36 37/38 39/40 41/42 43/44 45/46 47/48 49/50 51/52 53/54 55/56 57/58 59/60 61/62 63/64 65/66 67

LC D

panel YC8 1 2 3 4 5

SCAN2 LED2 KEY4 SCAN1 SCAN0

Left key PWB

DPCIS

(40 ppm model only)

9-16 (40 ppm model only)

D P timing sensor

+24V4 GND +3.3V2 RESB GND HSCLK HSD GND HSAD HSCCSB GND HINT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Main/Engine PWB (4/4)

YC34 (40 ppm model)

DP

SAAVO0 SGND SAAVO1 SGND SAAVO2 SGND +3.3V5 SAASP SGND SAACLK SAALEDA SAALEDB SAALEDG SAALEDR

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4 5 6 7

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

3 3 2 2 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

CN4

LINE

PMIC debugger I/F

Main JTAG I/F

Main debugger DS I/F

Main debugger FP I/F

Main flash I/F

ISUMOTA1 4 ISUMOTA2 5 ISUMOTB2 6 ISUMOTB1 7

+3.3V4LED 1 1 SGND 2 2 ISUHPSE 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

YC522

1 2 2 Relay 1

12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

3 3 2 2 1 1

6 6 5 5 4 4

9 9 8 8 7 7

YC521

P N

P 1 1 N 2 2

DPREGPAPSE 3 3 GND 2 2 +3.3V4LED 1 1

DPREGPAPSE1 6 6 GND 5 5 +3.3V1LED 4 4

DPFEEPAPSE 9 9 GND 8 8 +3.3V4LED 7 7

ORGSETSE 1 2 12 GND 11 11 +3.3V4LED 10 10

YC520

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 1 2 2 3 3

12 12 11 11 10 10

C31

D P backside timing sensor

D P paper feed sensor

D P original detect sensor

D P open close sensor

DPCOVER 15 15 GND 14 14 +3.3V4LED 13 13

YC33

1 1 2 2 3 3

+24V6FA 5 5 DPREGCLURE 6 6

DPMOTA1 1 1 DPMOTA2 2 2 DPMOTB2 3 3 DPMOTB1 4 4

YC506

2 2 1 1

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Scanner motor

Home position sensor

CIS

D P paper feed clutch

1 2 3 4

ADFVO0 SGND ADFVO1 SGND ADFVO2 SGND +3.3V5 ADFSP SGND ADFCLK ADFLEDA ADFLEDB ADFLEDG ADFLEDR YC509

D P paper feed motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

YC523 YC526

YS500 DDR3 DIMM

YC34 (35 ppm model)

YC508

FAX PWB

CN3 TEL

speaker

(FAX model only)

2S0/2S1/2S2/2S3/2S4/2S5/2SG/2SH/3RA

(4-2)PF-1100 (Options)

Main/Engine PWB

14 14 14 14 13 13 13 13 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

GND +3.3V4 +3.3V2 PFINT PFRDY PFSEL0 PFSEL1 PFCLK PFTXD PFRXD +24V6FB +24V6FB GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC5 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 1 2 2

Grounging plate

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND +3.3V4 +3.3V2 PFINT PFRDY PFSEL0 PFSEL1 PFCLK PFTXD PFRXD +24V6FB +24V6FB GND NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC6 9 10 11 12 13 14

3 3 4 4

3 3 YC7 2 2 1 1

PF paper sensor

NC1

PF cassette detect sensor

PF conveying motor

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

TMOTRDYN TMOTCLK TMOTDRVN GND +24V6

5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5

2 2 1 1

PF paper feed clutch

2 2 1 1

PF conveying clutch

YC2

PF main PWB 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+24V6FB FEEDCLN

NC2 YC4

9-17

+24V6FB TRNSCLN

PFEED GND +3.3V4

1 1 2 2 3 3

PF feed sensor

Installation Guide

PF-1100 (250 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder)

Installation Guide

PF-1100 安裝手冊 ㉘㾌㙼⇨㉐

Руководство по установке

PF-1100 PF-1100 PF-1100

1

PF-1100 PF-1100 Установка PF-1100

安裝PF-1100 㻼㻲㻙㻝㻝㻜㻜㉘㾌 ㉘㾌 㻼㻲㻙㻝㻝㻜㻜䛾タ⨨

2

3

1

2

Загрузка бумаги

1

3

裝入紙張 㟝㫴G㤵㣠

Folio Oficio II Legal

2

4

5

For Canada: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B

2016.6 303RA5614001

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. Headquarters 225 Sand Road, Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America 8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100 Miami, Florida 33166, USA Phone: +1-305-421-6640 Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong Phone: +852-2496-5678 Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions (China) Corporation 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District, Shanghai,200003, China Phone: +86-21-5301-1777 Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd. 6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, Canada Phone: +1-905-670-4425 Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México Phone: +52-555-383-2741 Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda. Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás, Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP 06543-306, Brazil Phone: +55-11-2424-5353 Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions (Thailand) Corp., Ltd. 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue, Bangkok 10800, Thailand Phone: +66-2-586-0333 Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions Singapore Pte. Ltd. 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A, Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118 Phone: +65-6741-8733 Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions Hong Kong Limited

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong Phone: +852-3582-4000 Fax: +852-3185-1399

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile Phone: +562-2350-7000 Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions Taiwan Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113, Australia Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions New Zealand Ltd. Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland, New Zealand Phone: +64-9-415-4517 Fax: +64-9-415-4597

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd., Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C. Phone: +886-2-2507-6709 Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd. #10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu, Seoul, Korea Phone: +822-6933-4050 Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions India Private Limited Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road, Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India Phone: +91-0124-4671000 Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Phone: +31-20-654-0000 Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V. Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands Phone: +31-20-5877200 Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS, United Kingdom Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A. Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy, Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V. Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S. Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, France Phone: +33-1-69852600 Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch, Germany Phone: +49-2159-9180 Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120, Wien, Austria Phone: +43-1-863380 Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden Phone: +46-8-546-550-00 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway Phone: +47-22-62-73-00 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup, Denmark Phone: +45-70223880 Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda. Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa, Portugal Phone: +351-21-843-6780 Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, 28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain Phone: +34-91-6318392 Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park, 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa Phone: +27-11-540-2600 Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Finland Phone: +358-9-47805200 Fax: +358-9-47805390

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow, Russia Phone: +7(495)741-0004 Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, Switzerland Phone: +41-44-9084949 Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions Turkey A.S. Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy 34394 Şişli İstanbul, Turkey Phone: +90-212-356-7000 Fax: +90-212-356-6725 © 2017 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17, Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. 2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku Osaka 540-8585, Japan Phone: +81-6-6764-3555 http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com